Overthrown, The Death of America

[day late]

Attn. TBers, and especially Mods. No doubt some of you have seen this posted on a site that can not be mentioned. THIS IS NOT A CUT AND PASTE ITEM. I am the author of this story. I have already spoken with Dennis on this matter. He has assured me that since I am the author, all rights to the story remain with me. There is no violation of any agreements between any parties. He has also generously given me the go-ahead to post the story here.

For those who haven't read this story, it is only one mans' idea of possible events in the days not too far ahead, and should not be considered in any way to be prophetic. I ask only two things.

First, if there is any comments, questions, or discussion about it, please start another thread for that purpose, so the story can continue smoothly.

Second, judging by the comments I have so far recieved about the story, sit back, buckle up real tight, and hold on. You are in for a ride.

Now without further delay, may I present;



Overthrown, The Death of America.


"Daddy, I'm still hungry".

John looked at his 10 year old daughter. She looked so different from a year ago. True she was older, but she weighed far less than she should. Her eyes were pleading with him to do something to fill the empty spot in her belly. His heart was breaking. Since the troubles started, everything had changed. Calif. had finally had "The Big One" and the entire coast had been devastated. From the Mexican boarder, to San Fransisco, anything that wasn't under water, was wreak and ruin. There was no citrus, veg tables, or even wine coming from there anymore. The only "industry" out there was trying to find all of the dead, and do what could be done to try to rebuild.

Farmers in the southern part of the country, while truly sorry for the loss of life, looked forward to increased profits for their own crops, since there were fewer crops going to market. That is until "The Storm" hit. Who would have dreamed it? Three hurricanes in the Atlantic, two more from the Gulf of Mexico, and even one more that had crossed over from the Pacific, combining into one huge mega storm. It had covered nearly a quarter of the North Atlantic at the height of the storm. Then it had slammed into the southeastern part of the country. That was less than six months ago. They still didn't have any reports from anything south of Tallahassee Fla. Roads were impassible. The winds had reached over two hundred miles an hour. Not much was left standing within thirty miles of the coast. Certainly any oranges growing down there were being pulled off of the trees and eaten on the spot by any survivors.

John looked at his little girl again and remembered how happy she had been a week ago when he had managed to buy a single small orange for her birthday. It had cost him nearly twenty dollars, but the look on her face had been worth it.

With the crops across the country being hammered into the ground by the disasters, the government came out and told the people that they would have to get by on a reduced diet of 1200 calories a day, until further notice. Less than 1200 for those under 16 years of age. They were all hungry, but how do you explain that to a brand new 10 year old?

John was hungry too. VERY hungry, since he had been insisting that his wife take more of the food. After all, she was still nursing their new born son. They both needed the food more than he did, to his way of thinking.

Then his mind drifted to the Timmons family across the street. How he and others had laughed, and made fun of Mike and his wife for the two years worth of food they had set aside "just in case". Back then, everyone KNEW that no matter what happened, the government would be there to handle the situation. Life would go on, and everything would be fine. They weren't laughing now. Early on, before the mega-storm, John had gone over to them and asked about borrowing some food, until he could pay it back.

"John I'm sorry. But if I give you our food, what will we eat? I can't do it. Why didn't you prepare when you could? I warned you that we were at risk. And you even make more money than I do. You should have done something. Anything would be better than this. Really I'm sorry, but if I give you food, then it will be the Johnson's down the street. Then the Smiths from the next block. I just can't do it, I'm sorry".

The Timmons hadn't done as the government had ordered after the mega-storm. They kept their stockpile of food instead of turning it in for the greater good of the country. Now they sat there, well fed and relatively happy. It made him mad.

The more he thought of the Timmons, the angrier he got. Their kids were such smart alecks. Not that they were disrespectful, it was just that they were at least two years ahead of other children their age in their education. How could his kids compete with that when they grew up? Home-schooling seemed to work for them. He just couldn't afford to take the time to do it for his daughter. Ask those kids any question, and they would answer well beyond their years.

"DADDY. I'm hungry"!

John thought about just going over and taking the food he needed. He just wasn't sure if Mike had turned in his guns when the government had outlawed them to settle things down when the food started to run out.

What to do? What to do? He remembered the commercial he had seen on T.V. before the power became so unreliable. The mega-storm had done unbelievable damage to the oil industry. The shortage had driven oil to over two hundred dollars a barrel. Still, there had been a phone number for tips to turn in hoarders. There was even a reward of part of the food confiscated to the tipster. He had written it down somewhere. Maybe he should find it.

John shook his head. What was he thinking? Their kids played together after school. During the summer, they all went swimming in the Timmons pool, and had bar-b-ques. Still, they had more food than they needed, and it wasn't fair to the rest of the people for them to hoard all that wonderful food.

"DADDY?"

His mind made up, he spoke to his little girl.

"Don't worry sweetheart. Daddy is going to have lots of food for you in a day or two. But for now, off to bed with you, and try to sleep."

With this promise, the girl smiled, and when to her room.

[day late]

In the Timmons household, the blankets had been put over the windows. Mike, his wife Sarah, and their 15 year old son were sitting around the table, talking quietly so as to not wake the 10 and 12 year old son and daughter sleeping in the next room, making sure that all was in readiness. The lantern was turned down to give only a minimum of light. No sense in letting people know that the Timmons' had things that they might want.

"Mike, are you sure we have to do this?" Sarah asked once again. "This is such a nice neighborhood. The children like it, and we have friends here. Do we really have to leave?"

"I"m afraid so. Things are getting out of control. You should have heard a couple of guys at work today. They were planning on how they were going to split up the reward food they were getting for a tip they turned in. And they don't even know how much, if any, that they are going to get. Do you remember a couple of months ago when I had to pull my shotgun, on two different occasions, to keep someone from breaking in to steal our food?"

She nodded silently.

"Things haven't gotten better since then. I honestly believe the only reason we haven't had a third visit is because nobody is sure if I turned in our weapons or not when they said to turn them in. It is only a matter of time, and I think a short time, before someone tries again. THEN what do we do? If I shoot, everyone will know we're armed, and the authorities will be coming to visit. If I don't shoot, we lose whatever they can carry away, and who knows what will happen to us."

"Mom, Dad's right. Some of my friends have been asking why I'm not as thin as they are. I've been able to come up with excuses so far, but it is getting harder to do every day. On top of that, I noticed two of them pointing at me and talking to each other kind of secretly. I think they are going to turn us in for food hoarding."

"Thank you for telling me that, Tommy. I've been wondering how anyone would know about our back yard garden, since the fence is 8 feet tall. What you said might explain how someone knew to raid our garden. I know. You're both right. It is just this is our home. I hate the thought that we will be forced to leave."

Mike answered.

"I know, me too. Is everything packed in the 4X4? Gas tanks topped off from our stash?"

"Yes Dear. Tommy and I got all of that done while you were at work today. Are you sure we can get out of town without being noticed? What about the guns? If we get caught with them..." her voice trailed off. The penalty of death for having a firearm was well know to everyone in the country. It was also well know that the sentence was carried out on the spot. No exceptions, and no appeal.

"I'm as sure as I can be. I know all the back roads to my hunting cabin. We don't have to spend any time on major roads, and we should be able to avoid roadblocks, God willing. It is only 60 miles. It shouldn't take more than an hour and a half to get there. If we leave in the early morning, most everyone will still be asleep, and the guys on patrol from the police and army won't be at their sharpest. Besides, nobody goes out at night any more. The headlights they are used to seeing are from their own vehicles. We should be able to sneak through."

Turning to his son, Mike said,

"I want you to get some sleep son. I'll wake you in a few hours, and grab a little shuteye myself. Then we get the younger ones, and pull out. Sarah, make sure you keep them quiet. Last thing we need is to have someone call and report we are acting strangely at the last minute. Now, a few last things that I want the two of you to listen to carefully."

Mentally Mike did something he hadn't done in years. He went back to his infantry training.

"First, Tommy, you are riding with your mother. Keep the shotgun out of sight, but close enough to use if you have to do so. Understand me son, you DO NOT fire, unless, or until I do. The only exceptions to that is if we get stopped. If anyone tries to get into the S.U.V., or pull someone out, you DO NOT give them a warning. DO NOT give them a chance. DO NOT threaten them. You just shoot them. Remember, they are professionals. Given any excuse, or reason THEY WILL kill you without a second thought. Then they will kill everyone else in the vehicle."

To his credit, Tommy took it in stride. It took half a second for the statement to sink in, and he answered.

"I understand."

"Sarah, if Tommy has to shoot, DO NOT wait for instructions. You hammer the gas and run. You don't stop until you get to the cabin. Understand?"

"Yes." was her only word.

Quietly, mother and son went to bed, as the father pulled his pistol from it's holster, checking it one more time, before putting it back and arranging the belt into a more comfortable position. It was going to be a long night.

As instructed, Tommy woke his parents at 4:30. Mike made one last check of the 4X4 Sarah was driving, and his pick-up, as Sarah woke the younger children. The news that they were going to go for a ride was exciting for them. They hadn't been for a ride in months. Sarah, quieted them and warned them to not make any noise. They gathered in the garage.

"O.K. one last thing before we go. Let's pray."

"Mike? Do you think we have time for that?"

"Sweetheart, do you really want to try this WITHOUT praying first?"

"Ummmm, I see what you mean."

The prayer was brief, but heartfelt.

"Here Tommy, take this."

It was a short range walkie talkie.

"This isn't for chatting. Turn it on, but use it only in case of emergency. No point in telling anyone that might be listening what we are doing."

They got in the vehicles and as quietly as possible, pulled out, with a last longing look at the home they had known for years. To Mike's sup rise they made it out of town without attracting any unwanted attention. Once in the suburbs, he turned onto a service road that followed one of the major power-lines into town. Knowing that this very rough dirt road was almost totally unused, he knew it would be unguarded. After passing the third hill after leaving town, Mike turned on the headlights.

The sun was just starting to come up, and things had gone well. No roadblocks, no patrols, no trouble of any kind, and Mike was starting to relax. That is when the radio crackled to life.

"Dad, we are being followed."

He looked in the mirror and saw only the 4X4.

"How close are they?"

"REAL close and getting....HEY!!! Dad they just rammed us."

"Give me your mother."

"I hear you Mike. What do I do?"

"They want to bump you off the road. Next time they start to come at you, slam on the brakes."

"WHAT? Mike that makes no sense."

"Sarah, listen to me. Just before they bump you again, hit the brakes HARD. Trust me. Just do it."

"Here they come again."

Mike watched the mirror. Suddenly the front of the S.U.V. jerked downward as Sarah laid on the brakes. Although he couldn't see the pursuit vehicle, he knew what would happen. At 50 M.P.H. the pursuit car didn't have a chance. When the front of the 4X4 went down, the back end came up. The trailer hitch sticking out the back passed above the bumper, crashed through the front grill and punched a gaping hole in the radiator. Hot water and steam came boiling out. Even more important, and what Mike was counting on, was at that speed, the impact caused the airbags in the chase car to deploy. Blinded by the airbag, and having his hands also forced off the wheel at the same time, the driver lost control. The car jerked to one side as Sarah hit the gas, then it swerved the other direction. Finally, one wheel dropped off the pavement, dug into the soft dirt on the edge of the road, then it flipped and rolled down into the ditch.

"Mike, he's in the ditch. what do we do now?"

"Follow me."

5 Miles down the road was a small river. Mike crossed over it, and then pulled off onto the one lane paved road leading down to Tommy's favorite fishing hole. At the bottom, he pulled under the overpass far enough for Sarah to pull in behind him, and get out of sight from both the road, and the air.

Once stopped, Mike went back to check on his family. The younger children who had been scared at the time of the attack, were now bragging about how Mommy had saved them from the bad guys. Tommy got out of the car to stretch his legs. Sarah continued to sit behind the wheel, and try to stop from trembling. As Mike came to her, she looked at him and asked,

"Do you think they called us in on the radio?"

"That would be standard procedure. That's why we got out of sight."

"Oh. Yes, I guess you are right."

From the back of the 4X4 Tommy called.

"Dad! I think you should have a look at this.'

Mike walked to the back of the 4X4. The rear hatch was badly damaged. He had his doubts about if he would ever be able to open it again. That's when he heard it. A vehicle of some kind was coming towards them, at high speed. He ran to the pick-up. reaching through the window, he grabbed a rifle, and moved to the front end and used it as a shield between him and whoever was coming. Glancing over his shoulder, he saw Tommy doing the same thing at the back of the S.U.V.

As he listened to the oncoming vehicle, he heard the helicopter coming, not far behind. Suddenly the vehicle slowed, then stopped at the edge of the bridge they were hiding under. He heard two car doors open, then close above them. This was followed by a voice.

"Eagle Three, do you see anything?"

The reply was indistinct.

"That's what I thought. If there was anyone out here, they are long gone by now."

Again the radio was not quite understandable.

"Well, all I can tell you is that Charlie said something about a 4X4 hitting the brakes, and then he died."

Again, indistinct radio talk came back.

"If you ask me, Charlie wasn't the greatest driver, and he liked to drive fast. I think he dropped a wheel off the side, and flipped. I don't think he knew he was dieing, and was looking for an excuse for the wreak."

More garbled talk from the chopper.

"No. I haven't seen any sign of another car. Lets' call it quits and go home."

Mike listened as two car doors opened, closed, the engine start, and the vehicle turn around and head back to where it came from.

After a couple of minutes, Mike realized his chest was hunting. That's when he remembered to breathe. Shortly after that Sarah called to him.

"Mike. I'm glad we prayed before we left."



The police Chief sat at his desk studying the list of names of people to be picked up on the following night. As he was checking it out, he heard 'The General" coming. It wasn't that he was loud, in fact it was quiet the reverse, the fact was that as he came into view, everyone fell silent. Nobody wanted to attract his attention. It was known that those who got on his bad side had a habit of disappearing, forever!

As 'The General' entered the office the Chief rose out of his seat to greet him. The Chief hated to do this, because as he looked into the Generals' eyes, he saw nothing but pure evil.

"Good morning Sir! How are you doing this fine day?"

"Same as always. Waiting for the enemies of the state to become memories. How are YOU coming with that?"

The Chief held up the list.

"There is good news and bad news. The bad news is that it seems some of those on the list might have already left town. The good news is that most of the disruptor's are still at home, waiting to be picked up."

"Good. good. Get as many of them as you can tonight."

"Not to worry Sir. If they are anywhere around here, we'll have them by morning."

"Make sure you get as many as possible." With that, the General turned on his heel and left the Chief to his task.

[day late]

Oops. Dupe of above.

[day late]

The operation began in the smaller cities and towns, as night fell. Larger cities were surrounded by the foreign troops. Nobody was allowed out, but anyone foolish enough to try to enter the cities was allowed to proceed. Once in the city, they wouldn't be permitted to leave again. The smaller cities and towns were overwhelmed by foreign troops who moved with speed and ruthlessness that was unknown to the American people. Long before dawn, in most cases, the round-up was complete. Since most of the people had turned in their firearms during the time the government was trying to regain control of the country, things went very smoothly. On the few occasions there was any resistance, if it couldn't be quickly and easily overcome, they just backed off, and called in the tanks. After a few high explosive shells, resistance ended with the death of those who fought back.

The people in the cities had no idea what was going on in the countryside, since all communications such as telephones were taken down before the start. Two way radios were jammed to prevent anyone from talking about what was happening. Only military frequencies were still clear. None of the civilians used those channels, for fear of letting the military know where they were hiding. It was bloody work, which these men knew well, and had no qualms about doing. Besides, after it was done, they knew they would have their pick of any women captured. And if one of them fought back, the choice was simple. Beat them into submission, or just shoot them and find another. Resistance was quite limited, and brief.

In the morning, the Chief looked over the railing to the courtyard below. Last night had been a good one. Nearly everyone on the pick-up lists had been rounded up. With all of the help he had gotten, in the months before this, by the honest citizens of the state, it had been easy. The ones that hated guns, were only too happy to turn in those who had them. The ones that dis-trusted the home schoolers, possibly because the home schooled children usually did better not only in school, but later in life as well, wanted their children to have a level playing field. With the home-schoolers out of the way, now their children had a better chance. Once the food started getting short, almost everyone was happy to turn on those who had actually prepared for such a possibility. Especially when the word got out that by doing so, they would get part of the confiscated food as a reward. Yes, the honest law-abiding citizens had made his job so easy.

The Chief turned his back on the mass of people below, and went back into his air conditioned office. It was early, and the day promised to be a hot one.

As he sat there going over the list of those few that had managed to escape the dragnet, thinking about who to assign to go after them, the door opened. Looking up, he saw the General come into his office. Smiling, he stood to welcome his guest. Knowing that this man would be quite pleased with the results of last nights raids. He was certain that he would soon get his "unimagined" reward. The smile faded from his face, when he saw the three large men, in body armor with pistols tucked into their waistbands, follow the General into the room.

"What's the meaning of this?" he asked as two of them came foreword to first disarm, then to bind the Chief. "I've done nothing wrong. I've gone out of my way to help you get these malcontents rounded up."

"Yes Chief. You have been a great assistance to us. Nearly all of the people that might cause trouble are now safely locked away, until they reach the camps." A stone cold smile briefly crossed his face, as he thought of what awaited the malcontents there. "We couldn't have gotten it done so quickly or as easily as you managed to do. And that is why you will be joining them. You see Chief....or should I say ex-Chief, since you have captured and turned over to us everyone we asked for, how can we trust someone that betrays his own people? How could we be sure you wouldn't do the same to us?"

He waved to former Chief to silence before he could say a word.

"No matter what you say, we couldn't believe you. Save your breath. You're going to need it. Take him away".

Once in the courtyard, the chief didn't have to worry about things for very long. He had just been re-elected. Everyone there knew his face. They weren't happy with him.

The General sat at the desk of his former ally. It had been so easy. A couple of attacks with scalar weapons to cause the "natural disasters" and the Americans started to fall apart. Let them stew for a little while, and they begged for the foreign troops to come in and "help" them. With the assistance of a few well placed congressmen to disarm the population, and set them up for the kill, the rest went very smoothly. in his mind, behind the cold almost lifeless eyes, He imagined what it would be like when his master showed up in Jerusalem to take his throne. Then he would have his reward. All of those prisoners to play with. So much delicious meat for the table. And it had been so simple. So easy.

[day late]

Kathy couldn't believe this was happening. After all, this was America, it couldn't happen here. But it was. Before the power had become so unreliable, and sporadic, she and her husband Tim, had seen the President come on the T.V. to talk to the American people. New York, L.A., and Washington D.C. had been hit with nuclear weapons. What hadn't been wiped out by the blasts, was so contaminated by radiation that rescue operations would be delayed until the radiation had died down. But until that happened, martial law was in effect.

With most of the military engaged in the middle east, the President had an idea. One that had been on his mind for a long time. N.A.T.O. troops were already in America. Some had been stationed on active military bases. Others were kept out of sight on bases that had been closed down for years. None of them cared a bit about the Constitution. They would do as they were told, without remorse or hesitation. After all, they weren't shooting their own people. This was America. These people needed to be brought down. They had been running things all over the world for far to long. The President knew that was what they were thinking. This was his chance to take full control over the nation. The members of Congress that hadn't been killed, didn't have a place to meet. He would make sure they never did. With numerous Presidential Orders, and Presidential Decision Directives already in place, in case of something like this, of course, he had the authority to rule by decree.

It wasn't long before the members of different gangs found out that these men weren't what they were expecting. Foolishly they had assumed they would be like the cops they were used to, and could deal with. They had expected these troops to follow the law, as did the American National Guardsmen. They didn't. It was as if they made up their own laws as they went. Soon the gang bangers were starting to drop like flies, as the foreign troops opened fire on them on sight. They didn't even try to capture them. They just shot them.

Nobody was to leave their home. All citizens were requested to give every assistance to the foreign troops. Unfortunately the troops had been sent to the larger cities and towns first. Kathy and Tim hadn't even seen so much as a military truck yet.

Many people had welcomed these men who were putting a long awaited end to the gangs reign of terror. At least, in the beginning. But there had been stories about some of the troops starting to behave even worse than the gangs. Taking whatever struck their fancy, and there was nobody to stop them. Food, drink, money, and in some cases it was rumored, even women and children, were taken. Never to be seen again.

So the surviving gang members had simply moved out of the cities, and were now terrorizing the countryside.

While Kathy huddled with their children in the back bedroom, as Tim gripped and re-gripped the baseball bat in his hands. He knew it wouldn't be much help in the face of the gang bangers, but it was all he had. They had never been into the outdoors kind of thing, and when Kathy had gotten pregnant with their first child, Tim toyed with the idea of getting a gun of some kind, for protection. However, when he brought up the subject to her, Kathy talked him out of it. After all, the police were only a phone call away, and everyone knew it wasn't wise to keep a loaded weapon around small children. He regretted that he had allowed his wife to talk him out of it.

Suddenly shots rang out. Not just one or two, but several shots. They seemed to go on and on. Almost like a machine gun. The crowd of people scattered. All except those who wouldn't ever go anywhere, ever again.

That's when her cell phone rang. She answered it to hear;

"Kathy, are you guys alright?"

It was Bob. He lived across the street. She knew he was a veteran, but never really paid much attention to what he talked about. He was such a paranoid person.

"Yes Bob, we are still here."

"O.K. I'm in the front yard. I'm coming for you. Get everyone ready to move to my place."

"Why?"

"Maybe I'm mistaken, but you don't seem to be ready for what is going on today." Half jokingly he asked, "Do you want me to leave?"

"NO, no, we are coming out."

"Wait a minute."

Another shot was heard.

"That one was faking it. Alright, come ahead. And let's be quick about getting across the street."

Kathy and Tim both did what they could to keep the children from witnessing the dead bodies in the yard, and near the front door, but there was no way to prevent them from seeing at least some of the carnage.



She looked at Bob as they started to jog to his house. He was carrying a small rifle with an unbelievably long magazine sticking out of it. Somewhere in the back of her mind, the term "banana clip" surfaced. He was also wearing what seemed to be a bullet proof vest.

They moved as quickly as they could, but with young children in tow, their speed was somewhat reduced. Still, in just a couple of minutes they were in Bobs' home. They noticed that the over-sized glass doors in his living room were boarded up, except for a couple of small slits cut into the wood. Between the cut outs were weapons leaning against the walls, with boxes and boxes of ammunition.

The smaller three children were taken into one of the back bed-rooms, and told to wait for a few minutes. Bob went into the garage, and started his generator, which made surprisingly little noise, since he had added additional baffles to the exhaust. Returning to the children, he turned on a T.V. and put a suitable tape into the old fashioned V.C.R. and began the show to keep them busy while the older folks talked.

He then went into the kitchen and started a pot of coffee, as Kathy and Tim sat and watched in amazement. It was almost as if nothing had changed in Bobs' home. T.V. with coffee. The food in the fridge was cold, and the ice maker could be heard filling with water in the freezer. If it weren't for the boarded up windows, and the pistol that never left Bobs' hip, it might be just like any other night, before it had all started.

"O.K. folks, coffee will be ready in a moment. But if you'll excuse me, I'm in the mood for something a bit more stout."

With that, he opened a cabinet, pulled out a bottle of Rum, and poured himself a drink.

"Alright then. I think we need to have a talk. After the events of today, I don't think I'm going to have to try too hard to convince you both that you need to have some weapons. Do I?"

Bob was almost shocked when Tim answered.

"Bob, don't get me wrong, we are truly thankful for what you have done. But Kathy and I talked this over a long time ago, and agreed to not keep weapons in the house. As a matter of fact, I think maybe you should make sure that none of your guns are loaded around the kids."

Bob couldn't believe it.

"Tell me something Tim, does it hurt very much?"

"Hurt? What are you talking about?"

"Being THAT stupid has got to be painful. Both of your vehicles have been trashed. The same for the front door of your house. When you came out, all you had was a bat. How much did you expect to do with that?"

The older man shook his head, and continued.

"Son, all you were going to do was die. And I don't even want to think about what was going to happen to your wife and daughters. Maybe even your sons, if those gang bangers were sick enough."

He paused long enough to take a drink from his glass, and continued.

"You people almost died today. And I promise you, that death would have been very ugly and painful. It nearly happened because you have no way to defend yourselves. Now you want me to disarm myself? It's not going to happen. What are you thinking?"

Kathy looked at Bob, as he spoke, with renewed respect. It was true he was sometimes a little rough around the edges, but you always knew where you stood with him. There wasn't anything wishy-washy about him. He didn't often give his word, but when he did, you knew he would keep it, or die trying. He was nothing less than whole-hearted in every thing he did. And he was usually liberal with his words of wisdom. Like the time two years before when he was helping Tim remove a couple of trees that had died and were endangering their home. He worked hard that day, side by side with Tim, for most of the day. At one point, she had brought him a glass of iced tea and suggested that he should leave the rest of the clean up of the downed trees to Tim and her two oldest sons.

"You've been working hard all day, and that is good enough. Tim and the boys can finish."

Bob gratefully accepted the tea, took a drink, and said;

"Kathy, haven't you ever noticed how 'good enough' usually isn't?"

He took another swallow, then set the glass down, and went back to work. For Bob, honor wasn't a word. It was a way of life.

"Tim, wait a minute. Bob is right. Hold on, hold on. I know I was the one that was against having a gun in the house. I was wrong Tim. Today proves how wrong I was. We aren't going to get through this without them."

Tim looked at his wife. Surprise plain on his face.

"Honey, are you sure about this? Neither one of us has ever held, let alone used a gun before. I don't even know how to load one."

"When we were in the house, and those people were outside, breaking in, I wanted a gun. I wanted to stop those people by whatever means necessary. I think we can get some instruction on how to shoot, can't we Bob?"

"That can be arranged. In fact, I think since you now own some weapons, it would be a very good idea."

"Bob? What are you talking about? We don't own any guns."

"Sure you do. I happen to know that you own at least one shotgun and four or five pistols. I saw them out there on your front lawn. After all, the former owners are hardly likely to complain about it."

Kathy wondered. How did he come up with these wise words so easily.

[day late]

Tim felt sick. Just like many Americans, he'd seen the war movies. When veterans talked, he heard the stories. But nothing he had seen or heard prepared him for this. He just wasn't ready for the reality of just how much of a mess that a bullet could make of a man. Nobody had ever mentioned the horrible smell either.

"Check the pockets for spare magazines and ammo." Bob called out. "Try not to miss anything of value. Anything we can use to defend ourselves. Radios, knives, anything at all. That one closest to the door was the first one I put down. I saw him stick a handgun in his waistband before he started on the glass. Roll him over and get it."

Tim noticed the bullet had hit the dead man in the back of the head. He rolled the body over, and made the mistake of looking at what was left of the face. This time he did get sick.

"Tim, Are you O.K. now?"

"I think so. Are we done here?"

"Yeah, we're done. Lets' go."

As they again carefully crossed the street Tim spoke again.

"Bob, how long do you think it will be before we can move back into our home? After that mess is cleaned up I mean."

"Tim, I wouldn't recommend that. We've been lucky so far. They got badly hurt the first time. They are licking their wounds right now, but they will be back. And in greater numbers. Your place is totally indefensible. There are too many windows, and other places where it can be broken into. Thin walls, those glass doors that lead out to the pool. I'll bet you don't even have the first sheet of plywood to cover any of that glass, do you?"

Tim shook his head.

"Even if you could secure that place, you have no food to speak of, no generator to power the stove, or any other means of preparing food. And you STILL need to learn how to shoot. With just a few handguns, and a pump shotgun, you won't last long when they do come back."

"What about you? You're only one man. Your house has a lot of glass as well. Aren't you worried about it?"

Bob smiled grimly.

"I may have gotten out of the service many years ago, but I know a few tricks. Have you noticed how any opening big enough for a man to get through has been either boarded up, or the opening has been at least partially blocked off?"

"What about the front door? It is still wide open."

"Yes, it is. I WANT them to come to that door. You can't get close to it without being in the open. That makes them a perfect target. Truth is, Son, that I've arranged for them to come that way. I'm channeling them into a shooting gallery."

"You are still just one man."

"Yes, but have you ever heard of something called 'force multiplication'?"

"No."

"We'll discuss it later. Right now, back inside so we can get started on your education."

After what Tim had said earlier about unloading weapons to keep the children safe, Bob had no illusions of how things were going to go next.

"Bob! You can't be serious. Sammy and Tommy are just BOYS. They aren't ready for anything like this." Kathy exploded.

"Kathy, they WERE boys. After today, that childhood is at an end. From here on out, they are young men. How old are they now? 14? 16?"

Kathy nodded.

"You know as well as I do that in some places your older boy would already be looking for a wife. Both of them would be expected to contribute to the welfare of their tribe or whatever, by hunting, and even fighting should that tribe be attacked."

"But this is America! We aren't some third world country."

"This WAS America. The world we knew and loved is as dead as a stone, or hadn't you noticed? There are foreign troops patrolling the streets. Does that sound like the 'Land of the Free, and Home of the Brave' to you? It sure doesn't to me. You two better understand right now, all bets are off. NOTHING will be the same ever again. With those two having at least a handgun, we have doubled our chances of surviving. An extra two sets of eyes will help keep us safe."

"But that doesn't mean they have to have a gun!"

"Well, you tell me. What if something happens, and we get separated from one of them? And what if they run into people like those from this morning? Wouldn't you want them to be able to defend themselves? What if something happens to YOU?"

Kathy searched for something to say. If this were as little as two months ago, she would have just called the police. Now there were no police.

"Those young men NEED to learn how to shoot. Lives will depend on it."

Shortly after this, Tim, Kathy, Sammy and Tommy, were gathered around the dining table watching as Bob explained the basics of handguns. Soon they were all able to load, unload, arm, and disarm the pistols. Bob was about to go into the workings of the pump shotgun when one of the younger children came out of the back room.

"Mr. Bob? Why is there a car battery in your hallway?"

"I had to leave it there for a little while. I didn't want those bad people to get it."

"Oh. Mom, Dad, Mr. Bob, I think I saw some of those bad guys."

"Where did you see them?"

"By the end of the house."

"This is it!" Bob said, "Everyone grab a weapon. Remember what I told you. You don't have training to be marksmen, so just try to get the bullet somewhere close enough to scare them."

Each person old enough to carry a weapon, picked up one from the table, and moved to a separate view slit in the boarded up windows. It was Sammy that spoke up first.

"I see two of them out back. They just seem to be looking at the house, they aren't trying to get in."

"Nobody on my side." Kathy called out.

"Those two in the back yard are starting to go back where they came from." Tommy shouted from the far end of the house.

"Mike? What about you?"

"Nothing yet. Wait a minute. they are sneaking towards the front door. They are right up against the wall."

Anything in the mirror?" Bobs' home was L shaped. The front door was located at the crook in the L. He had placed a small curved mirror above the door, so that a person in one part of the L could use it to see what was coming up on his blind side.

"Yes! I can make out at least three."

"Tim? Do you remember me saying something about 'force multiplication'?"

"Yes."

"When they get within six feet of the door, tell me. Then get down."

"NOW!"

Bob touched three certain wires of several sticking our of the wall to the car battery. From the crook in the L, booby traps, buried just an inch under the ground, exploded. Bits and pieces of broken glass, nails, even small stones fired outward and traveled along the outside walls in both directions. The gang members were lifted off their feet, and were thrown backwards. Only the ones nearest the end of the line got up to limp away.

"THAT'S what I was talking about."

After the bombs had been blown, a second group started to rush the back side of the house. A shouted warning from Tom and Sam was all that was needed. Two more explosions' went off in the back yard, with the same kind of result. The gang bangers backed off. NOTHING in that house was worth these kind of losses. Soon there was nobody left outside, that was still breathing.

[day late]

Reports were coming into the Presidents' office, from the Regional Directors. Things were going well. All major cities and towns were, if not pacified, at least under siege. Confusion in those places was the order of the day. That was good. Food shortages were bound to be next. The more the population was confused, the weaker they were, the less the chance for any kind of organized resistance. Being encircled, nothing and nobody got in or out. The useless eaters in them were on their own, with no chance for outside help.

Out in the countryside, things weren't going quite so well. In many places there was resistance to the rabble of invading gangs, but that meant when the troops were done doing their job in the cities, there would be fewer to resist them when they moved out into the surrounding hills, valleys, and flat lands. The unknowing cannon fodder that the gangs really were, would have done their job by then. If they actually managed to take over a town or two, that just meant the locals would welcome their deliverers with open arms, just as they had done in the cities. True, there were a few places where things could have gone better, but that was already figured into the plan. After all, you can't make omelets without breaking a few eggs. Besides, no-one cared what happened to these vermin anyway.

Still, he was bothered about how things were turning out in the south eastern region, and in certain western areas. It could be, SHOULD be, going smoother. He picked up the phone. The conversation with the Southern Regional Director was short, sharp, and to the point. Eliminate resistance, or someone who could would be found.

Director Claire put the phone down. His ears ringing with the Presidents' displeasure. Then he picked it up again.

"Find Jose' and get him in here. NOW!" Was shouted into the phone before it was slammed back down.

He sat down to look at the reports again. He hated to admit it, but the President was right. Things should be going much better than this. Here and there, throughout his region the MS-13 members that had been turned loose on the population were taking unacceptable losses. Those stupid red-necks out in the countryside were fighting back. Maybe they weren't organized yet, but they were doing a lot of damage. As he scanned the lists of known resisters' names, he couldn't help but notice that many of them were veterans of military service. Not all, but many of them.

Should these people get together, they already knew how to fight, and they knew how to give, and how to carry out orders. They could train others. They were an unacceptable threat. Then, there were the reports from some places, of people gathering in churches. Most of the time, the gangs waited for the doors to close, then moved in and began the slaughter. But there were a few churches, by the time MS_13 moved in to wipe them out, the entire building was empty. All vehicles from out front had simply vanished. He knew what it meant. They were getting help from 'the other side'. Helpers sent by 'the Nazarene'. The problem was he couldn't prove that.

There was a knock on the door.

"Come in."

Director Claire looked up as Jose' entered the room. What a mismatched pair they were. He stood there in his beautiful three piece suit, and Jose' walking in wearing torn jeans, a t-shirt, and a sleeveless jacket with the MS-13 colors and symbols, like the spider-web, sewn all over it. What could be seen of his arms showed tattoos that were much the same. He smelled of marijuana and beer, and walked with a cocky self assurance. Behind him came his number 1 man. Manuel, looked very much like Jose', but each of them knew who was the head man.

"Hey, Director Claire. Hows' it going?"

"You've failed me!" Claire shouted; "You were supposed to have your area under control by now!"

"Hey man, you never told me that these dumb rednecks would shoot back like that. This is your fault, not mine."

Clair quieted and calmed himself.

"This is your country, these are your people, you should have known. You should have known what your enemies could do. You didn't and you've lost too many men, and the job still isn't done. You failed me."

With that, he picked up the pistol on his desk, and shot Jose' twice, in the classic style of an assassin. Once in the chest, once in the head, otherwise known as 'the double tap'.

He turned there weapon on Manuel.

"Looks like you just got promoted. YOU are the head man now. You know what I want. GET IT DONE!!!"

Wisely, Manuel backed out of the room, keeping his eyes glued to the pistol, until he could make a dive for the door, and out of the line of fire.

Claire pushed a button on his desk,

"Get someone in here to clean up this mess."

-------------------------------------------------------

As soon as Bob and Tim had gathered all the weapons, spare ammo, and other things they might need from those who wouldn't be needing them any longer, they returned to the house. Both Tim and Kathy were surprised to hear Bob say;

"Time to pack up, and get out of Dodge."

"Why? We've shown them it's not safe for them to come here, I don't think they'll come back after this. We have BOMBS for goodness sake. They don't what to mess with that."

Bob smiled to himself as he heard Kathy say 'We'. He said nothing, and let it pass. She was thinking of the group, not just her family or herself. It was a good thing.

"Kathy, that is exactly why we have to leave. Now, you've never servred in uniform, so I don't expect you to see things as I do. They may not look like an army, but whoever is directing them knows military tactics. Just like an army in wartime, they move into an area, either pacify it, or burn it to the ground, then the move to the next area. Not always in a straight line, but always where they see the next biggest threat to them.

In a case like this, where they hit a strong point, standard procedure is to back off, and wait for more men to show up. Men with bigger and better weapons. We have to be gone before they get back. And they'll never be weaker, or more disorganized, than now. We MUST go now."

"Bob! If we have to pack up, how do we leave right now?"

"We thank God for His provisioning. TOM, SAM, over here please."

Kathy wondered what he was saying, and was a little irked that Bob was ordering her sons around. But, so far, Bob had done everything he could for them, and had been right about the gangs coming back. She held her piece to see what he would say next.

"Tom, I want you to take the position by the view slits at the front door. Sam you take the slits in the first bed room on the right as you go down the hall. Either of you see anything at all, sing out loud and clear. Understand me? Good. Take your positions."

"Tim, Kathy, follow me please."

Bob turned and went to the door leading to the two car garage.

"'Jesus said, just as in the days of Noah, so shall it be...' Well, I'm not as good of a carpenter, and I don't have time to build an Ark. So we 'man the lifeboats'."

As Bob stepped aside, in the garage Tim and Kathy could see Bobs' old pick up truck, and his late wife's' SUV. Both were packed for traveling, and strangely enough, pointed outwards.

Kathy sat down on the step. "Bob, this is too much. How could you know about all of this? I refuse to take another step, until you answer some questions."

"Kathy, ask your questions, but we are running short on time. I'll answer you, but Tim and I have work to do. Tim, come help me, please. We need to take out some of this canned food, and make a hollow space in the middle, behind the front seat, for the youngest two. You pass out the boxes, and I'll set aside the ones we're going to put back in."

He moved aside as Tim opened the door and got started.

"Kathy, to answer your first question, I have to ask, how did you NOT know?"

"Not know, what do you mean?"

"I know you two are Christians. You even invited me to your church after Nancy...Well, you know."

They knew. Nancy had been a very good neighbor. She even baked cookies for her children once in awhile. Then, one morning while on the treadmill at the gym, her heart just stopped. Nothing could be done to revive her.

"Anyway, do you remember when We first moved in, about ten years ago? I gave you a book, called 'Through the Fire, Without Burning' about Dimitru Duduman. You never read it did you?"

She shook her head.

"Everything that is happening now was prophesied in that book. Not in this much detail, of course, but internal U.S. revolution is in there. The man who gave the prophecies went home in the mid nineties, but not one of his prophecies has failed. If you had read the book I gave you, you would be ready for today."

"That's good, Tim. Now we need to open the hatch and make a little space back there."

"Why?" Tim asked as he moved to do as he had been told.

"Either Tom, or Sam is going to sit back here as a rear guard. You'll have to chose which one."

"But our pastor told us we'd be taken out before anything bad happened. He even had all kinds of books on it, and scriptural verses to back him up as well."

"I'm sure he did. You know, I would be willing to bet he never explained away Matt. 24:29 to 31. In those verses, Jesus Christ, himself says he will return AFTER the tribulation. How long after? Do as Jesus said.

Study Daniel and the other prophets. In the last part of Daniel, he says the anti-Christ will rule for 1260 days. In another place it is 1290 days. Then he says 'Blessed is he that waiteth and cometh unto the one thousand three hundred, five and thirtieth day.' What would make him say something like that?

Go back to Matt. 24. What happens just after the tribulation? 'Then shall appear the sign of the son of man appearing in the east.' Kathy, if you have studied your bible, then you should know all this. As Paul said to Timothy, 'Study, to show thyself approved unto God.'"

"O.K. Tim you grab the duct tape and follow me. Kathy, would you turn on the head lights please?"

The lights came on.

"Alright, This little trick is called 'cats' eyes'. We are going to tape across the headlights, side to side, and up and down until there is only a small slit showing. You won't be able to see much, but neither will they. Just go slow and stay on my rear. Kathy, watch the light from the head lights on the door. Tell me when the shadow blocks out everything above the hood."

Bob pulled out a piece of duct tape and held it in front of the headlight. With Kathy to guide him he soon stuck the tape over the light, blocking out much of it. He then applied more tape to the lower part of the light until there was only a space about a inch high, and three inches long allowing the light out. Passing the tape to Tim, he said;

"Do the same to the other light. Use what you can see shining on the door to be your guide."

"This is going to ruin your paint."

"I think I'll get over it."

As they began to repack the S.U.V. Kathy couldn't help but notice the sheer volume of food. While Bob and Tim were covering the headlights and tail lights with the duct tape to help hide their movement, she looked into the pick up. Behind the front seat were a number of weapons as well as box after box of ammunition. Sitting next to them was a water purifier. Then there was another box about a foot square with nothing but bars of soap. On and On it went, both in the front of the truck, and in the bed.

"Bob? How in the world did you ever get all of this put together? I don't think you've missed anything. How did you find the time and money to do all of this?"

"A wise man once said, 'Do something. Do it right now. No matter how big or small, if you do anything, it is infinitely better than sitting around later thinking about what you should have done'. A wiser man, Paul said to do all we can, and then stand. ALL is a pretty broad term, so I did what I could, a little at a time, and now I'm here.

I don't think I have to mention that weapons would be a good idea. As today has proved the first two people at the scene of any violent crime are the criminal and the victim. Kathy, you know I'm not a criminal, but I refuse to be a victim. As for all of this," He waved his hand at the parked vehicles. "It was a little at a time. I buy a big bag of rice this week, I eat next month. I also buy another extra bag of rice as often as I can. If not rice, then spices, ammunition, all kinds of things.

The point is DO SOMETHING, and DO IT NOW. If you wait, you lose. Maybe some money, maybe your life, but you still lose."

"O.K. I understand that, but I mean where did you find all of this stuff? Didn't anyone ask why you were getting all of this? I can't imagine you walking out of the store with a box of bar soap under your arm."

"As I said. Bit by bit. Nobody thinks a thing about someone buying one or two bars of soap. They don't even remember it, even if you do it every week to ten days or so. That helps to keep a low profile. Also, you would be amazed at some of the deals you can get at garage sales."

"Garage sales? Are you serious?"

"Yes I am. You know we had them. Truth is, that's where the box of soap you mentioned came from. Garage sales allowed me to take advantage of things like that, camping equipment, and other things, while gaining experience in the fine art of bargaining at the same time." He paused to pick up a stuffed back pack. She saw the letters 'U.S.' stamped on the bag. Bob spoke again. "Like this thing. U. S. Army issue ruck sack with a waist band. They asked for ten, I countered with five and we settled on seven. It was a bargain at ten."

"How did you explain all of this to Nancy?"

"Sometimes I had a reasonable answer for her, like the generator. Other times I just bought things and when she insisted I return it to the store, I just had to stick to my guns and refuse. She didn't like it, but she had no real reason to complain about it, so she eventually gave up. The things I picked up in garage sales that didn't work out, either went to a charity, or was sold in our next garage sale."

[day late]

"Alright, we need to be going." Bob said. "I think it best if we put Tim behind the wheel of the SUV, I'll drive my truck. Like I told you, either Tom or Sam needs to be in the back, the other one will ride next to Tim. The smaller children just behind him. Kathy, you ride with me."

"Why can't we all ride together? The kids and us I mean." Kathy asked.

"Two reasons. First, to do that means we have to leave more food behind. Second, I could use someone riding 'shotgun' with me. Kathy, I truly feel that Tim is the better choice for the SUV. Those young men will need his guidance.' Bob smiled briefly, "Besides' you are the one with the most questions, and I did promise answers."

"What about the generator?" Tim asked.

"Leave it. Where we are going, the noise and light might give us away. Think of this as an extended camping trip."

Tim, Kathy, Tom, Sam, the children, and Bob gathered in the kitchen for a prayer of protection and guidance before moving to the garage and pulling the vehicles out. It was just starting to get dark. He was happy to see that the lights, both front and rear, which had been taped over, gave just a small amount of light. At this point, Bob stopped, reached underneath his seat, and pulled out a half dozen roadside flares.

"I'll be right back." was all he said.

Bob re-entered the home alone. As he walked down the hallway, memories of his life here with Nancy, and their son, flooded his mind. The Persian carpets muffled his footsteps for the last time. He gazed at the photos, and art work Nancy had collected over the years. He wondered for the thousandth time if his son had managed to survive everything so far, and how he was doing. He wished he could go to his son, and help him, as he had done so many times before. He knew it was out of the question. He was too far away, and in one of the cities that was under siege.

Walking back to the bed room he and Nancy had shared, He took one last longing look, ignited one of the flares, and tossed it onto their bed. Turning to the doorway leading to their sons' room, he did the same. Walking back through the house, he stopped only briefly at certain points, and lit more flares, and left them burning on the furniture. He had decided long ago, if the time ever came where he was forced to leave his home, NOTHING would be left for those who forced him out to use against him, or anyone else. Or to enjoy for themselves.

As he climbed back into the truck, Kathy looked at him. Then stared through the windshield. It didn't seem the time to ask questions, and the tears on Bobs' face told the story. In fact, she remained quiet as the slowly made their way out of town. She was only a little surprised when Bob stopped once, got a pair of bolt cutters, and set to work on a fence that was blocking their way.

Instead of taking the main road, he had gone to the back side of their neighborhood, to a fence that separated it from the development behind theirs. The fence was the only thing that prevented their crossing from one to the other. After the fence was down, Bob drove across somebodys' back yard, hit the road out in front, and made his way to a secondary road leading out of town. He knew it was little traveled, and hoped because of that, it would be unguarded. He was right. Soon they were out of town and heading into the night. Behind them, the glow of a major fire could been seen.

Two hours later, Kathy realized that they were going to be following the service road for the gas pipeline for some time to come. She had also noticed that the tears, and occasional sniff, from Bob had stopped. She began to ask her questions again.

"Bob, every step of the way, you have been ready for anything that happened. Now I think I understand what you were getting at with the Bible verses, and maybe I should have read that book, but even you said that nothing covered all this in fine detail. So how did you know?"

"You really haven't heard from them, have you?"

"Heard from who?"

"The angels."

"What? Bob now you are scaring me. What do you mean 'the angels'?"

"Just that, angels. You know, the messengers of God. You see, it is just like the Bible says in Amos. 'God will do nothing without revealing His secret to His servants, the prophets.'. Now I'm no prophet. However a friend of mine, whom God has used prophetically in the past, told me that when the time came for me to leave my home and get to a place of His choosing, I would be warned in a visitation by an angel."

"That is a lot of faith on really thin proof. Bob."

"True. But you know what is written. 'Now faith is the substance of things hoped for, the evidence of things not seen.' I placed my faith in what I believed to be a word from God. Like Noah, I moved to prepare an 'ark' without any sign that I was doing the right thing. I prayed about it a lot as well. Nancy always thought I was a little off center about it, but I did what I could." At the mention of her name, tears started to well up in his eyes again.

"Oh Bob. I'm sorry. I didn't mean to bring up bad memories. I'm sure you'll see her again, when we get to Heaven."

"No, I won't." he sighed. "Nancy wasn't a believer. She was a very good woman, and I loved her very much, but she refused to accept Jesus Christ as her Savior. I won't be seeing her again. I'm mourning her loss."

Changing the subject, Kathy asked for more about the angels.

"So, did you get that visitation?"

"Yes I did. But before that, I got a dream. In the dream I knew I was traveling, and that Nancy's car was right behind me. I knew that I was running for my life. What I couldn't figure out was who was sitting beside me in the truck. I couldn't make out the face, and couldn't take my eyes off the road to look. As the dream started to fade, I was told, 'Be ready to help those I bring to you.' so even after Nancy was gone, I continued to make ready for whatever and whoever."

"So when did the angel show up?"

"Just before the gang bangers showed up at your place. I was told to stand for The Lord, and to rescue you guys."

"Was that all?"

Bob looked up for a moment and prayed.

"Show her, Lord. Please open her eyes for just a minute."

Kathy looked at him, wondering about his mental state. She looked back out the windshield, and gasped.

"Bob! There is someone sitting on the hood!"

"I know. He's been there since we left. When we get to a turn, he points the way to go, and I follow his directions."

"No, no. I mean there is someone on the hood that wasn't there a minute ago."

"Kathy, he's been there all along. You just haven't been able to see him. He's an angel. Look again"

Kathy looked out once more, and there was no sign of anyone either on the hood, or along the dirt road they were traveling.

"Ummm, Bob, I think I'm going to be quiet for a while."

"Probably a good idea. It is a bit much when you actually see an angel. I'm sure you have much to think about. Just think about this also. A lot of good Christian people have died since this whole thing began. We all have the same promise that The Father loves us and will do what is best for us, if we let Him. Who am I to say what is best for me in an hour, a day, a year, or whatever. That's in His hands. All I can do is to trust and obey."

On that, Kathy knew she could agree and trust. As Kathy sat silently after the angel had disappeared from her sight, she looked out the window of the truck, watching the scene go by. It was just after the full moon, which allowed her to see, and aided in the night driving with such little light coming from the headlights.

She had much to think about. She had always respected Bob. Though she admitted to herself that at times he did seem to be a little different. While others embraced the latest technology, Bob seemed to be going the opposite direction. He relied on things that had to be worked manually. Like the time Tim had his electronic log splitter die while cutting up logs to be split for the fireplace that coming winter. Bob, as always, was helping Tim with the chore.

"I guess that's it for today." Tim had said. "I was hoping to get this finished today."

"So, let's finish." Bob had said.

"How? The splitter is dead."

"Just watch."

Bob had gone to his garage across the street. He put some things in his pick up and driven back to where Tim stood, wondering what Bob was up to. Bob parked and started to unload his equipment. In just a short time he used metal fence posts and metal plates to assemble a rectangular box like structure. The upper plate had a log splitting wedge welded to it, pointed down. Then he bolted a hydraulic car jack to the lower part. The placed another metal plate on the top of the jack. He reached over and picked up one of the logs and placed it on the jack plate, and began to pump the jack. Slowly the log raised until it came in contact with the wedge, and then was split in two as the jack continued to push it higher. Once the pieces had fallen aside, he lowered the jack and grabbed the next log. Placing it on the jack, he looked at Tim and said, "Your turn."

The wood was split and stacked before the end of the day.

"Whatever gave you the idea for that?" Kathy had asked when she saw it.

"My determination to make sure my family stays warm in the winter. Well, that and the fact that I don't like being totally dependant on high technology. As today shows, sometimes that technology breaks down at exactly the wrong time. So don't depend on it. Depend on God and yourself."

After the events of today, she now understood what he had meant much better. Looking out the window as she thought, Kathy suddenly realized she had no idea where they were.

"Where are we Bob?"

"About twenty-five miles northwest of town."

"I don't recognize anything around here. Are you sure?"

Before answering, Bob reached into the pocket on the back of Kathy's seat. He pulled out a large well worn book, and handed it to her.

"This is a 'back roads' atlas. It shows every jeep trail and cow path known in the state. I've been using it for years. Back roads may not be the shortest way to get somewhere, but when the traffic is backed up because of an accident or something, on the main roads, they can be a lot faster. I think I've driven every back road in this part of the state. And tonight, that knowledge becomes priceless."

"Wait a minute. I thought you were following the directions of the angel." Kathy said.

"I am. He showed me we need too keep going this direction, and left us a few minutes ago. As long as we follow his directions, I'm not worried."

"Bob after everything today, not to mention the angel on the hood, I believe you are hearing from God. Has he told you anything about our future?"

Bob sighed. "Kathy, it is like I've always said. If you know the scripture, you know what happens from here on out. Things do nothing but get worse until the return of Jesus."

"Worse! Bob we are running for our lives. How can it get worse?"

"Remember Job? He lost everything but his wife and his integrity."

"I guess I need to refresh my understanding of The Bible." She fell silent again as she thought about things. She noticed that Bob, who had been traveling slowly to start with, was slowing even more.

"Is there something wrong?"

"Just making a turn that I've been looking for."

"Turn? There aren't any roads around here, are there? I mean there isn't anything but pasture land around here that I can see."

"I know, and I mean no offense, but you are looking for the wrong thing. You are thinking of paved roads. Kathy we can't afford such comforts at this time. Ah. Here we are."

Kathy looked out the window in time to see a sign go by as Bob turned off the pavement.

"BOB! That sign said 'DANGER GAS UNDER PRESSURE', do you think this is a good idea?"

Bob chuckled to himself. "I hardly think we have anything to worry about. I don't think The Lord would bring us here just to get blown up. Besides, this is a good thing."

"What do you mean?"

"Your reaction tells the story. You're concerned about something happening to us. Don't you think others feel the same way? That means we are unlikely to find anyone down this service road for the gas line. The same can be said for electric power lines, and railroad tracks. They have service roads that are rough, but usually passable. They aren't well traveled and allow us to move undetected.

Yes, I do believe The Lord knows where He is taking us, and just how to get us there. The only thing left for us is to trust and obey."

Kathy fell silent again as the vehicles bounced down the service road. Her mind was a whirl with all kinds of thoughts. After what she had seen so far this day, she had to agree with one thing. All that was left was to trust and obey.

Dawn was fast approaching. Kathy was doing her best to try to get some sleep when she and Bob were both startled when her phone rang. She pulled it from her pocket and looked at the screen to see who was calling, and so wasn't ready when Bob hit the brakes.

"What happened?"

"Don't answer that." Bob said.

"It's alright. It's just Tim."

"Kathy, don't answer that and let me have it."

Wondering what the excitement was about, she handed him the phone. Bob opened the door with a quick, "Come with me." over his shoulder and headed back to Tim and the S.U.V. She caught up with him just in time to hear him say to her husband, "Give me the phone."

"Who are you calling?" He asked as he handed it to Bob.

"Nobody, and neither are the two of you."

With that, Bob removed the battery from each phone, then turned and threw both phones and their batteries as far into the brush as he could.

"HEY! Bob that's an expensive phone. What are you doing?" Tim demanded.

"I'm sure it is. Listen to me, both of you. Do you remember the commercials that they used to have where all the different companies claimed to have more bars, in more places than anyone else?"

They both nodded yes.

"Have you considered what that really means?"

"It shows the signal strength." Tim said.

"That is only half of it. The way these phones work is by sending out a signal to the nearest cell tower. THAT tells the tower where you are. The information is sent by the tower to the main system. That way the system knows where to send the incoming calls. So anyone who has access to the providers system only needs to ask where such and such a number is currently located, and you are caught. What good is it to hide anywhere and then tell your enemies where you are by a simple phone call?"

Bob saw Tim about to speak and waved him to silence.

"I know what you are going to say Tim. Turning the phone off doesn't work. It still keeps in contact with the towers even while off. And even if you take out the battery, as soon as you put it back it, the phone contacts a tower and your right back where you started. The same is true of lap tops, or any other device that you communicate with. If you have anything like that, get rid of it right now."

"Mr. Bob, does that include my C.D. player?" Tom asked from his place in the back of the S.U.V.

"No Tom. Your C.D. player is safe."

"I'm sure glad to hear that."

The adults couldn't help but laugh at the statement.

[day late]

As he arrived at the scene, Manuel was actually relieved. The house that had cost them so dearly yesterday, was nothing but smoking ruin now. He didn't know, or care how it happened, or who did it. The problem was solved, that was good enough for him.

"Hey Manuel, I think we have a problem." one of his men said.

"I don't want to hear about problems. Just what you've done. Like this." he said pointing at the burned down home. "That is a good piece of work. Did any of them come out, or did they just burn alive?"

"We don't know, and that is the problem. Nobody admits to starting the fire. And there is something else. There aren't any cars. Like they left, and the place just burned down on it's own."

That wasn't good, Manuel knew. They were supposed to kill all who fought back, not let them escape.

"Don't mention that to anyone else. As far as you know, everyone died in the fire."

"What about the cars?"

"Say they were stolen by someone else, just don't mention this to anyone, ever again! Do you understand me?"

"Yeah, yeah. Sure."

It wasn't long, before Manuel decided he knew what Jose's problem had been. He didn't ask for enough firepower from the start. Since he had gotten extra weapons, and bigger weapons, places of resistance began to fold like a house of cards. In many places, there were a number of resistors taken prisoner. For them, it was short and not so sweet. First they were taken to the stadium and held until the 'special' train arrived. Then they were loaded onto the train, and taken away. Where they went, and what happened to them, he didn't care.

Even better was the fact that now that there was no longer anyone to stand against them, his men were going through each and every house and apartment they could reach. Valuables of all kinds were being taken. Food, drugs, jewelry, money, and even a few cute girls had been taken. More importantly, a share from each take made its' way into his private pile.

Manuel was enjoying some of his spoils, when the word came. The Director was coming. He wasn't worried. There wasn't any more fighting going on. He was in complete control. He went back to his amusement. The screams the girl made, pleased him all the more.

Director Claire didn't wait for an escort. Everyone knew who he was, and tried to avoid him. When he opened the door to the office Manuel was using as his headquarters, he saw the girl lying on the floor, nude from the waist down, and quietly crying. He kicked her to the side and walked up to the desk where Manuel sat, having a beer and a cigarette.

"What is going on here?"

"What? You mean her? We were just having a little fun, that's all."

"I don't care about her. I gave you a job to do. I notice that there are a lot of names missing from the list of the dead. Where are they?"

"Hey Director, slow down. Take it easy. There were a lot of fires around here. We don't even know how many resistor died in them, let alone how many are on your list. Besides that, you wanted all resistance in this area to end. Have you heard any gun shots? There isn't anyone standing against us anymore. What are you complaining about?'

"I'm complaining about the names missing from this list." Claire stated.

"A lot has happened in the past day. Give me a chance to catch up with what you want."

"You have 24 hours to find out where the people named on this list are at." Claire shouted, as he threw the list across the room at Manuel. Claire turned on his heel, and started to leave the room. The girl he had kicked, un-noticed, as he entered had crawled to one side. and lay there trying to recover from the abuse Manuel had heaped upon her. Claire stopped and looked at her.

"So, how was she?"

"Not bad, Mister Director."

"We'll see." Claire said. Then he reached out and grabbed the girl by the hair, and dragged her from the room, behind him.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Within 18 hours, Manuel realized three things. First, none of those who followed him much liked the idea of searching burned out ruins for certain dead people. Second, many of those whom the Director wanted were indeed dead. Some died in the fires that engulfed their hiding places, others were killed when they chose to stand and fight against the gangs and their re enforcements. Third, He didn't like taking such unpleasant orders from anyone, much less The Director.

Meanwhile, Director Claire realized that there was far more on the line than he thought at the first. It was bad enought that the over-all director was wanting answers that he didn't have, but even the President wanted those same answers. But he still didn't have them. He knew he could put off any retrobution for awhile by pointing out that while it had taken longer than expected, his region was at last pacified. And after all, everyone knew that pacifing the southern region would be a tough nut to crack. That would be enough to buy him some time to get his hands on the rest of those who wouldn't accept the reality of the New Order.

He looked over at the nameless girl cowering in the corner of the room. He had his doubts about how well Manuel was going to work out in the grand sceam of things. She wasn't as good as he had been lead to believe. Still, there was something he couldn't resist about her helplessness. Unbuckleing his belt, he stood and moved towards her, for the third time today.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bob puled the truck over into a wooded area. As the vehicles stopped, it took only seconds for everyone to get out and streach their legs.

"Bob, why did we stop?" Kathy asked.

"Would you go into hostile country without a guide?" he asked.

"No."

"That's why we stopped. Our guide is gone."

"You mean the angel?"

"Yep, I do. And when he says stop, and then disappears, I think it is a good idea to wait for him to return."

"How do you know he'll come back?"

Bob smiled, "God hasn't lead me this far, just to leave me now. He has a reason, all I have to do is wait on Him to tell me what to do next."

Bob, I understand that we might be under judgement, but why? America has done a lot for God and his kingdom. Why would He judge us?"

"The scriptures say that judgement begins at the house of God. If America is Gods chosen land, and His chosen people, why not start His judement with us? And as far as that goes, the scriptures say the He will NOT hold blameless those who shead innocent blood. We have been killing over 4,000 babies A DAY through abortion, for years."

From the bushes came a voice, "And what blood could be

more innocent than the unborn?"

Bob whirled at the sound, pistol in hand, ready to fire. As the young man came out of the woods, Bob did something he had never done before in his life. The weapon fell to the ground, completely forgoten.

"ALEX!"

"Hi Dad."

Bob ran with a speed, he thought he no longer had, to embrace his son. Kathy and Tim were lost on whether they should watch the reunion, or turn their backs considering the privacy of the moment.

After a long embrace, Bob pushed his son to arms lenght. "How did you get here? What happened to you? Are you alright?" The questions tumbled out of his mouth almost faster than he could form them.

"Hey Dad, take it easy. I'll answer you, but first, do you guys have something to eat? I've been here three days with nothing."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Claire hung up the phone. He had been right so far. While his superiors weren't entirely pleased with his lack of progress in bringing his area under control, they accepted his excuses when he was able to provide the names of many of the resistors and proof of their death, to them.

Still he knew that he was in trouble. His area should have been pacified sooner. Up to this time, everything had come off without a hitch. Scalar attacks, which had created the earthquakes in California had done a great deal of damage. Millions had been killed. Their master had been pleased with that sacrifice. He had also been pleased when the mega- hurricane had hit the eastern part of the country. It had seemed a waste to him to nuke what was left of Los Angles. The weapon would have been put to better use on the Hoover Dam, in his opinion. But it wasn't his right to question what the master wanted. That was a very unhealthy thing to do. Right now, he had to get things back on schedule. These people, mostly those hated Christians, HAD to be either captured, or killed. What was it they said in this country? 'Failure is not an option.' he remembered. Well, that was certainly the position he was in, and things were not going his way.

He knew, it was time to become inventive. Something had to be done to get these people out of hiding, but what? Slowly an idea came to him. Not an idea really, but a memory from a little over a half a century or so back.

What was that Jews' name? It didn't matter. He remembered the Jewish leader in Warsaw during the early years of WW II. He had convinced him that it was in the best interest of his people to not fight the Germans, But to live in the ghettos they had sent up. Once the vast majority of them were in the ghettos, they had starved them into a weakened state. When they started to fight back, they had nowhere to run. It was slaughter, pure and simple. The master had been pleased with that one. All he had to do was find someone the Christians would trust, and do it all over again. He might even have to appear to this fool as an angel of light, but it would work. He knew it would. Now all he had to do was find one of those types among the prisoners.

He glanced at the body in the corner. Again, he had his doubts about Manuel. She didn't last any time at all. However, this was Manuel's last chance to prove himself, otherwise, he would be replaced just as Jose' had been. He stabbed a button on the desk.

"Bring me the list of all the preacher prisoners. And get someone in here to clean up this mess."


--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Alex was happily eating his third sandwich from the ones Kathy had quickly made just before they had left home. Not surprisingly, Bob never left his side, waiting patiently for his son to finish, before asking anything more. It was Tim who finally remembered the pistol on the ground, and had given it back to Bob, after brushing off the dirt. After accepting it, with thanks, Bob had quickly taken it apart, checked it to make certain all the dirt had been removed, reassembled the weapon, and then returned it to the holster.

"That was so good." Alex said, "Thank you very much." Turning to his father he spoke again. "Dad I owe you an apology. All those things you told me over the years, since they didn't happen right away, I started to doubt you. After awhile, I just quit listening. Now, I know you were right, and I was stupid not to listen to you. I'm sorry."

"Forget it son. I knew you had quit listening to me some time back. But I still had to warn you. I still kept on praying for you. And you have no idea how happy I am to see you again. So tell me. How did you get here? The last I heard, your town had been surrounded."

Alex smiled, "I may have been mistaken not listening to you, but I'm not totally stupid. Let me start back at the beginning. You see, three days ago, just like everyone else, I was sitting at home. Just before martial law was declared, I had filled my gas tank in case I had to run. Then, well Dad, I know you will believe me, but the rest of you will have to take my word for it, I was sitting in my apartment wondering what was going to happen next, and what to do about it, when an angel showed up. I've got to tell you, it really shook me up."

Out of the corner of his eye, Bob saw Kathy look over at him with a knowing look, but she said nothing.

"Anyway, the angel told me that I had to leave. I didn't even have time to pack a lunch. He literally forced me out the door, down the stairs, and into the car before I could do a thing. Now here is the funny part. Do you remember the 'back roads atlas' you gave me awhile back? I left it in the trunk. But all of a sudden it was in his hands, and he traced out a route for me to take. And the really strange thing is the the route he pointed out became kind of 'highlighted' and stayed that way. Then he disappeared. I just followed the map 'til I got here. When I did, the car just died, and I haven't been able to get it started since then. I've still got gas, and there is nothing wrong with it that I can figure out, it just won't start. I think I know why now."

"I think so too."

"So, what do we do now?"

"We wait. Let me tell you something. We've had an angelic guide to get us here. Just as we stopped, he left. I don't intend to do anything until he comes back."

"O.K., O.K., I've listened up to now without saying anything, but come on guys, angelic guides? Who do you think you are kidding?" Tim said.

"Tim, I've seen one of them too. He was sitting on the hood of Bob's truck, pointing the way here. Believe what they are telling you. It's true. I KNOW!" Kathy told her husband.

"Et tu, Kathy? How can you believe this? Why haven't they had anything to say to me?"

Bob answered. "Most likely because of two things. First, your own words show you don't believe that such a thing is possible. Second, what COULD they have to say to someone that doesn't believe in such things? You'd just find a reason to dismiss the warning. Hallucinations or something. Point is, there is something about you two and your children that The Lord has seen, and He likes what He saw, or you wouldn't be here. You'd be lying dead in whatever may be left of your home."

Bob stood and streached. "It's been a long night for all of us. I don't intend to start out again until dark, or our guide returns, which ever comes first. I'd like to put Alex and Tom on guard together, while the rest of us get some sleep."

"If we are being protected, why post a guard? Don't you think that God can take care of us?" Tim asked.

"Certainly He can. But He also expects us to do whatever we can to take care of ourselves, and trust Him for the rest. Do you remember the story of Nehemiah? God had instructed him to get the walls around Jerusalem repaired. God could have protected him, but Nehemiah posted guards anyway. Seems like a good plan to me."


As Bob sat next to his son, Kathy couldn't help but notice he was in fairly good shape for someone who hadn't had any food or water for three days. She had heard that a human couldn't last much over three days without water. Alex should be all but unconscious from dehydration.

"Alex. Don't get me wrong, but if you haven't had any food or water for three days, how can you be on your feet?"

"I know I said that, but it's not quite true, thanks to Dad. Years ago he taught me how to make different types of snares. By the way Dad, the rabbit snare was the only one that worked. Nothing tripped the others."

"What's a rabbit snare, and how do you make it?" Sam wanted to know.

"You first tie your shoelaces kind of like a lasso. Then, when you find a rabbit trail you push a stick into the ground on each side of it. Then hang the lasso between them, after you anchor it to one of the sticks or a big rock or something. When the rabbit comes along he gets his head caught in the lasso and the anchor makes sure he is still there when you come back."

"What about water?" Kathy asked.

"Oh, that was easy. I made an air well."

"Air well? I never heard of it."

"Come on, I'll show you."

Alex led Kathy, Tim and their children to a nearby clearing. There they found a sheet of plastic. It was held down by both dirt and rocks. On one side was a tube sticking out, and there was a rock in the center of it. The rock depressed the sheet so that it looked like a crater.

"This is my air well." Alex began. "Everyone knows there is moisture in the ground. Everyone also knows that the sun heats the ground and makes the moisture evaporate. So, what you do is dig a hole about a foot to a foot and a half deep and put a cup or some kind of container in the middle of the hole, with a tube leading from the container to the edge of the hole. Then cover the hole with a sheet of plastic. Seal the edges with dirt and rocks so that no moisture escapes and it will collect on the plastic. Now what you do is put a rock on the plastic right over the container. As the moisture condenses on the plastic the drops slide down the plastic and drop into the container. Then you just sip through the tube."

"O.K. I understand how you might have plastic sheeting around, but where did you get you get the tube?" Kathy asked.

"Lets' just say I hope I don't have to use my windshield washers any time soon. Hey Dad, that guy in that movie was right about rabbits as well as dolphins."

"What?" Tim asked.

Bob answered. "There was an old movie called 'The Old Man and the Sea'. It is the story about an old man in a small boat who hooks a huge fish that drags him out to sea. The rest of the film is how he managed to stay alive until he made it back to shore. At one point he caught a dolphin. However in a small boat he had no way to cook it, so he ate it raw. His comment was something like 'Dolphin cooked is a very good fish. Dolphin raw is a bad fish.'." Bob looked at Alex. "Couldn't you get the flint and steel to work?"

"I was afraid to start a fire. I thought the smoke might give me away in the day time, and the light at night."

"That was probably wise."

[day late]

The radio crackled to life.

"Brothers and Sisters. Come out of your hiding places. The Lord has been purging this land. If you can hear my voice, I tell you, come out. Those whom Satan has sent to destroy us have been driven from the cities. They now roam the countryside, where you are hiding. They are stealing and killing at will. But I have been visited by an angel. He has told me that this has all been part of the plan. These wicked men have been driven out of the cities, and now you must return to the cities, as a place of refuge. This will allow the soldiers that are here to help us. To go out into the highways and byways, and scour this evil of wicked and sinful men from our land.

Are you cold and hungry? Come back. Are you tired of running? Come back. Are you weak and faint of heart? Come back. The Lord understands what you have been through. He knows why you have been running. And now you are bidden, no, I say commanded, to come back.

Let these men who came here to rid our land of this scourge do what they came to do. Come back, my brothers and sisters. Bring your children with you. There is food coming into the cities once again. There is power for the heaters on these cold nights. There is pure clean water to slake your thirst. Come back I say, come back to the places where it is safe and warm. Come back to the places where there is food and water. Come back for God seeks to end this trouble, and doesn't want any of you to be caught up it the punishment of those who would do you harm. Come back and enjoy the blessings that are offered here."

The radio faded.

It had been a couple of days, and a two hundred miles, since Kathy, Tim, Tom, Sam, Bob, and Alex had even considered listening to the radio. Now they sat and listened with unbelieving ears as the preacher spoke.

"Sounds like things are getting back to normal. Maybe we should go back." Tim said.

"I think you just may be right." Kathy agreed.

"You must be joking." Bob responded.

"But Bob, you heard him. Things are getting better in the cities. There's power, food, water, and safety. Why shouldn't we go back?" Kathy asked.

"Listen to me, both of you. We've gotten by so far because of our guide. He hasn't pointed the way towards any city. Doesn't that mean anything to you? Are you so ready to run back to the place you barely escaped from with your lives? Are you so ready to turn your children, and these young men, over to whatever agency says they are going to take care of them?

Let me tell you something that I learned in the service. Any place where you eat, sleep, or get water from, is the perfect place for an ambush. Why do you think trappers and fishermen use food as bait? You CAN'T go back there."

"I think you should listen to Dad." Alex said. "So far, he's been right on the money about everything he's said or done. That's good enough for me. I'd trust him more than any preacher on the T.V. or radio. It isn't just because he is my father, he's been right, every time. I can't argue with that."

That caused Tim and Kathy to stop for a moment and think. They knew what Alex said was true, but still, they longed for a hot shower, hot food, clean clothes, and a soft bed with warm blankets. The temptation was great.

"Bob, how can you be certain? I mean I haven't seen our guide since that first night. Are you sure you aren't just following you own instincts?"

"Kathy, you may not have seen him again, but I've been following his lead every step of the way. You remember what happened yesterday at the turn off, when you guys wanted to go a different direction?"

Kathy remembered, as did Tim. They were certain that they should keep going along the smooth road they had been following for a couple of hours, while Bob insisted that they turn off the road, onto a broken dirt trail. As they stood there, quietly arguing the matter, the sound of automatic gunfire came from want sounded like a quarter mile further ahead on the paved road. They stopped talking, and drove onto the dirt road.

"I can't tell you what to do." said Bob. "That is between the two of you and God. But let me ask you. Given all you know for a certain fact, are you ready to trade your safety, uncomfortable though it may be, for a hot meal, followed by some unpleasant people asking questions, in an unpleasant and probably painful manner? Is that what you want?"

Tim spoke up after a couple of minutes.

"I'll tell you what. Why don't I go into one of these towns and check it out? If everything is O.K. I'll come back and tell you."

"And what if you can't come back? Do you really want to leave Kathy and the others out here without you? Tim, I have to tell you, if our guide comes back while you are gone, we won't be here IF you manage to make it back."

The radio suddenly came back up.

"Brothers and Sisters, don't listen to those who tell you to stay in hiding. They are just afraid. They don't trust The Lord. We know that The Lord told us in His word that He is coming for us before the tribulation begins. I admit, times are difficult right now, but this is just the beginning of troubles, as it is written in The Bible.

If they are telling you that this is the beginning of the tribulation, don't listen to them. We aren't going to be here when that happens. We will be with The Lord, at the marriage supper. Come back to the places that have food, water, and safety. Come back, and join the true believers while we wait on The Lord to deliver us from these troubles."

The radio faded once again.

"Well, there you have it. Every type of bait they can lay out is right in front of you. Before you say anything, I want you to remember something. When we left, we left a lot of bodies behind us. I know that you didn't do anything. I was the one who is responsible for those gang bangers deaths."

"Uh Dad, is there something I should know here?"

"I'll explain later, son."

Bob continued. "Do you really think that anyone is going to listen to you? All they know is that there are dead people on the ground, and just after they died, you were missing. I do believe they will be more than a bit suspicious of you, and they will have some serious questions for you."

"Remember one other thing. Right now, the cities are death traps. Nobody who has entered them has gotten out again. Do you think that you are special? I don't think so. If you go into any city, you won't come out again."

"Then what are we going to do, Bob? We can't just wander around the countryside like a bunch of nomads." Kathy said.

"You haven't noticed it have you? Ever since we left we've been headed more or less westward. We are going to cross the Mississippi."




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Claire was pleased with his pet televangelist. All that was needed to get the Christians to turn themselves in was to have someone say the right words, and they came running. True, not all of them were so easily fooled. Somehow that 'Nazarene' always managed to keep some small remnant from dieing, that had always been the problem, but just like those Jews from Warsaw, these stupid Christians were like horses running back into a burning barn. All you had to have was someone to say the right words.

Clarie was so pleased in fact, he had decided that this fool could be saved until nearly the end, since he was so convincing, he would be useful in maintaining control over the camps. He especially loved how the man had convinced so many it was their duty to obey whatever the govt. said to do, by quoting verses from that hated book, the Bible.

Best of all, his superiors were much less upset at his earlier problems. Yes indeed. Things were starting to good much smoother. He could even afford some time off for recreation. He glanced at the twelve year old boy who sat naked and huddled in the corner of the room. Even this was going better. It looked as if this one was going to last longer than the girl had, and his screams were just as pleasing to Claire. Plus his futile attempts at both escape, and self defense were amusing to him. The kid didn't know just how out matched he was.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

"Bob, are you sure we should be leaving now? I mean it is still daylight." Tim asked.

"We need to get to the river before dark. We have to find a certain man with a certain boat, in order to cross."

"How can you be sure we'll get across?"

"Remember who it is that we serve. Tell me something. How much gas is left in the tank?"

"The gauge shows full, but that can't be right. We've traveled at least four hundred miles. I thought it must be broken."

"It's not. The way I see it, if The Lord can fertilize the egg of a virgin, He can keep our tanks full, until we get where we are going."

"How do you do that, Bob? Relate everything to what it says in The Bible, I mean."

"Tim, The Bible effects everything I do. What was the title of that song a few years ago?

Basic Instructions Before Leaving Earth

Yeah, it has a hand in everything I do."

"I'll vouch for that." Alex chimed in jokingly.

"Son, you be careful now. You know what they say about old dogs. Besides, You may be younger, stronger, and faster than me, but I'm still meaner than you."

"Just kidding, Dad."

"Old dogs?" Tim asked.

"Never tease an old dog. He just might have one bite left."

As they drew closer to the Mississippi River, Bob was starting to believe that they had left their troubles behind them. They had pulled all three vehicles to the side of the road for a rest break, just before a curve. Alex had gone into the brush to relieve himself, and now came out of the bushes in a hurry.

"Dad. I think we have a problem."

"What would that be?"

"I went kind of deep into the bushes to, um, well, you know. Anyway, I heard something. I went a little deeper and I found out this road makes a hairpin turn. On the other side of the curve is a check point."

"Kathy, Tim stay here with the children. Show me Son."

Together they quietly worked their way to the spot where Alex had seen the checkpoint. Sure enough, it was there. Three men with body armor, automatic weapons, and a four wheel drive S.U.V.

"What do we do? We have to go down this road or turn around."

"We can't turn around, Son. We've been led here for a reason. Let me think."

Bob looked at the scene. Soon he had an idea. The S.U.V. wasn't blocking the entire road. These men clearly thought that just by being there with weapons would intimidate any who came down the road. That was their mistake.

"Alex listen closely. Behind the drivers seat of my truck you'll find a small white box. Grab three of the soda cans in it, and bring them to me."

"You planning on bribing they with soda?"

"Just get them Son."

Alex soon returned with the cans.

"Are these what you wanted Dad?"

"Yes. Thank you. Now here is what I want you to do."

"Wait a minute Dad. Why do these cans have fuses sticking out of them?"

"I'll explain later. I want you to drive my truck. Have Tim drive you mothers car, and Kathy drives your car. I want you guys to pull up to the checkpoint nice and slow. Just like nothing is wrong. When I make my move, hammer down and swing around their 4X4 and don't slow down."

"What move? And what about you?"

"Don't worry about me. Just get moving."

Alex knew better than to argue when his father spoke in that tone of voice. He got back to the others, relayed his fathers instructions, and not waiting for an argument, climbed into the truck and started the engine.

The three vehicles pulled slowly up to the checkpoint. Alex tried to look for his father, without looking like he was looking for him. As he looked at the brush out of the corner of his eye, he saw one of the soda cans come flying out of the woods with the fuse burning. Even before it hit the ground, a second can came from the same place. Then a third. He hit the gas. As the truck lurched forward, he saw smoke start to pour out of the first can, then the second. A cloud appeared from nowhere. It only got thicker as the third can began to fume. He followed his fathers orders and kept moving around the S.U.V. and didn't look back.

They were ten miles down the road before Alex pulled over. The others did the same. As they got out to talk about what to do. Before they could even get started the S.U.V. from the checkpoint pulled up behind them. Alex, Tim, and Kathy all grabbed weapons and prepared to fire.

"I hope you aren't going to shoot me." A familiar voice called out to them.

"Dad?"

"It's me Son."

"What happened back there Bob?" Tim asked.

"And what were those cans?" Alex chimed in.

"As you guys got close, I threw the smoke grenades. That provided cover for you. While they were choking on the smoke, and trying to figure it out, I 'borrowed' their 4X4."

"Where did you get smoke grenades?" Kathy wanted to know.

"I made them. First I got some of those half sized soda cans. Then I picked up what the local fireworks store called smoke grenades. Really they aren't. They don't make large enough amounts of smoke. I sliced them open and put the tablets inside them in the empty cans. Add the fuse that came with them, and seal them with duct tape. Each can had about the equivalent of four of the store bought grenades. Makes a lot more smoke that way. Come on. Lets' get on down the road. It won't be long before they start looking for this car, and I want to be long gone before they find it."

[day late]

The convoy of vehicles made their way towards the river. Kathy and Tim had been taking turns riding 'shotgun' with Bob, and it was once again Kathy who sat next to him.

"Bob, Tell me something. How do we get across the river? As far as I've heard, there are road blocks on each end of every bridge. That means we need a ferry or something. But, lets' face it. Nobody is going to stick their neck out for us, without sticking out their hand, palm up, first."

"Long ago, while I was in basic training, my drill instructor pounded one thing into us day after day. Pardon my language, but he said, 'prior planning prevents piss-poor performance' and in all the years since then, I've never known that to fail. Now, I've planned for everything I could plan for. After that, I depend on The Lord. As Paul told Timothy, you do everything you can do,' and having done all, Stand.'"

"So what's the plan now?"

"First, we find the vessel we're looking for. It should be somewhere around here."

As with most rivers, many small fish camps and boat docks had sprung up over many years. These were communities where everyone knew everyone else. Strangers really stood out, and weren't trusted. While martial law had virtually ended road traffic, on the river, it was a different story. With so many road blocks, trucks were constantly backed up on every road. Barges, ferry's, and other watercraft, were pressed into service to help moving goods from one side of the river to the other. This had given the river men and women a bit more freedom than those who lived and worked on land.

It was into one of these that Bob had turned. He slowly made his way down to the docks, with Tim close behind in the 4X4 and Alex bringing up the rear in his small car. Bob pulled up by a barge-like boat, and stopped.

"Stay here." Was all he said as he got out and headed towards it. He could see two men working on the deck.

"Excuse me, Sir. Can you tell me where I might find the captain of this vessel?"

Without looking up the nearer man answered.

"You're talking to him."

"Very good. Captain, I'd like to get passage across the river for myself, three vehicles, passengers, and our stuff."

"Do you have any idea what you're asking?" The man said, then he looked up at Bob, and his jaw dropped.

"YOU!"

Puzzled Bob said, "Sorry Sir, I don't think I've ever had the pleasure of making your acquaintance."

"I've seen you before. I was told....Wait a minute, you said three vehicles?"

Still curious Bob answered, "That's right. Are you alright?"

"Fine, fine. You remind me of someone I saw once, that's all. Three vehicles, passengers and cargo. $3,000. You can off load at the inspection dock on the other side."

"Captain, I'll be honest with you, we don't have a lot of money. But there might be other things you would be willing to accept in exchange for passage."

"Such as?"

"Captain, are you sure you want to negotiate out here on the dock? Maybe there is some place a little more private where we could go."

"Hm mm, alright, come on board."

"Thank you, Sir."

The two men went to the wheelhouse of the boat, and the captain motioned Bob to one of the chairs sitting by a small table.

"So, what exactly is it that you want?"

"As I said Sir, passage across the river. However I'd like to avoid any inspections on the far side."

"Well, that is the trick isn't it?"

"Can you do it, or should I look elsewhere?"

"I can get you across alright, but that kind of service comes at a higher price."

"Understood. But you recall I mentioned negotiation. Truthfully, we don't have a lot of money. However there might be something else you would accept as payment."

"I hope you aren't going to offer me an hour or so with a woman. I must get that at least six times a day, and my Mrs. doesn't like it."

"No, not that. There is only one woman with us, and she is a married mother of four. Not only do I think she wouldn't do it, I know her husband wouldn't agree to it. What I had in mind was something a bit more practical."

The captain looked at Bob for a moment, seemingly distracted by something. Then he went to a cabinet and took out a small plate, a box of salt, two glasses, and a bottle of tequila.

"I've always found this kind of talk to be pretty dry work."

He placed the plate, salt, glasses and unopened tequila between them. Then he poured some of the salt into the plate. He then gently shook the plate until the salt was leveled out. But he didn't pour the drinks.

"You mentioned a payment of something besides cash. What did you have in mind?"

"How much fuel would it take to get us to the other side?"

At this the captains ears perked up. "It isn't just getting you over there, I have to also bring the 'Molly B.' back to the berth. Say 10 gallons round trip. Then there is the matter of avoiding complications. That has to be worth something as well."

"Captain, we will supply the gas for the trip, both ways. I also happen to know that in the cabinet is a .22 caliber rifle."

The captains eyes widened again, but he said nothing.

"I also know that you are running a little low on ammo. I'm willing to sweeten the offer with a brick of .22's."

"550 rounds of ammo does make it a sight sweeter. Tell me what do you think of this?"

With that the captain reached out and drew a curved line in the salt.

Bob smiled. He knew this little puzzle. He drew another curved line in the salt. Together, they made the symbol of a fish. The captain shook the plate once again, erasing the symbol. Then he poured a drink for each of them and put a pinch of salt on the web of his hand, between the thumb and forefinger.

"Call me Jim. To a safe crossing." He raised his glass.

Bob did as his host had done and answered, "And a safe return."




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Claire was becoming more pleased by the day. Things were almost ready. He was actually almost in a good mood by the time Manuel made it to his office. He noticed that Manuel was really not one for success. His eyes glowed red, and there were scratches on his face and arms from some woman, he supposed. He was also unsteady on his feet, as if he were drunk. Well, if he couldn't control himself when he was in a position of power, it would make the next deception that much easier.

"Manuel, sit down. there is something we must talk about."

"Hey, Mister Director. What's wrong man? We ain't had no trouble in a while now."

"That's what I wanted to talk with you about. How clever you are to know what I want to say. You are absolutely right. There hasn't been the first bit of trouble from your sector. I wanted to thank you and your men for all you've done. I have a little surprise in mind for all of you. But I need your help to do it. You see I have been putting aside some very special people as a present for you all, if you know what I mean."

"What kind of people?"

"Oh they are young, good looking, and VERY talented, if you get what I'm saying. No, no, don't ask any more, I wouldn't want to ruin the surprise." He arched his eye brows suggestively. "But I need to know where these people need to dropped off for you and your men. To do that, I need to know where they are living. You understand?"

"Young and good looking you say? Yeah, I get you. I hope they are as talented as you say. These local women have no idea how to take care of a man like me."

"Oh trust me, Manuel, they will take care of you like you won't believe. As a matter of fact, you could say they are specialists. From the city."

"Hey I've known some very special ladies in the city. This sounds good."

"Then you'll help me, by getting those addresses?"

Manuel burped before answering. "Sure Mr. Director, I'll have them for you by tomorrow. You see, I have to always know where my boys are, so I already have a list."

"Excellent. Now remember, this is a surprise. You must not tell anyone about it."

"O.K. I'll bring it by in the morning."

"Thank you Manuel. This makes things so much easier."

"No problem, Mister Director."

With that, Manuel stood, somewhat unsteadily, turned, just managing to avoid falling over, then left the room.

Once he was gone, Claire pushed the intercom button.

"I want the Director of Intelligence in here right now."

It wasn't long before he arrived.

"Manuel has a list of his men in his office. I don't want to take any chances. I want that list photographed, printed out, and on my desk by 4 A.M."

"Yes Sir."

Claire sat down, and thought about how close everything was to completion. It wouldn't be long now. First the American troops were almost done for, but before that, he would have the pleasure of reliving that night so long ago that pleased his master. The night of the long knives was about to happen again.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

The 'Molly B.' left the shoreline just after dark. She was an older vessel, but sturdy and well maintained. With a large flat deck area for cargo, and a cabin which could be used for either living or cargo, as well as the area below the main deck. The wheelhouse/bridge set on top of the cabin affording the captain a clear view of the river. Before they pulled out, the Captain told them;

"Make sure you all stay out of sight. There are patrol boats on the river, and they can stop and search anything they want, any time they want. Now if we run into one of them, I think I can talk our way out of inspection, but if I can't, you have to be ready. Bob, I'd like you topside with me."

That had happened ten minutes before Bob finally spoke.

"Jim, when you first looked at me, you seemed to know me, even though we've never met before this. What was that about?"

"You answer my question, and I'll answer yours. You said that you happened to know about my rifle. How did that happen?"

"I was told by someone."

"Same here. A kind of impressive guy, dressed all in white."

The two men looked at each other, and spoke at the same time.

"Michael."

"Have you considered what that might mean? I mean we have been getting messages from the Commander of The Lords' Host, His army.Kind of sounds like there might be some unpleasant work ahead for both of us." Bob observed.

"Or it could mean that we are in need of just that much help."

"True. I hadn't thought of that. Judging by what has happened so far, you could well be right. Which brings up another question. Now I'm not one to tell a man how to run his business, but with patrol boats on the river, do you think it wise to be out here with the lights on the bow and stern lighted up. I mean that has got to attract attention."

"Not as much as trying to run the river without them. They have all kinds of devices, and informers all up and down the river.

What I'm doing is acting like it is just another run. Avoid attention, by not trying to avoid it. I once read a science fiction book, where the main character gave some very good advice. He said, 'When you get caught doing something wrong, don't try to play innocent. Whoever caught you isn't going to believe you anyway. The best thing to do is to try and make the evidence point to a lesser crime'. These days, that's not so hard to do. Everyone is doing something wrong, even if it is trying to feed you family, or hiding ammunition for barter."

Bob smiled at that, until he hear Jim say;

"Uh oh. Patrol boat coming. get down."

Bob ducked under the level of the window, and pulled out his pistol, just in case.

"Attention cargo vessel. Cut your engines and stand by for inspection."

Jim pushed a button in front of him, and picked up a microphone.

"I'd love to do that, but I'm running short on time. I need to get this load to the other side pretty soon, or I'll be in trouble with the people who commissioned this run."

"I said, CUT YOUR ENGINES."

"Very well lieutenant, as long as you sign my inspection ticket. If I'm late, I want everyone to know it wasn't my fault."

At this, one of the men in the speed boat used for patrolling shown a light on the bow of Jim's' boat.

"Sir, it is the 'Molly B.'.

"Molly B.', Are you making another run for Director Claire?"

"I think if he wanted you to know that, he would have told you, don't you? Look, I had problems getting loaded, and now I'm trying to make up for lost time. So either sign my ticket, so I can turn it in at the end of the trip, or let me be on my way."

Bob sat and waited for what seemed forever, while the men on the patrol boat decided what to do.

They knew that the Director sometimes commissioned late night trips like this. They knew he had used the 'Molly B.' before, it was on a list they had. They also knew the last man to insist on inspecting one of these late runs for the Director had gotten an even later at night visit from members of the Intelligence Division. Nobody had seen him after that.

"Molly B.' have a safe trip. Where are you headed?"

"You mean the Director didn't mention anything about that to you either?"

"I just wanted to warn you that there is a new patch of dead-fall in the water about a quarter mile down river. Be careful if you are headed that far."

"Thanks for the information. I will be careful"

With that, the patrol boat turned, powered up it's engine, cut around the back of the 'Molly B.' and sped off into the night, going upstream.

Bob slowly stood, and remarked;

"Mark Twain had it right. There HAS been a decline in the art or lying. I've never heard someone skirt the truth so closely as you just did, without actually telling a lie."

"It isn't too hard with these guys. They are scared to death of the Director. Nobody dares to get on the wrong side of him. And as long as you don't do it too often, or make the story too long and complicated, they will buy it, and leave you alone."

They continued on in silence for awhile, before Jim spoke again.

"So, don't you want to know about hauling loads for the Director?"

"Not really. The way I see it, you could have turned us in when the patrol boat showed up, you didn't. Besides, would Michael be talking to someone on the other side of this thing?"

"No, I guess he wouldn't. O.K. I need to tell you. When we make landfall on the shore, it is going to be in a place that used to be a popular fishing spot. There is a road that leads to a good road about one hundred yards up. If you turn to the right, you are going to be headed right into a town. Maybe a mile up the road. Turn left, and you're heading out into the country. I don't know which one you'll be taken down, but my guess would be left. From there it is about fifteen miles to the next town. One more thing. Once the ramps go down, I need you guys to get off the 'Molly' as quick as you can. I know The Lord is watching out for us tonight, but I don't want to try His patience."

"That makes two of us. Thanks for the lift, Jim. If we never meet again on this side, I'll be looking for you on the other."

"Same here. I want to know how this all turns out for you."

With that said, they shook hands, and remained quiet for the rest of the trip.


--------------------------------------------------------------------------

The next evening after the crossing, all across the southern sector of the country, men were gathering in abandoned schools, concert halls, and other such places. They were lean, hardened, heavily armed, combat veterans. In one of the schools, Director Claire joined the men as they made ready for their nights work.

"Director Claire. There is no reason for you to be here. My men can take care of this. No need to risk your life."

"I know that Major. But there is one stop I want to join in on. Which of these groups in going to this address?" He handed a piece of paper to the Major.

Glancing at the address, he said, "I'll take you them."

They moved quickly through the crowd, and came upon a group of eight men. All of them dressed in black, with body armor, and fully automatic weapons.

"Men. Slight change in plans. The Director is going with you, at least to one address. Whatever you do, protect him."

He singled out one man, and handed him the address. "Lieutenant, make this one your first stop."

"Yes Sir."

Within half an hour, all the men were loaded into various vehicles, and were on the way to their assignments. At first, the Lieutenant thought of trying to question Director Claire about the change in plans, then thought better of it, and kept the matter to himself. Soon the van they were riding in pulled up a block from Manuel's' address. Quietly and quickly they got out, and three of the men moved to the backside of the house, to prevent anyone from escaping that way. The rest, with the Director, moved to the front of the house. One man took a position on each of the front corners, while the Lieutenant, Claire, and two other men walked towards the front door.

Inside the house, Manuel was waiting for his 'reward', and hoped the wait wouldn't be much longer. The beer and marijuana were really starting to have an effect on him. It would be a shame he thought to be unconscious when things got started. That's when he heard footsteps approaching the door.

"Come on in." He hollered, "The door is open."

It took him a moment to realize that instead of the woman he was expecting, Director Claire walked in the door.

"Hey, Mister Director. This is a surprise. I didn't think you would personally deliver my reward."

"Oh Manuel, I wouldn't have missed this for the world." He stepped to the side, and the two black suited men charged in, and took Manuel to the floor. Once there, they put handcuffs on him, rolled him onto his back, picked him up again, and threw him into the nearest chair, nearly breaking his arms in the process.

"What are you doing? I've done everything you wanted. You said you were happy with what I've done. Whats' this all about?"

"Manuel, do you have any idea just how much of a fool you've been?" Claire was feeling confident, and was enjoying himself. He continued.

"I admit, you've done a good job. It would have been impossible for the New Order to fight the military, the police, people like you, ex-military, and those damned Christians all at the same time. It took decades of careful planning and work to get to this point. Now we can't be stopped, so there is no harm in telling you."

"You see, it started by using people like you, greedy and stupid, to get many of the American people using drugs. They made money, and the people started getting complacent. Then we, started dividing the people. White against black, black against Hispanic, it was so easy. Instead of taking personal responsibility for their lives, everyone blamed someone else for their problems. But that wasn't nearly enough. We got the military involved in endless, senseless wars. That bled the economy badly. And it even divided the people further. Once the military was out of the country, we unleashed more attacks. On the east coast with hurricanes. The west coast with earthquakes, weather problems all over the place. Food got short, and people started fighting over that like dogs over a bone."

"But then, Manuel, then we started on the end game. Through laws, we disarmed any who would stand against us. Without the military here, your president, who threw in with long ago, and was told of the plan, brought in outsiders to keep the peace. Men who don't care for your laws, or your people. Yes, we let you kind get out of the cities. So you could do the dirty work for us, to satisfy your own lusts. And you did it beautifully. Now there is nobody left to resist us,and the final pieces are coming into place. Soon, our master will take his throne, and no one will dare to stand against him."

"What are you talking about. This sounds crazy."

"What a fool you are. You have crosses tattooed on your body, but you haven't been inside a church since you were nine. You've never read that cursed book the real Christians love so much. And you think you know it all."

"Now I know you're crazy. How could you know things like that?"

For just a moment, Claire allowed Manuel to see his true face. Manuel started to scream. Claire pulled out a knife, which he was expert at using, and moved towards him.

Manuel screamed until the early hours of the morning. But it didn't matter. There were similar screams coming from the entire southern region.

[day late]

The group had once again stopped to rest, after leaving the 'Molly B.'. Kathy used the chance to quiz Bob.

"Alright Bob, I want to know how you have done all of this."

"I told you, Kathy. Bit by bit."

"No, no. I'm not talking about your stuff. I mean how have you learned to do everything you've been doing. It seems like no matter what happens, you have the answer. How is that possible?"

"Oh, that. Kathy, I didn't live a sheltered life. I've got scars I will carry to my grave. Mostly from a foolishly spent youth. During that time, I learned a lot of things. Believe it or not, I learned a lot from the Boy Scouts. As a matter of fact, look at this."

Bob grabbed a well worn book from behind the front seat of the truck.

"This is one of my most important books. A Boy Scout Handbook from the mid sixties. It has so many things to teach a person. Morse code for example."

"Isn't that kind of old fashioned?"

"You tell me. What does three dots followed by three dashes, with three more dots mean?"

"Everyone knows that. It's S.O.S."

"That's right. Now what is the letter A?"

"Um, I don't know."

"You're not alone. Most people don't know Morse code. They don't even have a chart to tell them how to read it. That means I can send messages that most people will be totally clueless about. Another nice thing is that Morse can be sent using lights, noises, like the old telegraph, or even written out. But Morse code isn't all that is in here. Can you take balls of twine and make a rope?"

"No."

"Can you make a rope bridge that is safe?"

"No."

"What about an emergency shelter? Can you make one of those using only things like tree branches and a knife?"

"No."

"See what I mean? The Boy Scouts were teaching young men how to survive in the wilderness, long before I was born. They had it down to a science. The only bad thing was when they were forced to become 'politically correct', a lot of those things went away. That's why this is an older manual.

But that, of course, wasn't my only teacher. I learned a lot from listening to veterans when I was a boy. It's amazing what you can do with your own two hands when you have to. I never could stand it when someone would tell me either, 'I can't do that.' or 'You can't do that.' while I knew it could be done. Those smoke grenades for example. Maybe they weren't all slick and polished, or state of the art, but they worked. And in the end, that was what was important."

"What about food, Bob? I know you've got quite a bit in the 4X4, but that won't last forever."

"Got that covered as well. Take a look."

Bob again reached into the truck and pulled our what looked like a deck of playing cards, and handed them to her. Kathy looked at the box. The end of the box said;


EDIBLE WILD FOOD CARDS
U.S. GAMES SYSTEMS, INC.
Stamford, CT 06902 U.S.A.


"But whatever make you decide to collect all of this stuff, besides being nudged by The Lord?"

"You know the old saying. 'Plan for the worst and hope for the best.' I took that seriously. I once heard of people that died during Katrina in their own attics. The reason why is they didn't plan ahead. When the water rose and forced them up, they didn't think about getting out. They didn't take an ax, or even a hammer to make a hole in the roof. Had they done so, many of them would have lived. When I would hear about such things, I'd think, 'What would I do?' and then do it."

"O.K., O.K. Bob. I understand about getting ready to survive in bad times. I can even see how the Boy Scouts helped you to prepare for what is happening now. But what about other things? Like when you rescued us from the gang members."

"That was a matter of Gods' grace, and my training as a soldier. They weren't professionals. If they had been, we wouldn't be talking now.

"But Bob, you won."

"No Kathy. We lost. Now it's true that I scared them off at first, but they came back later. Then they were scared off a second time, with heavy losses on both occasions. But make no mistake about it. We lost. If we had won, we would be sitting at home right now. As it is, before your family came to my house both of your cars were useless pieces of junk. As of now, I'm certain that there is nothing of value left in your home. They've taken it all. And my home, it's nothing but a pile of scorched concrete, burned wood, and ashes. No Kathy, we didn't win. We lost, big time."

"But you jumped right into the middle of them and saved us."

Bob chuckled before answering.

"Hardly. If I had 'jumped into the middle of them' we would all be dead by now. What I did was to stand off a ways and use a rifle. That and the element of suprize are what made the difference.

You see, they had handguns and a single shotgun. Both are short range weapons. I was using a rifle that will reach out and touch someone at about one hundred yards. When I opened fire on them I was at least fifty yards away. It takes a professional soldier a lot of practice to be able to hit even a man sized target with a pistol at that range. And I was standing behind a tree, which made me even a smaller target. Those people weren't professionals. I put down three of them before any of them had the first idea where the fire was coming from. Even then, at that range, a handgun is a poor choice of weapons. For the average person, a target at that range is an impossibility with a pistol. Oh yes, they sprayed the area with bullets, but none came close to me. In the mean time, with the rifle I was downing man after man.

Once they realized that they were on the losing end of the deal, they scattered. Then I was able to get you out of there. But when they came back, it was in force. True, the booby traps I had waiting for them made them leave a second time. Which gave us the chance to get out. But all in all, we lost. They hold our property, and we are running for our lives. The only victory we can claim is that God in His mercy allowed us to all get away. That is all.

I guess it comes down to what my favorite science fiction writer once said in a book. 'A wise man, in the course of a long life, is prepared to abandon his luggage, several times'."

"Meaning, we can't go back?"

"Meaning, we can't go back."


--------------------------------------------------------------------------

It had been four days since the crossing of the Mississippi. Things had become just as they had been before. Traveling at night, avoiding cities, towns, and people in general. Now they were in the Rocky mountains. They had stopped for the day and were waiting for the important announcement from the President that had been spoken of earlier. The static cleared as the station powered up for the broadcast.

"My fellow Americans. It is with a heavy heart that I come to you tonight. As we are all aware, these past months have been disastrous for our nation. Both of our coasts and the Gulf states, have been changed forever by natural occurrences that could not be foreseen. Neither in scale or magnitude. Our infrastructure has been severely undermined.

We are all aware of the sacrifices that have been forced on us all. Without a doubt these events have cost many lives since they happened, and we are just now starting to make headway in our efforts at recovery. Much of that headway is due to the efforts of the foreign troops that have agreed to come here and help us in our time of need."

"With help like that who needs enemies." Bob said.

"I want to express the thanks of our people to these selfless men and women that have left their homes to come here for us. As we have helped them in years gone by."

"O.K. When does the hammer fall?" Tim asked.

The President paused before continuing.

"Just as we have had to do without here in America, our brave men and women in the service have had to sacrifice as well. They have had to bare the burden of shortages of all kinds. Food, ammunition, weapons, fuel, and more of the necessities of waging a successful campaign, are all in short supply."

"I think it is falling now." Kathy answered her husband.

"Our brave young men and women have borne these sacrifices with honor and dignity. Continuing to carry on with their noble mission of bringing peace and democracy to the troubled lands of the middle east."

Again the President paused.

"I must now inform you that our enemies have chosen this time when they believe we are weakened, and disheartened to launch major attacks against every American outpost in the region. They are attacking in untold numbers. They have received more fighters from nations that, before this, had remained out of the fighting."

"Oh no. Joe!" Was all Alex said, thinking of his high school friend who was currently serving in Iraq.

"Our forces are making valiant efforts to repel these attacks, but are hampered by the shortages. We expect casualties to be high on both sides in these engagements."

Another pause.

"I have asked for our allies in the region to send to our fighting men and women everything they can to help in repelling these attacks."

The radio faded.

"Allies!!!" Bob shouted, "What allies? What is he talking about? None of the Arab states are going to help us. Neither are any of the former Soviet states. Japan? They are watching out for China. South Korea? They have their hands full with the North. Israel? They get a lot of their weapons from us, what can they do? Somebody please tell me I didn't hear what I just heard."

Nobody said a word. They were all as unbelieving as Bob, except for Alex, who had dark thoughts of his own.

Once again, the static cleared.

"I am also asking that all veterans, who have served our nation in the past, step forward and serve yet again. I know this is a great sacrifice, but these are desperate times unlike any we have faced before in the history of this great nation. Even if you are older, or disabled, we can use you to do things that will free up combat ready personnel for duty overseas. I have ordered the Postmaster General to make available space in every Post Office for you to come in and register for duty."

Disgustedly, Bob turned off the radio.

"That does it. There is no further help for the U.S. We are doomed to the ash heap of history."

"Come on, Bob. I can't believe that. We'll recover some how." Kathy said.

"Recover? How? Look at the facts. The President is ruling by decree. He has no plans to allow Congress to resume its' duties. So, he can do what he wants, when he wants, without restraint. Last time I checked, they called someone like that a dictator.

There are foreign troops patrolling our streets, with the local law enforcement not only under Presidential direction, but also under orders to obey the foreign commanders. What politician have you ever heard of that willingly gave up that kind of power?

Our food production has been cut by at least fifty per cent, and people are starving. The only ones with any kind of firearms are the ones that refused to surrender them, and we are being hunted. What is left of our military is being over-run in foreign countries, without any hope of resupply or re-enforcements. Now, they want anyone else who may have the slightest knowledge of how to resist this New Order, to walk into the Post Office and agree to serve in whatever capacity they choose. The sad part is that many ofthem will do it, out of a sense of duty. Once they are gone, almost all resistance ends. There won't be anyone left to fight, or teach others how to fight. How do we recover from that?"

"I think you underestimate what God can do. He said that if we pray, He will hear us."

"Almost. What He said was; 'If my people, which are called by my name, shall humble themselves, and pray, and seek my face, and turn from their wicked ways; then will I hear from heaven, and will forgive their sin, and will heal their land.' 2Ch 7:14. Tell me, do you see the people of this nation turning from their ways? Or are they just trying to hold on to what they had, and find an excuse to keep on doing what they have been doing all along? Do you see much humility? I don't.

Let me tell you something else. Last night the Arch Angel, Michael, visited me in a dream. I saw some people who turned themselves in to the authorities. They thought that they were doing the right thing. They thought they would be safe. The husband watched his wife get raped to death. Then they shot him, in the head. Is that what you want?"

"Bob, this HAS to end. We have children to raise. We can't just keep wandering through the wilderness."

Bob shook his head.

"You still haven't accepted it, have you? Kathy, this IS the beginning of the tribulation. From here on out, things only get worse, and it won't stop, until The Lord returns.

Think about, both of you. As long as America stood with Israel, nobody could wipe it out. None of the prophecies in The Bible concerning Israel and the end times could happen. We would stand with them. Now, America is out of the equation. What is left of our ground troops will either be dead, or captured, very soon. Most of the air bases we have here have either been too badly damaged to be of use, or they have been turned over to the foreign forces.

Our Navy is about the only asset we have left, and they won't last long without fuel. We can't pay for fuel, even if someone was willing to sell it to us. On top of that, it has been prophesied that we will go to war with China over Taiwan. What do you think China will do about that? I'll tell you what. They will nuke the Navy while it is still at sea, and out of range of their coasts. After that, Russia will hit us with everything they've got, and we are done for.

Israel will have to stand alone. Only God can help them now, just as it was foretold.

All of that means, there will be no settling down for us. Oh yes, we will be able to stop moving for short periods of time, but never put down roots. We do that, and we will die."

[day late]

When the group set out once again, Tim was riding shotgun with Bob, and had his own set of questions.

"Bob, do you mind if I ask you about some things?"

"Ask away."

"I heard some of the things you said to Kathy. They make me wonder. I mean, I know that uniforms are easy to come by, so anyone can look like a 'professional' as you've put it. But how do you tell the difference?"

"That is easier to say than it is to understand. It isn't any one thing, it is a combination of things. Mostly attitude and actions. You are right about one thing. A uniform does not make a soldier. But you can tell a soldier from a civilian. Mostly it is by the way they act. For example, take a road block. A professional will have people BEHIND the car or whatever they are using to block the road. Only one man, or at most two, will come out to check the oncoming vehicle. The rest will stay behind cover.

The two things that you need to look for are actions. First, a professional will always have someone watching his back. take those gang bangers that attacked your house on that first day. Obviously they didn't have any kind of attack plan, besides overwhelming you and killing any who resisted. if they had been real soldiers, they would have either waited you out, or offered you a chance to surrender and then taken what they wanted. They didn't expect to be hit from behind, themselves.

Secondly, a professional is very observant. He tries to see everything that is going on around him at all times."

"Sounds like being paranoid or something."

"No. Not at all. It's not that he expects to be attacked. He simply wants to know what is going on. Alert, but without fear. Take those guys at the checkpoint the other day. As you all pulled up, all three of them started towards you. A professional would have left at least one person by the 4X4. After all, someone might steal it when they were otherwise occupied."

"Alert, but without fear." Tim repeated. "I take it that is what you've been doing all these years."

"Something like that. I watched the news, checked outside sources on the Internet, and began to put things aside as best as I could. As scripture says,

1Ti 5:8 But if any provide not for his own, and specially for those of his own house, he hath denied the faith, and is worse than an infidel.

I was doing what I could for my family, like anyone would. The difference was that I believed these days were almost here, and that meant that I took it a little further than most people did.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director of the South Eastern Region Claire and the other regional directors were gathered in an underground room, buried deep under the White House. As they waited, they speculated as to why they had been summoned here. It wasn't long before their speculation was answered. The President entered the room, and without fanfare, went to the podium at one end of the room.

"Gentlemen. I want to thank you all for getting here on such short notice. As you know, the plan is almost complete. Soon this nation will no longer pose a threat to our master. The armed forces of America are on the verge of being eliminated. Soon the hated land of Israel will be without aid from any quarter. This is certain to please our master, and I intend to make sure he knows that it would not have been possible without your assistance.

I'm expecting a visit from his messenger at any moment, and expect to receive the final orders from him as to how to bring this land under complete subjugation to his will. Within a very short time, all of those who have been captured, especially the Christians, will be at your disposal, for whatever you desire to do with them."

A murmur of approval went around the room. This is what they had been promised. This is what they had long waited for. They could almost taste the human flesh, and smell the blood. It was hard to restrain their evil lusts. Some, like Claire, had already begun to indulge their wanton, inhuman desires on their captives. The freedom to indulge their every whim was almost overpowering.

Quietly a side door opened and a small servile man entered.

"Mr. President?" He said in nearly a whisper.

"What is it?"

"Sir, the messenger of the master is here to see you."

"Thank you, I'll be right there." He turned back to his audience. "As you've heard, our final instructions have arrived. I have taken the liberty of arranging some 'entertainment' for you. I believe ten years of age is satisfactory." He smiled at the thought. "Gentlemen, I'll look foreword to seeing you soon."

He then turned and quickly left the room.

As one the directors left the room. Each filled with thoughts of what was to come in just moments.





--------------------------------------------------------------------------------




The President entered his private apartment in the underground facility. The thing waiting for him couldn't be considered human, except for the fact he had the usual number of arms, legs, and a head. After that all similarity ended. He looked at the President with red glowing eyes, and a smile that was anything but comforting.

"Good to see you. The master is pleased with your work so far, but there is still one problem."

"Thank you, and thank him for me. I am happy to serve. What problem could there be?"

"Your Navy. It is still too powerful."

"What can I do? I've reduced it as much as I can without raising suspicion."

"The master understands. Even as we speak, there is a message being delivered at the White House, telling you that China is about to go to war with Taiwan. Your country has a mutual defense treaty with Taiwan in case of an attack from China. You will send most of your carrier forces to defend them. However, you must not allow them to make a first strike. Once the Chinese have taken out the carriers with their nuclear weapons, you will allow them to retake the renegade province. Then there will no longer be any chance of anyone opposing the masters will."

"I understand, and will obey."



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


It was a small town, tucked away in the Rocky Mountains. At best, the population couldn't have been more than two hundred and fifty people. Nestled in a valley, it looked peaceful. Both Bob and Tim, who were looking down on it from a nearby ridge, could tell that something was very wrong. There were no lights on in the storefronts, no music playing, there wasn't even a child riding his bike in the streets. There were doors standing open here and there, and the street was littered with wind blown debris.

"What could be going on down there?" Bob asked himself more than Tim, who was lying next to him.

"Maybe some sort of curfew?"

"I don't think so. They wouldn't just leave their doors open. Right now, I'm hoping it isn't some kind of quarantine."

"I guess it could be, but what are we going to do? You know we need supplies."

"I've got an idea. But right now, lets' get back to the others."

Keeping low enough below the ridge line that they couldn't be seen from the town, they both walked back to the vehicles. Once there, they described the scene just over the hill.

"My thought is that Alex and I should go in first. Look around, and see what we can see."

"Shouldn't I go with you? after all, Alex isn't much older than Tom or Sam." Tim asked.

"Tim, I don't want to break up a family. If something should happen, Kathy would lose her husband, and the father of your children. If Alex and I go, well, it won't be as bad on them."

"Gee, thanks Dad."

"It's true son, and you know it."

"Yeah I do, but that doesn't mean I have to like it."

"If it makes you feel any better, I like it even less than you do. I'd like to have someone to carry on the family name. But I need to have back up, just in case."

After that, Bob pulled out two small walkie talkies. He showed Tim how to use it, and then put the other in his pocket.

"Tim, I want you to go back up to where we were. Keep this thing on, but don't use it unless you have to do so. Alex and I are going to need to keep it quiet, until we figure out what is going on. If you don't hear from us within an hour, you must assume the worst, and take action to protect your family. Understand?"

Tim simply nodded.

"Bob, you two be careful down there." Kathy said.

"Don't worry, I'm looking after my two favorite skins."

As Alex and Bob got themselves ready to walk down the slope towards the town, Alex spoke.

"Dad, I have to tell you, I'm kind of scared."

"So am I."

"You are?"

"Son anyone in this situation, and his right mind, would be at least a little scared. Lets' face it, walking into the center of a bulls-eye is not something anyone wants to do. Anyone who says he isn't scared doing something like this is either a fool or a liar."

"What are you scared about? I mean God is on your side."

"Son, I've read The Bible, cover to cover, more than once. I've never seen one verse or passage that says I'll still be standing when the final trump sounds. Even if I did, that still doesn't mean I can't be hurt. So yeah, I'm a bit scared."

"You hide it real good."

"It's like you said. God is on my side. And like scripture says, The Lord is my strength. That is where my courage comes from to do something as risky as this." Bob paused a moment. "It's time you learned something about military tactics."

"I'm all ears."

"This is called a 'bounding overwatch'."

"How do we do that?"

"To start with, I'm going to move down the right side of this road. You take the left. Now, I'll move out first, and get down there to that depression by that bush. Do you see it?"

"Yeah. What do I do?"

"You cover me until I get there. Once I do, I'll cover you as you make your way to that boulder."

"That will put me in front of you."

"That's right. The idea is we kind of leap frog our way down there. You cover me, then I cover you, all the way to the town. Take advantage of whatever cover you can find on the way. When we get there, you take one side of the street, and I'll take the other."

"Not to interrupt, but what am I doing while you guys are 'leap frogging?'" Tim asked.

"From up here you have a better view of the edge of town. So, you watch it and cover both of us. If you see anything that looks wrong, fire a shot to warn us. Don't worry about hitting anything. Just keep them ducking so they can't shoot us. If we are close enough, we'll keep moving forward into town. If not, we'll beat it back here as fast as we can. Everyone set? O.K. Lets' do it."

[day late]

There was almost no cover halfway between the ridge line, and the town. Bob decided that he and Alex would have to brazen it out. They walked slowly down the slope to the town. Once on the outskirts, they separated. Bob went down one side of the main street, while Alex took the other.

"Remember," Bob had told his son when they started down the hill, "Check every window, every door, by poking your head around the edge. Get a quick glance, and pull back. DON'T stand there and look. Just in and out. If you see anyone, call me. If there are bodies, do not go near them. We don't know what has happened here, so we don't want to take any unnecessary chances."

Now they were both doing the same thing. A quick peek, and pull back. They worked their way down the street, until about half way, when Alex reached the general store. He peeked in the window, and when he pulled back, he noticed a piece of paper posted in the window. After reading it, he called his father over to him.

"What is it?"

"Take a look at this."

"I'm sorry son, I left my reading glasses back at the truck. What does it say?"

"It says that this town is to be evacuated by the government."

"Evacuated? Why?"

"It says that the government can't spare troops to protect a small town like this. So, they are all being taken to another place where they will be put in a 'protective facility' along with people from other small towns. That way they can be more easily protected."

"I wonder if they are still alive?"

"Dad? Don't you think that calling Tim would be a good idea? It's been about forty minutes already."

"Right you are." Bob pulled the walkie talkie from his pocket. "Tim, it seems to be alright down here. Bring the vehicles and park them out of sight, where ever you can."

"On our way."

When the vehicles arrived, Bob was only a little surprised to see Tom driving the small car owned by Alex. They were soon out of sight, in alleys between the mostly wooden buildings, and everyone started to get out.

"Tim, I'd like you to come with me. Everyone else stay near the cars until we make sure it's completely safe."

The younger children were disappointed at losing the chance of exploring this ghost town, but Kathy made sure that they stayed close to her. Alex walked back to his car and as young men do, started proudly talking about his car with Tom.

Tim and Bob had covered most of the town, when they found a small adobe building with windows that had been locked shut with stout wooden shutters, and a flat roof. Strangely enough the decaying bodies of several dogs lying scattered over a large area outside.

They tried the door. There was no door knob, only a draw rope high up on the door, and found that the rope refused to raise the bar on the inside. There was a sliding panel to allow whoever was inside to open it and see who was outside, before opening the door. It too was securely fastened.

"What do you think?" Tim asked.

"Mighty curious. Do you think you can boost me up on the roof? A lot of these places had a trap door up there, and it might be open."

"Lets' find out."

Together they pulled a nearby box up next to the wall, climbed up on it, and Tim cupped his hands for Bob to step into. They he hoisted Bob high enough to grab the edge of the wall, and he pulled himself up and over, onto the roof.

Bob quickly surveyed the scene around the house. Just as out in front, there were more dead dogs lying on three other sides of the house. At a guess, he placed the number at around twenty to twenty-five of the animals. Then he found what he had hoped for. The trap door was located to one side of the roof, and it too had a draw rope. Unlike the door below, this one worked easily. Before dropping down into the dark interior, he called to Tim.

"I found it. But stay on your toes. There's' a lot more dead dogs out there, and I'm getting a bad feeling about this."

"Will do."

Bob opened the door, and the foul odor of death came up to meet him. Carefully felt around with his foot. He found a ladder with it, and climbed down. Once inside, he paused for a moment to allow his eyes to adjust to the darkness. He located the front door, and moved to open it. The cross bar was slightly warped, but with a little effort, he lifted it, and opened the door. Once the door opened, the light that came in was enough to see the entire room. He saw two more dogs on the floor, and the body of a man sitting in a chair. Leaning against the table next to him was a shotgun and three spent shell casings were on the floor. One leg was wrapped in a bandage, that was dark brown with dried blood. Cradled in the mans hands was a clear glass jar, tightly sealed, with a piece of paper inside. He was so absorbed by the scene, that he jumped when Tim's' feet scuffed the floor as he came in.

"What happened here?"

"Lets see if he can tell us."

Gently, Bob pulled the jar from the dead mans hands, opened it, removed the paper, and started to read aloud.

"I, Todd Johnson, do declare this to be my last will and testament. I leave all my property to whoever finds them. I pray that it is a Christian. Especially my rifle, and shotgun. They are good weapons, and have killed most of the dogs that have killed me. Beware of the dogs. I hid when the town was evacuated. People had to leave the dogs behind. They have gone wild, and are hunting in packs like wolves. You will find ammunition for these weapons and my pistol in the cabinet next to the stove.

I had to get water from the well, when they came back for me. I had already killed a bunch of them, and thought they had gone. Two got inside with me. I did them in, but not before they got to me. I'm losing lots of blood, and don't know how long I will last. So I write this in hopes that it will help whoever finds me.

Todd Johnson"

Bob folded the paper, and put it in his pocket. Then he sniffed, wiped a tear from his eye, and looked at Tim. Only to find him doing the same.

"We'd better get back."

Tim was about to agree, when they heard the child scream. They nearly ran over each other trying to get out of the door.

As they ran down the street, they heard the boom of a shotgun, followed by two more. Reaching the intersection they had turned down to get to Todd's' home, they stopped and looked around the corner. The smaller children were nowhere to be seen. Alex was standing on the hood of the SUV with a pistol, trying to get a bead on a dog moving around him, trying to get a shot at him. Kathy was standing, with her back to the door of the general store, shotgun in hand, with one dog down in the street in front of her, and two more moving back and forth waiting for the right moment to attack.

Tim pulled up the rifle in his hands, sighted and fired. One of the animals in front of Kathy flew sideways as the bullet stuck home. The second dog stopped, and looked in the direction of Tim's' shot. He barred his teeth and made a fearsome growl. Kathy saw her chance and took it. The shotgun boomed again. The second dog went down.

"Kathy, are all of you alright?" Tim shouted.

"Yes. The kids are in the store. Alex? How are you doing?"

"O.K. I think. The one over here took off when the shooting started up again. I don't see him, and don't know where he went."

"Stay where you are, let us check it before you come down." Bob called to him.

"I ain't going nowhere."

First, Bob laid down, at a distance, and checked under the 4X4. On Bobs' signal, Tim took one side of the alley, while Bob took the other. They moved slowly ahead, checking every place the animal could hide. They looked behind every box, into every doorway, until they reached the end of the alley. Looking out onto the hillside beyond, there was no further sign on him.

"Lets' get to the store. Come on down Alex. It's clear."

After they had gathered in the store, Bob found out why the dogs had gotten so close. At first, they seemed like the kind of pets that they were used to seeing around. It wasn't until one of the children got a little to close to one, that the mistake was realized. Kathy was the only one with either shotgun or rifle, and had to wait until the running child was out of the line of fire, before she could shoot him. The first shot only wounded it, so she made sure the second finished him.

Most of them had already been in the store when everything started, and Alex had been checking windows up and down the street when Kathy shot the first time. He had seen the two other dogs coming at her, and picked up a pistol from the front seat of the SUV when he heard another dog growling behind him. He didn't know how it happened, but with one leap, he found himself on the hood. Turning, the dog was right behind him. In panic, instead of shooting, he had kicked the dog in the head, and sent it crashing back to the ground. By the time he remembered the handgun, the dog had gotten up next to the 4X4 and he couldn't get a shot.

"From now on, nobody old enough to carry a weapon goes anywhere without one. That INCLUDES going to the bathroom." Bob told them. "We got lucky today. Nobody got hurt. Next time we might not be so fortunate."

"What about bathing?" asked Kathy.

"We post guards. Obviously, Tim will guard you, otherwise we'll work it out as we go along."

"Bob, speaking of that sort of thing, do you think we can stay here a day or two? No offense to anyone, but some of us could really use a bath, and I know we could all stand to have some clean clothes."

Bob smiled, "I noticed the same thing. I just didn't want to mention it. Alright, as long as we can, we'll stay here. Tim, Alex, and I will look around and find the most defensible place, and we'll set up shop there. No sense in letting the dogs have another go at us. That reminds me. From now on, nobody travels alone. Everyone has someone to watch their back while we do what needs to be done. Oh and one more thing. Kathy you are the one with the most medical training. I noticed that this place had a doctor. Would you go to his office and see if there is anything that we might need that we can take with us. Drugs, bandages, that sort of thing."

Kathy agreed. She was in fact a dentist. How she managed to carry on a practice, and still manage to care for four children and her husband was a mystery to Bob, but her children were all well mannered and polite. Their clothes always clean, and everyone well fed. Bob admired her for that. And, in all matters medical deferred to her judgment. After all it was good that a man knew his limitations.

"Alright, the visit to the doctors office can wait for tomorrow. Right now, I want Tom and Sam to stand guard while you and the other children look through this place for anything we might need." He sniffed again, smiled and said, "Especially soap. Lets' get to it. I'd like to be ready in time for tonight's broadcast."




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


The President sat at his desk looking over the notes for his nightly radio broadcast. Since radio required less power than television, and most of the places that still had power on a regular basis, didn't have television stations, radio was seen as the best way to accomplish his plans.

"Mr. President, your on in 4, 3, 2, 1." the director pointed at the President to let him know he was on live.

"My fellow Americans, Once again I come before you with troubling news. Today I have been given undeniable proof, from the Taiwanese ambassador, that The Peoples Republic of China has begun preparations for a full scale invasion of the island nation of Taiwan.

I have advised them that America finds these actions to be unacceptable. We have mutual defense treaties with the Taiwanese government, and will honor them. Therefore I have ordered our naval forces to send four carrier task forces to the region.

It is hoped that the government of the Peoples Republic will see that even in our current condition, America will not abandon her partners in democracy. We hope that they will give up on these plans of conquest, and return to the peaceful path of negotiation.

In the event that they refuse to do so, they must be made aware that this nation will not stand aside while they conquer their neighbors, in total disregard for the wishes for freedom loving peoples everywhere.

Therefore, I have authorized the over all task force commander to take whatever actions he deems necessary in order to protect the nation of Taiwan.

I ask all Americans, everywhere to join me this night in prayer for the fate of not only the Taiwanese people but all those who love freedom. Thank you, and good night."

Once back in his private quarters, the President smiled to himself. He knew that the Chinese submarine, with the nuclear weapons to destroy the task force, was already on station. Just waiting for the order to fire.

[day late]

What was planned for just a couple of days turned into five of them. On the first day, another adobe house was found, just down the road from Todd's home. Like Todd's home it had stout walls, and a flat roof. Unlike Todd's place, it had locking doors, and windows. More importantly it had a generator, which was more than able to handle the load of running the house. It took two days for Kathy and Tim to get the clothing for their family finished. The load was made some what easier by the fact that Tom and Sam had found clothing that fitted them in the general store. Bob and Alex had similar luck with their clothing, limited only by Bobs' insistence that his pants had to be jeans.

"They last longer." Was all he had to say on the matter.

Kathy had asked, "Don't you think we should bury Todd?"

"I'd like to, but I'm afraid that the freshly turned earth would give us away." Bob told her.

The argument went back and forth for some time. In the end it was decided that leaving Todd where he was, was the best idea, and certainly the safest for them all. However, a ceremony was held to honor his memory.

Dogs proved to continue to be a problem for the first two days, but after five more of them had been killed, they no longer came close to the group. Because they would still see one of them from time to time, the rule of all adults, and everyone now thought of Tom and Sam as such, going armed, and guards at all times, was never questioned.

True to his word, the cabinet next to the stove in Todd's home was well stocked with rifle, shotgun, and pistol ammunition. The weapons made a welcome addition to the collection that they already had.

The general store offered even more than some food items, it also had something Bob had overlooked in his preps. Cards for three different types of games, plus a couple of board games were added to their supplies. Diversions the games offered, turned out to be just as necessary as ammunition, in order to keep everyone from becoming to up tight. Two other bonus' the store had were spices for the food, and coffee. After all the time they had spent on the road, coffee had become nonexistent. The adults soon made something of a ceremony of having it with breakfast every morning.

All of them were surprised at two things. First, they were amazed at the number of things they no longer had to entertain them. Secondly, how little they missed them. Once, the children were easily bored with whatever electronic gadget that they were given for birthdays, holidays, or any other reason. Now that such things were no longer available, they found new excitement in checkers, backgammon, and card games, which had no set number of outcomes as the electronic games did, since the outcome was determined by whatever a live opponent did.

Instead of television, they now listened to the few programs they could get on the radio during the evenings. The programs they could hear increased in number when a short wave radio was discovered. Now they could listen to broadcasts from around the world. The knowledge base of the youngest children grew by leaps and bounds.

They also discovered that sitting around playing board games and talking filled them with a sense of togetherness they had never known before. Some of those discussions brought new understanding to Kathy, Tim, and Alex.

"Tell me Bob, just how long have you been getting messages from angels? I mean you lived across the street from us for ten years before all of this got started. Why didn't you say anything?" Kathy asked one evening.

"Michael showed up for the first time, shortly after Nancy died, and just before we had to leave. But I've been getting, well, call them 'nudges' for years. You know, that small still voice that you aren't really sure you heard at all, but whatever you heard, was the right thing to do. I can't explain it better than that I'm afraid, but those 'nudges' were never wrong. They did, however cause more than one argument between Nancy and myself. Like that generator. It sat in the box in my garage for over five years, collecting dust. I don't know how many times Nancy told me to return it to the store, and get the money back in that first year. After it became obvious that it was old enough that the store wouldn't take it back, she urged me to get rid of it in a garage sale. I refused. I told her that if and when the day came we were without power, she'd be glad we had it. You remember what happened four years ago."

Kathy and Tim remembered. A major storm had gone through the area. They were without power for over a week. They were grateful that Bob and Nancy had the generator. It had saved a lot of the food that would have spoiled in their freezer.

"Anyway, after that storm, whenever bad weather was coming our way again, Nancy had only one question, 'Is the generator working?' That generator was a 'nudge', just like the long term storage food we've been eating. Same for my weapons and ammo. I had a shotgun, two rifles, and two handguns. Nancy thought I was a Little 'excessive' in my collection. Knowing I was a vet. she kind of wrote it off to my past. If she had known I also had over a thousand rounds for each weapon I truly believe she would have reported me to the mental health authorities."

Kathy nodded knowingly. She remembered the conversations she and Tim had when he first suggested getting a weapon for their own defense. And she couldn't forget how dearly it had almost cost them.

"It wasn't until things started to really get bad that Michael showed up. As for telling you about the 'nudges'. Well, as I've mentioned before, I gave you a copy of 'Through the Fire, Without Burning' which spoke of a lot of these things, but you never read it. How could I talk to you about the rest?" Bob smiled, "Maybe YOU would have called the boys in the white coats."

"You said that 'small still voice' was never wrong. How do you know it was from God?"

"As I said, it was never wrong. I was 'nudged' by it to get the generator. That wasn't wrong. True, it was years before I even opened the box, but it wasn't wrong. After that year, I didn't have a need to use it again, until recently. But it still wasn't wrong. The answers you get from The Lord are always the right thing to do, even when you don't understand why."

"What about Mom?" Alex asked. "Why did she have to die? It doesn't make sense. She was the one who was always going to the gym, you didn't. She was the one who went to the doctor when she felt something was wrong. She sure seemed to be in good health. So why did she have to die?" Clearly the thought was troubling him.

"I don't know son. I wish I did. I prayed for her for over twenty years. I don't have a clue as to why she died unsaved. All I CAN tell you is that there were many times she saw Gods' provision for us. But she always gave credit to luck, or something else, anything else, but never God. Also there is no way she would have been able to put up with what we've been through already. I don't believe she would have been able to handle what is coming."

"What is coming Bob?" It was Tim this time.

"Dimitru Duduman said he was told that when we go to war with China, over Taiwan, that is when Russia would hit us from behind, and I quote, 'America WILL burn.'"

The Presidential radio addresses had also become something of a regular event. Not so much for any sense of hope, but to let them know just how bad things had gotten. Bob sat waiting for the war with China to be announced as a fact, and not just posturing by governments. He was surprised when he heard what actually happened.

They were calling it 'The Washington Massacre'. The American people didn't blame the President for the west coast earthquakes. They didn't blame him for the mega hurricane that had done so much damage to the entire southeastern coast. Many understood that the armed forces had to deal with shortages, just as they did. They were dissatisfied with the response that left their sons, daughters, fathers, mothers, and loved ones of all kinds at even greater risk than they had been. They became angry when the President pulled two carrier groups out of the middle east, to support the Chinese mission. They knew that that move left their loved ones without a means of getting them all out, if things got worse. Then when the carrier groups were wiped out by the Chinese nuclear missiles, and the troops on the ground in the middle east came under even heavier attacks, they did blame him. Everything seemed to happen by accident.

Claire's' televangelist had once again been put on the air pleading for people to come back to the cities, with promises of food, housing, warmth on cold nights, and all the rest. The foreign troops guarding Washington D.C. had no idea who belonged there and who didn't. But they did have orders to allow anyone trying to get into the city to enter, just to not allow them to leave again. The crowds around the White House started to grow to unmanageable size. They also became angrier by the hour. When they heard about the loss of the carriers, they descended on the White House with the seeming intent of taking it apart, brick by brick.

The foreign troops may not have known what to do about ever growing crowds, but they knew about quelling riots. They opened fire. They continued to fire long after the resistance had stopped. The dead were almost beyond counting.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


"Are you certain the master wants me to do this?" The President asked. "Who cares what those useless eaters think? Who cares what they want? It doesn't make any difference."

"Are you questioning me?" The messenger asked in a deceptively mild voice. "Maybe you are questioning the master himself?"

"No, it isn't that. I just don't understand why I have to speak to them."

"The master has his plans. You just do what you are told. The regional directors have already gotten their orders, and have left Washington."

"They're gone? I thought they took orders from me."

"We all take our orders from the master. You have yours, carry them out. Tonight."

"I will obey."




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Claire and another director were sitting in a plane as they were flying out of the city. They spoke quietly to one another.

"You are certain of the masters plan?"

"Yes."

"Why would he do it? This one has helped us a great deal."

"He wants power too much. Do you really think the master will tolerate any challenge to his power?"

"No, he won't."




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


The President was just starting to speak.

"My fellow Americans. I want to speak to you tonight about the rising level of violence in this land..."

That was when the first Russian bomb detonated over Washington. Within seconds, numerous other cities were also wiped off the map of North America. The 'Land of the Free, and Home of the Brave' ceased to exist at that moment.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bob was itching to leave. He thought that they had been in this town to long. They had done everything that was needed. Their supplies had been replaced, they had the chance to rest, and they had even managed to pick up a few needed items, such as Todd's' weapons. But, he knew the longer they stayed where they were, the greater the chance they would be discovered. It was time to move on as far as he was concerned. What bothered him the most, was that Michael hadn't returned. He supposed that he should take comfort from that, but after having spent so much time on the run, he couldn't get used to staying put.

It was that same night he brought up the matter to the rest of the group. It was just before the Presidential address.

"I don't know what to think." He told them. "I really believe that we should be moving on, but I haven't gotten any instructions yet."

"Dad, didn't you say that we shouldn't do anything without our guide?"

"Alex is right, Bob. We should wait for Michael to lead the way. After all, The Lord hasn't let us down so far. I'm willing to wait on Him." Kathy said.

"I know, I know. You're both right, I just don't like sitting here this long. What if a helicopter comes by? We've been careful not to disturb much of anything, but still, anyone who looks carefully can tell someone has been here recently. I don't like it."

Tim spoke up, "I'm sure The Lord wouldn't leave us here without a reason. Tell you what. let's listen to tonight's' follies, and then see what we think in the morning."

The 'follies' was the name they had given to the radio address' given by the president. Bob agreed, and the switched on the radio, just in time to hear;

""My fellow Americans. I want to speak to you tonight about the rising level of violence in this land..."

Unexpectedly, the radio went dead. At first, nobody could figure out what had happened. Then, suddenly, in the distance off to the southeast, the night sky became brighter. For a moment, it seemed as if a new small sun had come to life. then, just as suddenly, it dimmed and faded away.

"What was THAT?" Tom asked?

"I think that was Las Vegas." Bob answered. "If I'm right, everything that Dimitru prophesied is happening now."

"What do you mean?" Alex asked.

"If this is what I think it is, Vegas, D.C., New York, what is left of California, and Florida have all been wiped out. Now I know why we have been left sitting here. We have to get ready."

"Ready for what?" Asked Kathy.

"If you were living in a city that hasn't been bombed, say Colorado Springs, what would you do when you find out what has happened?"

"I'd get out of there."

"What about the troops guarding the cities?"

"Nothing would stop me. Not even them."

"Exactly. By this time tomorrow, there are going to be a lot of people trying to do what we've already been doing. A lot of them are going to die. Either by troops firing on them, or from not being prepared for this, they will still die. The ones that make it this far are going to be either lead here as we were, or the toughest people to make it out. They won't be in the mood for anyone telling them where they can or can't live. They are just going to take what they want, and kill anyone that gets in their way. We need to be ready for that."

"Bob. There are only six of us that can fight. How are we supposed to defend this place? More force multiplication?"

"No. That won't work here. There are too many ways into this place. We'd never be able to defend them all. Especially with only six people able to fight. We need another plan. Let me sleep on it tonight, maybe something will come to me."

"What about those people who are running from the cities?" Kathy asked.

"Even if they left right now, they would still take a few days to get here on foot."

"Won't they be driving Dad?"

"Those close enough to the blast won't be driving anywhere. EMP will stop them."

"EMP?"

"Electro Magnetic Pulse. A blast of electromagnetic energy given off by the bomb. It will kill any unshielded electronic device. I'm not an expert, so that is the best I can explain it. But, that includes car ignitions. They will be on foot alright. And if they can get outside the affected area, they will have to fight with the owners of any working cars that are still around, not to mention each other. I think we have a few days to a week to work something out."

"Do you think those who weren't in the affected areas will come this way?" It was Alex. "If they do, how long before they get here?"

"I can't say, Son. But we should be safe enough for tonight. I think we should all try to get some sleep. It just might have to last us for a while."

With that, they all turned in for the night. However it was a long time before they all finally fell into a fitful sleep.

[day late]

As night fell after the first full day in this new town, the group gathered in the general store to prepare a meal. Tim asked Bob about something that he had been wondering about.

"Tell me something, Bob. When the government made it illegal to own guns, I know they sent out people to collect the ones that weren't turned in. And don't get me wrong, I glad you didn't, but how did you keep them without anyone knowing about it?"

"In a word, misdirection. Like the magician that gets you to watch the right hand, while he's pulling the trick with his left. In this case, I did turn in my weapons. Well, at least the ones they knew about."

"They must have known about all of them, didn't they? I mean they were registered and everything."

"Not exactly. You see it was a common misconception that all firearms had to be registered. That was what the government wanted everyone to believe, so they fostered that idea. The truth was that in most of the country private sales of weapons weren't required to be registered. So I didn't. The only weapons that went on the roles were those bought from dealers. Knowing that the time was coming when they would come after the weapons, I bought a few that were registered. When the time came, I dutifully went down to the police station and turned them over."

"Didn't they check you out to make sure you didn't have any more?"

"Yes, they did. But by the time they got to me, there weren't any in the house. I had hidden them nearby."

"Let me guess. You buried them?"

"Some of them, but not all."

"Weren't you afraid they'd find them?"

"Not really. Where they were hidden wasn't on my property, so they could have belonged to anyone. And as they used to teach us in the infantry 'know thy enemy'. If you know what he is likely to do, you can take counter measures. The weapons I buried, I put down far enough that a metal detector wouldn't find them. The others were hidden in places where there was too much metal for there to be any hope of them being noticed."

"Where was that?"

"A junkyard."

Kathy looked at Bob. "You know Bob. When we fist met, I just thought you were a 'good old boy' redneck."

"I am. I like hunting, fishing, camping, old pick up trucks and all the rest of it. Even hound dogs named 'Blue'."

"Bob, you are much more than that. What is your I.Q.?"

"I honestly don't know. I've never taken an I.Q. test."

"I know they gave you one when you joined the Army. Everyone takes it."

"So, is that what that was?"

"Bob, you're doing it again."

"Doing what?"

"Playing dumb. I know you are more intelligent than that. What was your score?"

"Oh yes, I remember that test. Highest possible score was 140. Minimum to be allowed into the service was 80. To be an officer was at least 115."

"And your score?"

"Well I wasn't an officer, just a grunt."

"BOB! Stop being evasive."

A brief smile crossed his face. Bob looked down and half mumbled. "127."

"127! Bob, You could have been an officer."

"I know."

"But if you were an officer, you could have retired more than a decade ago. You wouldn't have had to put on this 'dumb redneck' routine either."

Bob sighed. "Kathy, I don't know if I should be mad or happy. Mad, that even you have fallen for the deception they have put out. Or happy that my tracks have been hidden so well."

"What are you talking about?"

"Kathy, Do you have any idea what a redneck really is? A redneck is someone that is close to the earth. Not in a tree-hugging way, but someone who respects the earth, and The God who made it. They don't just go out and kill anything that has fur and moves. Yes, they do kill animals, but only to eat, or in self defense. They don't just go out and slash and burn the land. The land and the animals are what keep them alive, and they know it.

The idea that we are people that are some kind of inbred racist morons whose' greatest hope is to graduate the fifth grade is absolutely wrong. You've known me for over ten years. Have you ever heard me say anything that could be called racist?"

"Well, no."

"Do you think I've got an education that is beyond the fifth grade?"

"Obviously you do. Bob, what is your point?"

"Simply this. By your own admission, I'm not what you would call a redneck, and by mine, I am a redneck. Who do you think is right?"

"Bob that's not fair."

"It's perfectly fair. I'm challenging your prejudices. I'm not saying that there are no redneck racists, there are. But I've met racists in everything from uniforms to three piece suits. Hollywood had promoted the idea that they are all out there in the countryside, barefoot and drunk. And you bought into it."

Bob shook his head. "I've used that prejudice to conceal what I am really all about and what I will do. Most people think that rednecks would be the first to charge heavily armed men in body armor with both air and artillery support with nothing more than shotguns and pick up trucks. Nobody expected that someone like me would have the brains to evade the forces that have been sent against us.

I told you. Misdirection is a very powerful friend. You thought one thing, but when you learn the truth, it turns out to be something very different. You think rednecks were basically stupid and lazy. Yet a redneck pulled your family out of your house. A redneck kept you alive when the gang bangers came back. A redneck has been feeding your family since we left home. Does that sound like an inbred moron to you?"

Kathy bowed her head, and shook it.

"Do you begin to see it? I've used peoples' preconceptions to cover my actions. I'm bright enough to do about anything I want. I choose to live simply. If you mistake that for something else, that is your problem, not mine."

"Bob." Tim spoke softly. "You've always said you knew this time was coming. How?"

"When I was a boy, my parents sent me to a school that was run by our church. One day in the fall of 1966, our pastor was teaching the Bible study. We were in the book of Revelation. Someone asked if he thought he would see the end times. He said no, because not all of the prophecies had been fulfilled yet. Such as Israel regaining their land. As you know, Israel regained their land in the six day war in June of '67. That made an impression on me. From that day to this, I've studied Biblical prophecy. That's how I know."

"I never knew you went to a church school." Kathy said.

Bob smiled. "Misdirection is a powerful friend, and 'playing dumb' can be a great help at times. People underestimate you. That means they never see the surprise coming."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

The next morning, Bob was the last one to awaken. Nobody wanted to do anything to disturb his sleep. They knew he would sometimes receive dreams or visions, and no one wanted to disturb him. When Bob finally did get up, it was clear he was in a much better mood than the night before.

"So Bob, are you going to tell us, or do we have to drag it out of you?" Kathy said, with a smile on her face.

"That obvious, is it?"

"Yes. When Michael comes for a visit, you become very calm. What did he say this time?"

"Actually, it wasn't Michael. It was a dream. I was shown that we aren't to leave here yet. There are others coming, and we need to be here when they arrive. However, we need to do a couple of things before they get here. Tim? Could you come here for a minute?"

"What do you need?"

"Correct me if I'm wrong, but weren't there some mouse traps over in the store?"

"I think so. Why, are you having midnight callers?"

"Not that kind. Could you get a few of them for me?"

"Sure. Sam, come with me."

The two of them headed towards the store.

"Mouse traps? What do you have in mind, Bob?"

"Watch and learn young lady, watch and learn. Alex."

"Yeah Dad?"

"I need to go to the truck. Would you take the other side of the building I'm next to, and make sure I don't have any surprises."

"You got it."

Bob turned and headed off to his truck. In the back, he had a hodge podge of different items, many of which seemed to make no sense. But when something was needed, he always had something that would do the job. As he turned the corner, he was brought up short by what looked to him like a sewer pipe pointed right at his nose. A female voice quietly ordered him;

"Quiet, and DON'T move."

"I wouldn't dream of it."

"Who are you people, and how did you get here?"

"We're refugees, trying to hide from the military patrolling the cities." He looked over the barrel of the shotgun, and saw a woman, about his own age. She was handsome, rather than beautiful. With a face that was starting to show the usual signs of age. Her eyes were a deep brown, like her hair.

"Why did you come here? This place is in the middle of nowhere."

"That's why we came here. A lot less likely that anyone is going to be looking out here. Look ma'am, if we are trespassing on your property, we will be happy to move to another part of town. We truly mean you no harm."

"Sure you don't. How can I believe that?"

"By this. Alex, put the gun down."

"You don't really expect me to fall for that old one, do you?"

From behind her the woman heard the familiar whack-whack of a shotgun.

"Old, but true." Alex said.

"Alex, I told you, put it down. Obviously this lady lives here. We are in her town. Besides, if you do anything, I think the young lady behind you would be VERY unhappy."

Alex felt the muzzle of a weapon in the small of his back.

"Yes, I would."

"O.K. I get the point." Alex lowered the weapon, but still held on to it.

"Ma'am, there is no reason for this to end badly. We really have no intention of hurting anyone."

The shotgun Bob was staring into lowered.

"You certainly are a polite one. Well, we'll give you a chance. How many are you?"

"There's eight of us in all, two aren't yet teenagers. Please let us show you our good intentions. We still have some things left over from breakfast, would you like to eat?"

"We could stand to have a meal."

"Then please, come with me."

"Alright. You can keep your weapons, but both of you walk in front of us."

"Mom?" The girl questioned.

"We can't carry them all, and besides this way everything looks normal."

"If you say so."

Bob was starting to like this woman. She thought much like he did. Slowly Bob turned, and called Alex to walk beside him, which he did. As they moved towards the adobe house, Tim and Sam were just returning from the store, a half dozen mouse traps in hand.

"I found them Bob. Whoa! What's going on?"

"Take it easy Tim. We are going to see about breakfast for our visitors. Bring those, and come along. And Tim, don't make any sudden moves please. It could be hazardous to my health."

Tim and Sam also turned and started walking to the house. As they got near to it, Tim called to his wife.

"Kathy. We have company."

Kathy looked out the window, and saw the two women with Bob and Alex. She smiled.

"About time some other women showed up. I was starting to get a little frustrated not having someone to talk to about you guys."

It wasn't long before Maria and her daughter, Michelle, Mike to her friends, were sitting down both eating, and chatting with Kathy, as if the were old friends. Their shotgun and pistol having been set aside. Bob didn't know if it was her years as a dentist, or just natural charm, but she had that affect on people. She could put anyone at ease in record time. Soon the subject Bob had been dreading came up.

"When we left here a month ago, one of our friends decided to remain behind, to kind of keep an eye on things. You haven't seen anything of him have you? His name is Todd."

Lacking the words, Bob pulled the will from his pocket and gave it to Maria. After reading it, Maria sighed, and said.

"I would have never believed something like this would happen to him. He was one tough old bird. It's a shame."

Michelle, took the paper and read it. She too sighed and handed it back to Bob, while saying nothing.

Tim cleared his throat to break the silence, and asked,

"Bob why did you want these things." and held up the package of traps.

"Ah yes, I was about to do something about that when our friends showed up. Wait here."

He left the room, but returned shortly, carrying distress flares, used by boaters, a small spool of wire, pliers, and a knife. Taking one of the traps, he carefully cut a hole in it, just the right size to hold one of the flare shells. Then he took some of the wire and wound it around the bar the would slap down trapping a mouse. He pulled back the bar, slide the flare under it, and gently lowered it again.

"What is that?" asked Kathy.

"Our early warning system. Or at least part of it. What we do, is attach this trap to a tree, or rock, with the flare pointing up. Set the trap, and run a trip wire across the road, or trail. Something hits the wire, sets off the trap. The piece of wire I wrapped around the bar, will act like a firing pin, and that sets off the flare, letting us know that someone is coming, and from which direction. As we all know, there aren't enough of us to defend this town, but if we can find out what they look like before they get close to us, the better chance we have to decide if we should stand, or bug out."

"What happens if we make the holes in these traps too big?"

"A little of that white paste kids use in school should hold them in place. Lets go ahead and set this one on the main road into town. Not on this close ridge, but the next one out. We'll need as much time as possible."

Bob picked up the trap, and headed for the door, with Tim following close behind. Once they were outside Bob waved Alex over to him. Speaking quietly he told him;

"Son, I want you and Tom to take the 4X4 and check the dirt road that leads up into the hills around here. If we have to leave, I want to use the road that offers the most cover. Drive out for one hour, then come back. Get an idea of what's up that way. When you get back, rest a while, then do the same with the dirt road that leaves the other side of town. Understand?"

Alex nodded, and left to find Tom.

"Why not just ask Maria?" Tim asked.

"She has just joined us. She doesn't entirely trust us yet. And I don't entirely trust her either. As you know, trust is earned, never given. What if there is something out there that she doesn't want us to see? She could send us in the completely wrong direction. Best we check it for ourselves. Besides, with the way Alex was looking at Michelle, I thought it a good idea to separate them for a while."

[day late]

Between setting up their alarm system, and waiting on Alex and Tom to return from their scouting, it was the next morning before Maria was able to speak with Bob again. It happened while they were enjoying their morning coffee.

"Bob. I want to apologise for pointing a gun at you yesterday. I didn't know who you were, or what you might do to Mike and myself. I had to protect us. You do understand, don't you?"

"Certainly. I would have done the same thing myself, in that position. But I would like to ask you not to do it again."

Maria smiled. "No, I won't. I know you better now."

"How so? We haven't said much to each other since... shall we say, since we met."

"Kathy and I had a long talk yesterday. You were part of it. Is it true that you have had conversations with angels?"

"Well, mostly I listen. But yeah, the Arch Angel Michael does show up sometimes to tell me things."

"Has he said anything about what to do about the invasion?"

"INVASION? What are you talking about." Kathy demanded.

Bob looked at her. "I'm sorry Kathy. I've said so much to so many people, I've lost count of what I've said to whom. But think about it this way. Do you think that anyone would bomb us, and NOT follow up with an invasion?"

"I suppose you're right, but why would they invade? I mean there's nothing left."

"That's not quiet true. Yes things were getting short, but there are still a lot of cattle out there in the fields somewhere. That's also true about all farm animals. Same goes for crops of every kind. Things were in short supply, but there were still available. That is also true of natural resources. We still have oil in the ground, minerals, and other things. They want what we have, it is just that simple."

"Well, at least they'll have a hard time getting into the country."

"What makes you think that?"

"The west and Gulf coasts are all torn up. They won't be able to come ashore there."

Bob shook his head. "Kathy think about what you are saying. These soldiers are trained to land in areas that have undergone a bombardment by naval and air forces, for an extended period of time. I think they won't have much of a problem at all. There won't be an army there to fight them off. No resistance that amounts to anything at all. They have most likely landed and established a sizable beach head already."

Kathy paled at the thought. "What do we do?"

"We wait until The Lord tells us what to do. In the mean time, we do what we can to prepare for that day."

"Bob, we can't fight off an army."

"We don't have to. They won't send an army this far out. Maybe a small unit or two, but nothing too large. Besides, like I said before, I was told that there are others like Maria and Michelle, coming this way. Lets' just wait and see what The Lord brings our way."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Claire was both pleased, and displeased by the current state of affairs. On the one hand, the invasion by the Russians, Chinese, and Cubans was going well. The Russians were having the hardest time. An early and heavy snowfall was slowing them up, but they were making progress. His region in the southeast had offered almost no resistance. Of course, there weren't many left to resist. But now, the director of the north central region wanted help in getting his area under control.

What had displeased him was when one of the camps full of Christians had been hit by an off course missile. It wasn't nuclear, but it WAS large. At least half of them had been killed outright. Another twenty-five percent had been badly injured. That meant he would have to wait for them to heal, before he could do anything else with them. Worst of all, after the head count was taken, ten percent of them had escaped. He knew that this would mean they would spread warnings about what really happened in the camps, so their recapture was now high on his list of things to do. And without the gangs to do the foot work, that meant getting the invading forces to do the job, and they were still a long way from even being close enough to help. What military forces were left in the former United States, weren't going to do anything. They were to busy trying to do something about the invasion. Same for the local law enforcement. What to do?

He knew the televangelist wouldn't be of any help, even if he had survived the missile attack. Nobody was going to believe him any more. Then an idea came to him.

Calling in his secretary, he dictated an order.

By Order of Regional Director Claire;

Due to the current situation, the Director hereby orders all able bodied persons to report to the nearest military, or law enforcement personnel, for service in defense of this region. Any persons not reporting for duty, will be considered to be aiding the enemy, and will be shot.

He smiled as he thought of it. Either the Christians reported for duty, in which case they would be recaptured, or they would be shot on sight for not helping in the regional defense. Either way, the problem was solved. He sent it out for immediate publication and posting throughout the region.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Claire listened to his new televangelist. He actually liked how the man spoke, and advised his counterpart in the northern mid-west to put him on the air, in order to bring his region under control. Claire had to admit it. This new televangelist was much better than the last one. While the last guy had whined and pleaded, this fellow breathed fire and brimstone. He found the change very welcome. He started slowly, but where the last man had begged, this one commanded.

"My beloved people. I call you tonight to prayer and fasting. In the past few days, we have suffered the loss of many of our brothers and sisters. As we all know, enemy forces have invaded and begun killing our people without regard to age, or sex. They have been killing men, women, children, even our older generation. Many of you have heard another dear brother on this broadcast. Even he wasn't safe from these invaders. Pray for them, weep for them, fast for their souls.

Now we face the greatest challenge we have ever faced. We know that we have been blessed in this country. And now someone seeks to steal our inheritance. We have a duty to our church and our faith to protect them. For it is written;

1Ti 5:8 But if any provide not for his own, and specially for those of his own house, he hath denied the faith, and is worse than an infidel.

Does that not include defending ourselves, against foreign invaders?

Now our friend, and benefactor Director Claire has volunteered to help us with this righteous and justified act. He will aid in the direction of our people in the fight. For he HAS military experience. Without a government, we NEED someone to direct our fighting men and women. He has called for ALL true believers to bare this burden. I know many of you are frightened by this task. Fear not. For if The Lord be for us, who can stand against us?

I know there are those who would tell you that we should hide from these troubles. Let me remind you of something.

Rev 21:8 But the COWARDLY, UNBELIEVING, abominable, murderers, sexually immoral, sorcerers, idolaters, and all liars shall have their part in the lake which burns with fire and brimstone, which is the second death.

WILL YOU BE COWARDS? Will you lose your ETERNAL REWARD by being cowards? I SAY NO! We are not cowards, and we will stand in the breach, as the men of old did. Those who tell you to hide are the cowards. They want you to JOIN them in the lake of fire.

What do you do, if you know one of these things? Know this my children, if they don't stand with us, they STAND AGAINST US. They ARE NOT true believers, and they are anathema. SHUN them, CAST THEM OUT from among you. Turn them in to the authorities. You can't have creatures like that at home with your wives and daughters, while you do your duty, can you? You WILL BE doing the work of OUR GOD by doing so."

Bob snapped off the radio.

"I don't know about the rest of you, but I just can't take any more of this idiot. Talk about a carrot and a stick, well they've brought out a club."

"I have my own reasons for not liking what this man had to say Bob, but I'd like to hear yours. What do you mean by carrot and stick?" Maria said.

"Did you ever get a chance to hear this preacher they used to have on?"

"No. We were still out in the mountains."

"Well, it's like this. The preacher they had on before the invasion, he was the carrot. He pleaded with people to come back to the cities, or death factories as I think of them. He offered every thing you could want these days. Food, water, a warm bed on cold nights, whatever you needed or wanted that you could reasonably hope to get these days, he was holding it out to you as bait, to get you back to where they could get their hands on you. I'm sure a lot of people fell for it as well. But that wasn't enough to get all of us.

Now they trot out this guy. He's the club. Did you notice how he said that if you don't sign right up to fight, you are not only a coward, but an unbeliever as well? It seems our 'brother' out there has forgotten the very words of Jesus Christ, Himself.

Mar 13:14 But when ye shall see the abomination of desolation, spoken of by Daniel the prophet, standing where it ought not, (let him that readeth understand,) then let them that be in Judaea flee to the mountains.

Now I admit, this fellow isn't the anti-christ, but I don't think there is any doubt we are in the end times, so the words of Jesus still apply. And where is it that Michael has lead us to? The mountains! And not only that, remember what he said to the twelve.

Mat 24:9 Then shall they deliver you up to be afflicted, and shall kill you: and ye shall be hated of all nations for my name's sake.

Isn't that what this guy is saying? Turn us in, because they wouldn't want those who KNOW what is going on to be left guarding their families.

You have to admit one thing though. It is a clever trap. Sign up, and they've got you, as soon as they check your name on the list. Don't sign up, and you'll be probably shot on sight. If you aren't shot as soon as you come in, you get sent to the front. We die no matter which way we turn." He sighed in disgust. "Pardon me, but I need some air." With that Bob stepped out into the night.

He sat on the edge of the front porch, looking at the clear night sky, wondering how many Christians would be taken in this latest trick. There would be quite a few that would do as this new preacher told them to do, he knew. Then there would be those that would have had enough by now. They would walk in, and surrender themselves, hoping to go to fight, instead of straight to the camps. That way, they hoped, their families would be taken care of by whoever stayed behind.

Being so deeply wrapped up in his own thoughts, he didn't hear Maria as she walked up behind him.

"That was quite a speech. Mind if I join you?" She said.

"Please, take a seat. Sorry if I offend you. I just get so tired of so called men of God, that just don't understand that He said what He meant, and meant what He said."

"Not at all. I agree with everything you said in there, and now, out here. It makes me happy for two reasons."

"Oh? And what might they be?"

"You know what they say, 'the fruit never falls very far from the tree', you're a good man Bob, and have you noticed how Alex and Mike are looking at each other?"

Bob chuckled to himself. "In the case of Alex, it's been kind of hard to miss. He's always been there to shoulder his part of the load, but if it is going to take him anywhere near Michelle, he can't wait to get started. And he's always the last to leave, as long as she is still nearby."

Now it was Maria's' turn to laugh. "It's been the same with her. If he is around, she wants the job that puts her close to him."

"Maria, I would like to ask you a favor. You see, I'm not attracted to male beauty, but I'm not ignorant of it either. Alex is a handsome young man, and when he chooses to, he can really turn on the charm. I think Michelle needs to know that."

"I have to ask a favor in return. Mike has always had a strong sense of self worth. And in the past couple of years, she has been able to really make that opinion stick with the young men that used to be around here."

"Oh? What happened two years ago?"

"She earned her second degree black belt in karate."

"I see. Not to worry, I'll make sure Alex knows about it. Funny how it works, isn't it. I mean here we are looking the tribulation in the face, and we're worried about our kids."

Maria grinned, but said nothing. They both fell silent for a short time before Bob spoke again.

"I hope you'll forgive me, but where is Michelle's' father?"

Maria's' looked as if she wanted to cry.

"John was a trucker. He was taking a load of relief supplies to California. They told me an aftershock took out the bridge he was driving over. It was five hundred feet to the bottom."

"I'm sorry."

"That's all right. I don't suppose I'll ever quit missing him, but at least I don't cry half the night about it any more. What about your wife?"

"Heart attack, about six months ago. I don't remember everything they told me, but I do remember they said she never knew what hit her. One minute she's working out on the treadmill at the gym, the next she was just gone. Nothing could be done."

"I'm sorry for you. I know it's hard."

"Like you, not as hard as it used to be. But I do still miss her."

Maria rubbed her arms and said, "It's getting chilly. I think I'll head back in."

She stood, and walked to the door before Bob remembered something.

"Maria? You said there were two reasons. What was the other one?"

She smiled at Bob and said,

"You'll figure it out. Good night."

[day late]

Claire couldn't believe his good fortune. He had really wanted to serve the master in Damascus. Especially when the United States was out of the
picture, and no longer a problem. He was certain that he could stop the prophecy of 'that book' from happening. And if he could keep Damascus from being blown up, then the master would have been very pleased with him. Who knew what the reward might have been. He was so disappointed when he was told he would be working on bringing down the U.S.

But now, he was happy he hadn't gotten the post. Nobody had really expected the Israelis' to strike first. But they had. They had seen that with the U.S. down and out, they were alone, and had acted before their Arab neighbors could. Damascus, Babylon, Palestina, the land of Moab, and more, all gone. He was glad he didn't have to answer for this problem. The thought of what could have happened made him even more determined to make certain it wouldn't happen to him.

He then turned his attention to the war maps on his desk. Every director had them, and they were updated on a regular basis. They showed the progress of the invading forces in their quest to completely eliminate the rest of the United States from the map, once and for all.

The Russian troops that had landed on the eastern seaboard had made good progress, until they came up against the Appalachian Mountains. Once there, it was a different story. While roads remained passable, even for the heaviest of tanks, the locals held the high ground. It was proving almost impossible to dislodge them. Even when they could take a hill top, it seemed like there was always another one nearby that was either higher, or at the same height, which provided the Americans with good to excellent firing positions. Clearly someone with military experience was showing them how to mount a defense using the mountains, he thought.

What Claire didn't understand or realize, was these people had a history of using the mountains for everything from running moonshine, to re-enacting Civil War battles. They weren't going to give up, and by calling on every able bodied person to defend their lands, he had actually re-enforced, and re-armed the very people he was trying to eliminate.

The Russian forces that came down from Canada had easy going at first, but when a savage northeasterly front had caught them by surprise, the Russians got bogged down in the snow and ice, which made them sitting ducks for the Americans that rose up to fight them there. Well, as far as that went, it was the problem of another regional director, not him.

In the southern gulf region, things weren't much better. The Cuban landings had come off without to much trouble. After that, things had started going
down hill. The problem there was all the swamp land, and thick brush. Vehicles and troops moved easily on the roads, but once they left them for the swamps, and thick southern forests, the result was much the same as the mountain campaign. Still for the time being, he wasn't in trouble with the master, problems like this had been foreseen, and he was expected to overcome them.

He had considered using chemical weapons in the mountains, but on the first couple of times they were used, the winds carried the gas down the slopes and onto the Russian troops waiting to go up into the hills. Nobody was happy with the results of those days.

He had an idea, it was extreme, but it seemed necessary. He needed to talk to his counterparts in the north, and west. They had to be ready for what he
had in mind.

------------------------------------------------------

Alex was the first one to realize what his father had been doing. Ever since they had left their home town, Bob had been making a game of teaching survival skills to everyone. Starting with the children. Bob had a bow and arrow set that was suited for younger people. He taught them the art of archery, as a game. They never knew that this skill could someday become necessary to their survival. Later, he showed them a set of cards he had, that showed wild editable plants.Soon it became a game of who could find the most plants in the shortest period of time.

After the younger children were well on their way to gaining these necessary skills, he and Alex started in on teaching the adults archery. It wasn't long before everyone was trying to get a smaller grouping of arrows than anyone else, at longer and longer distances. One day Kathy had asked him,

"Bob, don't get me wrong, this bow and arrow stuff is fun, but what use is it? I mean, we have rifles, and shotguns, with plenty of ammunition, so why the Indian routine?"

"Firearms can break. Sooner or later, we will fire the last round of ammo, what do you do then? Go hungry? Not me. Also, while arrows can bend or break, we can always make more of them. There is also the matter of
while a bow isn't as silent as the movies used to make them seem, they are very quiet. Suppose someone who is looking for us is on the other side of the ridge. You don't know he is there, and he is just as ignorant of you. However what you do know is that tonight's supper, just came out of the brush twenty yards in front of you. You could possibly down that deer, or whatever, and he would never know you were here." He paused before continuing.

"One other thing. Lets' say that the enemy has set up a storage depot on the other side of this ridge. We have found out about it, and have finally gathered enough people to attack it and win. You see that cactus just below the ridge?" Bob drew the bow, sighted and released an arrow all in one smooth
motion. Suddenly the arrow was quivering in the center of the cactus. "That was a sentry they posted on this side of the ridge. He didn't see us, before we saw him. Now he won't call out a warning. It's true, he might scream, or make some other noise, but a gunshot lets everybody know what is going on, before our people can get into position to attack the depot. Understand now?"

Kathy nodded.

"Then let me add something else. It takes a long time, and a lot of practice to become skilled at living in the out of doors. Some people never do get the hang of it. I'm sure you remember how it was before all this. Every winter, spring, summer, and/or fall, you'd hear on the news about someone getting hurt or killed out in the wilderness somewhere. And they weren't always
new comers to what they were doing. But they would make a mistake somewhere along the way, and pay the price for that mistake. What I'm trying to do is give everyone the best chance I can to survive should
something happen."

"So how did you learn all of these things?"

"I never said I'd lead a sheltered life, Kathy. When I was young, my father would take the family camping. Later I learned he did that because it was a cheap vacation. He wasn't a miser or anything, we just didn't have a lot of money. Myself and my brothers, he took hunting every year, after we were old enough. Some of this I learned in the service. I've picked up some here, and some there, all through my life. Given our current situation, I now know why The Lord lead me down that bumpy road, and I'm grateful for it. It
wasn't always easy, and sometimes could be quite painful, but the lessons stuck with me."

Once everyone had learned to at least scare the target with the bow, Bob set out with his next self-appointed task. He began to teach everyone how to make different types of snares. That included a basket looking thing,
which he would place in a fast moving river, or creek, to catch fish. He taught them how to make a fire, and how to find the kindling, even in wet or snowy conditions. He taught them how to sharpen a knife, and the importance of keeping it that way.

"Lets' suppose I'm hunting in the winter. The ice on the river looks solid, but I find out the hard way it isn't. By the time I get out of the water, my rifle is
at the bottom. What do I do? First, I make a fire, and get out of my wet clothes. Now I have my knife. With that, if I can find the right materials, I can make a bow and arrows. If I can't, my knife tied to a pole with a boot lace, makes a spear. It isn't going to be the best spear, but it is better than nothing. The point is that it doesn't matter how bad things get, if you keep your wits about you, and carry just a few basic items, you improve you chances of living through whatever happens."

"What if you lose the knife in the river at the same time you lose you gun?" Sam wanted to know.

"That's why I always carry two of them. One on my belt, and the other in my pocket."

The lessons became more detailed as they learned. But without fail, Bob always made sure that on Saturday night, everyone was back in their new, if borrowed, homes. He had also worked out a schedule for somebody
to be on the tallest roof in town, at all times, to watch for flares. It was one such night, when he was awakened by Tom.

"Something strange is going on." Was all he said.

Quietly, Bob got up and went outside with him.

"What is it?"

"Really strange. There was a flash of light, way off to the east about three minutes ago. It was sort of like the time they blew up Las Vegas, but this one was up in the air. When I started to come get you, there was another flash just like it, off to the west."

"Thank you Tom. Tell you what. I'll take the rest of your shift, and you go get some sleep."

"What do you think it was?"

"I'm not sure right now. I have to wait for daylight to find out. You go get some rest."

"Yes sir."

As he left Bob on the roof, Bob sat in the chair placed up there for whoever was on guard. He was pretty sure of what had happened. But there wasn't
anything he could do about it now. If the Russians and the Chinese HAD set off bombs in the atmosphere to generate an Electro Magnetic Pulse, there still wasn't a need to wake everyone just yet. The news could wait
for morning.

[day late]

Everyone had gathered for breakfast, and after the blessing was said, began to eat. That is when Kathy approached Bob, with a problem.

"Bob. I think there is something wrong with the radio. I couldn't get it to come on this morning."

"I'm not surprised. As long as everyone is here, I guess we'd better talk about what has happened. Tom. Why don't you start."

Tom quickly explained to the assembled group what he had seen in the night. After he spoke, before anyone could ask any questions, Bob spoke again.

"Now. I want everyone who is wearing a watch to check the time."

All of them, except Tim and Alex, did so.

"What's going on Bob? They blow up bombs in the atmosphere, and now our watches don't work? Sounds a little weird to me."

"Do you remember me talking about an E.M.P.? Well that is how it is done. A specially designed bomb goes off in the upper atmosphere, and sends out the pulse. After that, any unshielded electronic device is dead. What is left of America has just been sent backwards in time to the 1800s' at best."

"THAT can't be good. But why would someone do that?"

"My guess is that the Russians, Chinese, and anyone else involved in the invasion have found out that while Americans love their pleasures, we aren't going to just roll over and die because we have to do without them. It tells me there is some kind of fight going on for the remainder of the nation. And they aren't doing as well as they had hoped. So, knock out any remaining electronics, and you give the invaders the advantage. Their stuff is hardened against such measures. Civilian stuff isn't."

"O.K., That makes sense." Kathy said, "But what will it mean for us?"

"It makes sure that almost everyone that might come here will be on foot, horseback, or be driving an older vehicle, the kind without all the electronics in them." Bob frowned, "It also means we have to start checking for radiation."

"How do we do that?" asked Sam.

Bob reached into his pocket and pulled out a radiation detector. "With this. Hold on Kathy, I can see the questions forming in your mind. Remember I said unshielded electronics. That shed where I parked the truck and 4X4 is metal. It is also on a concrete slab, and grounded, like a lightening rod. It should have protected everything inside. This was one of those things. Lets' see if it worked."

With that, Bob switched on the detector, and was rewarded with a small red light flashed on, to let him know it was working. He set it to audio, so that they could all hear the occasional beep that indicated radiation had been detected.

"What do the beeps mean?" Tom asked.

Bob explained how the detector worked. At first he saw concern washing over Kathy's' face, and so he told her.

"There is always some small degree of radiation in the air. Mostly it comes from the sun. And that's fine. We can tolerate that. At this setting, anything between zero and twenty-five 'beeps' per minute is safe. More than that, and we are in trouble."

Bob looked around for Alex, only to find that sometime during the demonstration, he had left. He had taught Alex about the detector years before, but it still irked him that he had left just then. He turned back to Kathy.

"Dear lady, you are our medical expert. Should this thing get to high of a rad count, it will be up to you to take care of it."

"How do I do that? We don't have a bomb shelter, or time and materials to build one."

"With this." Alex called as he re-entered the room. In his hand was a box. He looked at his father. "Sorry about leaving in the middle of that Dad. But I could see where it was going, so I went and found this in the truck."

"Found what?" asked Tim.

"Let me guess." Said Maria. "Potassium Iodine."

"Right on the first try." Bob answered.

"Isn't that for protection against radiation?"

"Sort of, Kathy. What it does is fill the thyroid with 'good' iodine. One of the effects of a nuclear blast, is that it puts radioactive iodine in the air. If it is breathed in, it lodges in the thyroid, and causes all kinds of problems. The bad news is that after age forty, in most cases, the thyroid shuts down. So if you are over forty, it isn't going to do you much good. But for the younger members of our group, it is very important."

Bob turned once again to Kathy. "These have to be administered according to a combination of age and weight. That is your job, should it become necessary. I taped the information about that on some of the bottles."

Kathy reached out and took the box from Alex with a quiet "Thank you." to both Bob and Alex.

"Maria, how did you guess?"

"John and Todd. They were both vets. and had a lot in common. They were concerned about the possible need for it. I heard them talking about it."

"Shouldn't we figure out who gets how much of this?"

"Now Kathy. You know a gentleman never asks a lady her age. That's up to you."




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Everyone in Director Claires' office was doing their best to either become invisible, or be somewhere else. Anywhere else was better than being near him. It had been a little over a week since the Director had gotten the Russians and Chinese to set off the nuclear bombs to cause the E.M.P. He had expected that once those who were resisting them were without power, the resistance would collapse like a house of cards. He was wrong.

Those who he was trying to break so that the final destruction of America could take place, had been toughened by having to do without anything they had been used to before it all started. They had been nearly starved, frozen, attacked by roving gangs, and dominated by troops that didn't even speak their language. And they had had enough. The chance came for them to take a stand. The even had a preacher on the radio tell them to stand and fight. When that happened, unregistered firearms that had been long hidden were brought out, cleaned, oiled, and loaded. They were still divided on the issue of who were real Christians, and who wasn't, but for the moment, it didn't matter. They had business to take care of, and they were doing it with a vengeance.

Claire couldn't for the life of him figure out how they were doing it. Even after the pulse, the damned Americans STILL fought on. Satellite photos were no help either. He had thought that they would show the Russian forces where the Americans were gathering, so they could accurately direct artillery fire, and air strikes. They showed nothing of the kind. The defenders had learned that things like 'space blankets' would defeat most high tech surveillance devices. All that was needed was to camouflage the blankets after they were in place. They had learned how to hide the heat signatures from even their own bodies. And Claire was furious.

So far today, he had killed three men that had brought him more bad news. Things were starting to get REALLY bad, and many wondered how they could explain how they had been either tricked, or forced to work for the director, once they figured a way to quietly disappear.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------

It had been two weeks since Claire had gotten the Russians and Chinese to detonate the E.M.P. bombs. Yet STILL there had been only a slight improvement in the situation for the invading forces. The Russians were continuing to fail in breaching the Appalachian Mountains. The only progress that had been made in the south, was along the Mississippi River. The combined force of Cuban and Mexican men had been able to make it nearly one hundred miles up river. The bad news was they hadn't been able to exploit the extended beach head more than five to eight miles inland.

It was that limited progress that had saved him, when the same messenger that had visited the late president came to see him.

"The master is not pleased with your lack of progress. You were expected to have made much further gains by this time. You must improve on this situation. The failure of your counterpart in the north central region has already led to his being replaced. The movement you've been able to make along the river is all that has kept him from replacing you. And you know what that means."

An involuntary shiver went up Claire's' spine. He knew. The thought of the consequences of failing the master was terrifying even to him.

"Progress is being made, and once we have joined with the Russian forces coming down from the north, we'll have the country cut in two. After that, nothing can stop us. We'll have a back door into the eastern mountains, and crush the remainder of them between our forces and the ones coming in from the west. I just need a little more time to join with the northern armies."

"The northern armies?" The messenger scoffed, "Haven't you been listening? They haven't made ANY real progress, that is why Dupree was replaced. You better have another plan for securing your sector. Help from the north will be long in coming. And if this replacement doesn't do any better, YOU may be required to help him. Have you thought about that?"

"I didn't think it would be necessary."

"It might be, so think about it. Speaking of thinking, the master isn't convinced you've been doing a lot of that lately. WHAT made you believe you would serve our purpose by having that preacher call the followers of the Nazarene to battle? DON'T bother answering. There is no excuse you could give that would be believed. You should have had him appeal to the pacifist side of those people. The master wants you to deal with him. Permanently."

"Perhaps you would like that honor. He was coming to see me just before you arrived. He is in the outer office right now."

What passed across the messengers face could only be considered a smile by the number of pointed teeth he showed.

"Yes, I would."

Claire signaled his secretary to allow the preacher to enter.

"Director Claire, I..." His voice failed as he saw the messenger. "What in the name of God..." that was as far as he got before being backhanded across the room, to land at Claire's' feet.

"In the name of God I bind you." he shouted.

Claire pulled the man to his feet, and then right off the floor.

"FOOL. What makes you think you can bind us? YOU HAVE SERVED US. Do you think the one you call on will help you now, when you couldn't even use the name of the Nazarene? You belong to OUR master." He easily tossed the man back across the room. The messenger caught him before he hit the floor.

Nobody knew for certain what happened to the preacher. They simply knew he had entered Claires' office. There was some shouting, and when the director called for the clean up crew, he wasn't there anymore, although it looked like most of his blood was.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bob was in the metal shed, making a glass of colloidal silver with a small 'silver generator' that he had, when Maria came in.

"What ARE you doing?"

"Making colloidal silver."

"Ka-who?"

"Think of it as alternative medicine." He saw the questioning look on her face, and continued. "I first heard of this back when Alex was about six. They say that most virus' and bacteria can't survive in the same environment with pure silver. I mean .999 fine silver. I thought I'd give it a try. I've been taking it ever since."

"Does it work?"

"Well, you tell me. Alex is twenty-one now, and every year, up until the time he left home for college, Nancy would drag him down to the clinic for the two of them to get their flu shots. About one year in three, one or both of them would get sick. I never got the shots, and I never got sick."

"Interesting." was all Maria said. After a couple of minutes she spoke again. "Do you mind if I ask you a personal question?"

"You can ask, that doesn't mean I'll answer."

"Fair enough. Have you ever thought about finding someone else?"

Bob was quiet for a while, and Maria was starting to regret the question when he answered.

"That's kind of complicated. You see, Nancy and I were married for twenty-five years. We were very much in love from day one. Totally dedicated to each other, and our family. We were also the most mismatched couple you'd ever be likely to meet. She was a Democrat, I was a Republican. I enjoyed hunting, fishing, camping, all that kind of thing. She liked going to Macy's Department store, and cocktail parties. Then, of course, there was the matter of faith. I'm a Bible believing Christian. She, on the other hand was basically an agnostic. She believed that being good was good enough.

Anyway, after she died, I mourned her for months. Until one day I decided that she wouldn't want me to spend the rest of my life alone. That is when I made a startling discovery. After all that time, I was so far out of touch with the dating scene, I don't even know what the rules are anymore. And to be totally truthful, I've never been able to figure out what a woman's motives or intentions are. So, as I was sitting at home thinking about all of this, the bottom started to fall out. Since then, there hasn't been time to even think about it."

"I see. Can I show you something?"

"Sure. What is it?"

"This." Maria pulled a locket from out of her shirt, where it hung by a chain from around her neck.

"I can't see it very well from here. What is it?"

"Come closer, take a look."

Bob moved to where Maria was sitting, and bent down to look at the locket. Maria dropped it, reached up with both hands, grabbed him by the neck, and firmly kissed him.

After a few moments she let him go, looked him in the eye and said,

"Does THAT leave any doubts about my motives and intentions?"

"Uh, no. I'd say that was pretty clear."

"So, what do you think?"

"I think,"

The door to the shed banged open, followed by a very loud call of "DAD!!"

"I'm going to beat my son senseless." He continued. " What is it, Alex?"

"The flare on the main road into town just went off. Tim is on the roof. He says he can see about four or five people moving out there."

"I'm on my way." Bob reached over and picked up his rifle, and saw Maria pick up her shotgun.

"Where do you think you're going?"

"With you. And don't give me any of that macho stuff about it being 'man's work'. I can shoot as well as you do, and besides they might be locals returning home. If they are, I'd know them, you wouldn't."

Unable to argue with the logic, he said,

"Alright. Just be careful out there."

"Yes Sir."

Alex fell in beside his father on the way to the near ridge. After they had gotten ahead of the rest, he asked his father,

"Can I ask you what was going on in there?"

"NO, you can't."

"Oookay. Forget I asked."

As Bob moved futher out front towards the ridgeline, Alex grinned at his back.

Soon, Bob, Maria, Alex, and Tim were on their stomachs peeking over the ridge into the valley on the otherside. Looking through his binoculars, Bob saw two men, a woman, and what seemed to be a teenage boy, but with the jackets they were wearing, it was hard to tell. Bob passed the binoculars he was using to Maria.

"Recognise anyone?"

Maria peered through them, for a few minutes.

"I'm not sure. I think I've seen at least one of them before, but I can't be sure." Turning to Bob, she asked, "How do you want to handle it?"

He thought about it for a moment, then he turned to her. "Feel like a walk?"

"Wait a minute, Dad. Why you? Why don't I go?"

"Because after me, you're the best with this." He gave Alex his rifle. "And these people are going to be wondering what the flare was all about. An older couple is going to be less threatening than a young man."

"What do you mean older?" Maria asked as she elbowed him in the ribs.

"O.K. Middle-aged then. Point is, we're less of a threat. They will be less likely to panic and start shooting."

"Did you see any guns?" Tim wanted to know.

"No, but that doesn't mean they don't have any. Maria, leave the shotgun, and take just the pistol. I'll do the same. We're going to just walk straight down to them. If they make any sudden moves, take cover. Alex, Tim, if we duck, you two do what you have to. Scare them away, if possible, kill them if you must." He looked at Maria."Ready?"

Maria nodded.

[day late]

"O.K. Lets' do it."

Bob and Maria started down the ridge, headed towards the new comers. Tim and Alex watched them go. Shortly after they had left, Tim spoke up.

"If they are the ones headed down there, why am I so scared?"

"Think you're scared? I'm even more scared."

"What makes you think that?"

"Two things. I've never shot at someone before."

"That makes two of us."

"Yeah, but that is MY Dad going down there, and I'm the one covering him. Tim, I think we need to do something."

"What's that?"

"A couple of years ago, I was thinking of signing up in the military. Dad told me some of the things he went through. One thing he told me was that one of the worst things you could do was to have all of your firepower concentrated in one place. It was too easy for the enemy to hit that place, and wipe out everybody. I think we need to spread out a little."

"Makes sense. You go left, I'll go right. Try not to kick up too much dust and let them know we're here."

"My thoughts, exactly."

Tim and Alex moved carefully until they were about twenty-five yards apart. Meanwhile, as Bob and Maria moved down the hill, they had their own conversation.

"Bob. I think we have three men and a girl out there."

"I agree. One of them is a man with long hair. I thought he was a women. The smaller one does seem to be a girl."

They fell silent as they continued foreword. As they drew closer to the strangers, Maria spoke again.

"Bob, I made a mistake."

"How so?"

"That's not George."

"George?"

"He used to ride with John, as a relief driver. That is not him."

"Good thing to know. Did you notice the men all have side arms?"

"The bulges under their jackets? Yeah, I saw them."

"Well, at least they aren't gunfighters."

"How do you know?"

"Later. What do you think about the girl?"

"She just looks scared."

"Agreed. We don't have to worry about her. I want to stop about fifteen yards short of them. Most people aren't very good with handguns. These guys don't strike me as the kind who have spent much time on the firing range. The extra distance might just make the difference. Besides, they will be slightly above us. I don't want to get in between them and our people."

"I see."

"Can you do fat, dumb, and happy?"

"What?"

"Act that way to lull them off guard."

"Oh. Yeah, I can do that."

"Good, follow my lead."

They both stopped at the agreed distance. Bob noticed that the girl had a bruise on her left cheek. He was getting a bad feeling about the situation. He smiled broadly as they got close to the group, and effected a western drawl in his speech.

"Howdy friends. Glad to see you. I'm Bill, and this is my sister, Mary."

They waited for an uncomfortable period of time before anyone spoke. Finally the long haired man replied.

"Hi. I'm Charlie, this is Jack, and he's Johnnie. Nice to meet you. Are you responsible for the fireworks we saw?"

"That is our 'doorbell'. It lets us know when someone is coming."

"Well, ding dong, we're here. Anyone else around here?"

"Oh, the town was evacuated a while back. We weren't here when it happened. So we've been waiting to see if anyone comes back. I don't recognize you fellas' You from around these parts?"

Bob noticed as they spoke, Jack and Johnnie had slowly moved to either side of Charlie.

"No we got out of the city when they started bombing them. Seemed like the smart thing to do. You know Bill, that's a mighty good looking sister you have there. You ever miss having a man around, Mary?"

"I'm fine. And in case you didn't notice, Bill is a man."

"Sure he is. But I'm not talking about brotherly love here."

"I'm sure you weren't."

"Wouldn't you like to have a man of your own? Say someone like me?"

"Not really. I like men who know what soap is for."

Bob spoke again. "Maybe you fellas should just move on. No point in everyone getting upset here."

Charlie laughed, followed by Jack and Johnnie. Bob noticed they seemed to take their cue from whatever Charlie said or did.

"Oh we ain't upset. But it seems a shame for a lady like Mary ain't got a man of her own. Maybe we ought to stay awhile."

"Maybe you shouldn't."

"Think the two of you can stop us? I don't" Charlie reached for the pistol on his hip.

"DOWN!!" Bob hollered, and at the same time pushed Maria down behind a large rock, sticking out of the ground. He felt a blow to his back that spun him around onto his back, before he heard the shot. He continued to roll, as he hit the ground, until he rolled into a small depression in the earth. He was on his back, and looked at the three men. Jack and Johnnie were still trying to draw their weapons from under their jackets, as Charlie aimed at Bob for another shot. Suddenly he was lifted off his feet, and thrown backwards, and the resounding BOOM of Bobs' rifle reached them as he hit the ground.

The other two men, weapons now drawn, looked in the direction of the shot. Bob pulled his pistol and fired once at Jack. The bullet hit him dead center, and knocked him backwards. Johnnie didn't know what to do. Shots coming from two directions, had confused him. He didn't know which way to turn his attention. That is when the bullet from Tim's' rifle hit him. He joined his comrades on the ground.

"Bob! Are you alright?" Maria called.

"Yeah, I think so." Bob answered. Then when he started to sit up, pain raced through the right side of his back. "No, I'm not."

"Lie still." Maria said.

"It's O.K. Look after the girl."

Maria, did as Bob said. She moved closer to the girl, who had taken shelter behind another large rock. As Maria got closer, the girl shrank back from her. Wondering what the problem was, Maria realized that her pistol was in her hand. She holstered it, and held out both hands, while speaking softly to the girl.

"Hey, sweetie. It's alright. We aren't going to hurt you. Come on out. Let me have a look at you. Are you alright?"

She moved slowly, and continued to speak to the girl gently. As she leaned towards her, the locket she had showed to Bob earlier came out of her shirt, and reveled that a gold cross was on the chain as well. Seeing the cross, the girl reached out, and touched it, looking at Maria, with an unspoken question in her eyes. Maria said,

"That's right. We're Christians."

Soon, she was able to reach out and put her hand on the girls arm. Gently she pulled her to her feet. The girl suddenly clung to Maria as if her life depended on it, and started to sob.

"Bob? Are you O.K.?"

"I think they just winged me. My back sure hurts though. Take her back to town, and send Alex down here on your way. I'll wait here."

"Make sure you do that. Don't you go moving around and making things worse."

"Yes, mother."

Bob really had no plans to do much, his back felt like it was on fire. However, as Maria and the girl moved away he decided it couldn't hurt to check the dead men for whatever he could learn.

Bob had expected that these men had actually told the truth about one thing. They fled the city after the bombings. Their drivers licenses showed they were from Reno, and their clothing was certainly not meant for living in the country. He heard footsteps coming closer. Looking, he saw Tim jogging to him.

"Bob. Are you badly hurt?"

"I'll live."

"Can you get that jacket off? I'll check you."

Tim was surprised at the amount of blood on Bobs' back, and after gently lifting the shirt, found a deep furrow carved in his back, right across the shoulder blade.

"I don't think it went in, you were just grazed."

"Where's Alex?"

"He's uh indisposed at the moment."

"Indisposed?"

"After the shooting ended, he wanted to make sure those three were down. He cranked the magnification on your scope up to the max. He got a real good look at what he did to the first one. I don't think he is going to be eating anything for awhile."

"I see. Well lets' get these bodies out of sight. There is a gully over there, we can put them in there, and bury them later."

"BOB. SIT DOWN!!!"

"What?"

"Bob, you're still bleeding. You might still go into shock. You sit here, I'll take care of it."

"Nonsense. I'm fine. Let me up to help you."

"Bob, you lived across the street from me for ten years. I saw you working in the yard countless times, so I KNOW there isn't a big 'S' anywhere on your chest. Now sit down, or I'm going to knock you down and sit on you until you show some sense."

Surprised at Tim's' forcefulness, he agreed, and let Tim conceal the bodies. Then once that was done, he let Tim help him up, and they headed back to town.

Tim and Bob came across Alex as they made their way back to town. He was pale, and still a bit shakey, but was standing on his feet unaided.

"Dad. Are you hurt bad?"

"I'll live son, thanks for asking."

"I'm sorry I couldn't come to you. I was..."

"Indisposed." Bob finished for him. "I know, Tim told me. Don't worry about it. I'd be more concerned if you weren't upset by this. Come on, lets' go see Kathy."

When there reached the edge of town, Sam came running up to them.

"Dad? Mom says to take Mr. Bob to the doctors office. She's there."

"Thanks Sam. Run ahead and tell her we are on our way."

"Yes Sir." and with that the youngster turned and ran back the way he came. As they entered the office, Kathy called out from the back of the building.

"Bring him in here. Last exam room on the right."

After taking off his jacket earlier, Bob had simply hung it around his shoulders on the way back. Kathy removed it and carelessly tossed it to the side.

"Lie down on the exam table. Face down."

"Let me take off the shirt." Bob said.

"Don't argue with your doctor. Lay down."

Bob did so, and Kathy walked over to him with a pair of scissors. Once cutting the hem on the bottom, she slid them up through the shirt, slicing it cleanly until she reached the collar. With a couple of snips, she was through that as well, and opened it to get a look at the wound. At this point, Kathy realized she had too much company.

"Tim, Alex, go somewhere else."

"Hey! Wait a minute, that's my Dad."

"Alex, do as she says." Bob hissed through the pain. "Tim, that flare needs to be replaced. And I'd appreciate it if you could check the pockets on those three."

"Yeah. I remember. Come on Alex."

The two of them left, and Maria said,

"I guess I'd better go as well."

"No. I need you here. Talk to Bob."

"What do I say?"

"Anything. Just try to keep his mind off of what I'm doing. Bob, I'm giving you a shot to help ease the pain."

Maria move around to where she could see Bobs' face, and asked him,

"How did you know they weren't gunfighters?"

"Their jackets. They had their guns under the jackets. Hard to do a quick draw that way."

"So did we."

"Yes, but our jackets have snaps. Theirs had zippers. I noticed that when we went down there, you undid the bottom two snaps. Why?"

"John always told me that if I needed to get to it in a hurry...Oh. I see."

"Exactly. You and I undid those snaps, so we could reach our weapons in a hurry, they had to either pull up the jacket, or unzip them. That takes longer."

"Speaking of weapons, what is that cannon you're carrying? I almost went deaf when you fired it."

".44 Magnum. Same as my rifle. I know, I know, a lot of people like the .9mm. But I prefer the penetration of a .44. Besides, with rifle and sidearm chambered the same, if either runs dry, I reach in my pocket, and feed whatever comes out to either weapon."

As they had been speaking, Kathy had worked quickly to clean and disinfect the wound. She happy to see that the round hadn't done more damage, but she knew that it would require stitches to close it. When she told Bob what she was going to do, he protested.

"Kathy, I can't do much with stitches in my back. Just put a bandage on it, and I'll be fine."

Kathy looked at Bobs' back for a moment, and then told him,

"Roll onto your left side. I'm going to give you another shot."

"Why? I'm not in pain anymore."

"Maybe not, but if you are going to be stupid about this, I want to give you some antibiotics to fight infection."

Bob did as he was told, and Kathy gave him the shot, with more orders.

"Bob, your wound has stopped bleeding on its' own. I want you to stay here for at least thirty minutes, and give the blood a chance to clot a little more."

"O.K."

Kathy felt a tug on her sleeve. Turning, she saw the girl who had been brought in by Maria. She couldn't have been more than sixteen, probably younger. The girl didn't speak, but crooked her finger and moved away from the others. Turning her back to Bob and Maria, she signed for Kathy to stand in front of her. Once Kathy had, the girl looked shyly down, and opened the front of her blouse slightly for Kathy to see. Kathy inhaled sharply at what she saw. Closing the girls blouse she spoke to Maria.

"I have to take care of something. Will you please make sure he doesn't go anywhere for thirty minutes?"

"Of course."

Kathy led the girl across the hall into another exam room and patted the exam table, telling her,

"Sit here, and take off you shirt please."

She did so as Kathy got gauze bandages, disinfectant, and water for the job ahead. When she turned back again, the girl was nude to the waist. Her chest was covered with what seemed to be cigarette burns. Clearly the child had been through hell.

As gently as possible she began the task of cleaning the burns and treating the injuries. A cold hatred began to burn in her while she did what she could for the girl. She wondered silently what kind of animal could do such a thing. After finishing the front, Kathy walked around behind the girl, only to find more of the burns. So intent was she on treating the girl, she didn't hear Maria until she had opened the door and entered the room. She gasped at the sight.

"What happened to her?"

"Cigarette burns. Some of them have to be a week old. Maria, are you sure those three are dead?"

"Yes. Why?"

"I wanted to get my hands on them. What did you want?"

"Oh, Bob seems to have fallen asleep. Is he going to be alright?"

Kathy smiled. "You heard him. Stick band aides on it and let him go. If I did that, he'd be a lot worse within a week. That wasn't antibiotics. I gave him something to put him out, so I could sew him up. He'll be out for a couple of hours."

Maria smiled. "I wondered why you gave up so easily. What is it about him?"

"Maria, I've known him for a long time. He's always been this way. Everybody else's needs come before his own. Every time." After a moment, Kathy continued. "Maria, Bob is a good man, and I don't know if you've noticed how he looks at you, especially if he thinks nobody is looking. I don't know how you feel on the subject, but you could do far worse than a man like him."

"That's always been the problem, hasn't it?" Kathy looked questioningly at her. "A shortage of men. Oh there's always been plenty of adult males, but far to few men."

"I know what you mean. So does that mean you're interested?"

Maria told her about the meeting between them in the shed earlier. Kathy nodded approvingly.

"I'm glad to hear it. He needs a good woman, and you strike me as just the sort he needs."

"That's funny. He said the same thing. just before he passed out, as we were talking he told me, 'You know, I like you. You're my sort of woman.' I just wonder if he'll remember it when he wakes up."

"If he doesn't, I'LL remind him."

The women smiled at on another as they finished treating their second patient together.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Claire hated to admit that someone might have had a better idea than he did, but this time he was forced to admit it. The western regional director hadn't gone after the Christians as he had. Instead, he had relied on infiltrators to gain access to the scattered groups of believers. Then when they would gather some place for whatever reason, law enforcement officers would swoop in and arrest everyone they could put their hands on. Each arrest, after enough 'questioning', would yield more names of resistors and Christians to be picked up, and their likely hiding places. Then the process would begin again. it had proved to be quite successful. Now Claire would implement it here in the southern region, and bring an end to resistance to the new order once and for all. When that was done, the decreased number of fighters would enable the Russian, Cuban, and Mexican troop to finally finish their task. The death of America.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Tim entered the doctors office, and found Kathy and Maria sitting at a table, sipping coffee, and chatting after having gotten the stitches finally in place in Bobs' back. Now all they had to do was figure out how to keep him from being too active while his wound healed.

"Maria?"

"Yes, Tim?"

"Are you sure you didn't know any of those guys from this morning?"

"Quite sure. Why?"

"We went back up there and checked them for anything that might give us an idea of what they were up to, and if they might have been working for someone else." He paused.

"And what did you find?"

"One of them had a list of names. Some of them were crossed off, others weren't. Your name, and Michelle's' were next on the list."

[day late]

"WHAT? Let me see that." Maria shouted.

Tim handed over the list of names. Maria looked at the first names not crossed off, and turned pale. They were indeed the names of both Michelle and herself. She then scanned the names that were crossed off. An unpleasant feeling started to come over her.

"I recognize some of these names. They were members of a prayer group we used to belong to." She continued to read. "There are a lot of them I don't know. Do you think they are coming after the Christians?"

"They've done just about everything else to get us. I'm just wondering if those guys were alone, or just a group out looking for us." Tim said. "How long is Bob going to be out?"

"I gave him a pretty good shot. It could be hours. What do you think we should do?" Kathy answered.

"I'm not sure."

"The first step in the resolution of any problem is to define the problem." Alex said from the doorway where he was standing. Everyone turned to look at him. "Dad always says that when I have a problem. So, what is the problem?"

"We need to know if anyone is coming after the three we killed, and if so how many. What else did you Dad say?" Said Tim.

"The second step in the resolution of any problem is the acquisition of data. I think he got it from an old science fiction show."

"It's still a good idea. We can't put the flares out any further, we'd never see them go off. So how do we find out if anymore are on the way?"

"What about Dads' go-cart?"

"What?"

"I know, it doesn't go fast, but it goes faster than a man can run. And since it is so small it gets really good gas mileage. Someone else and I could ride out there aways, and take a look."

"It's kind of loud Alex. It also is very open. Just a roll cage. You could get shot."

"I think I have an answer for part of that." Said Maria. "Todd was a prospector, did you know that?"

Tim and Alex shook their heads.

"Did you know he has an underground room at his place?"

Tim and Alex looked at each other, and both said,

"He does?"

"Yes, that was where he used to make his explosives for prospecting. One of the things he has down there was a kind of wall, made out of some sheets of some kind of bullet-proof plastic. He used it as a shield, just in case. Maybe we can get a piece or two from that, and make a shield for the go-cart."

Again, Tim and Alex spoke together, "Show us."

After Maria and her daughter had joined the group, it was decided that since they would be staying in town for awhile, the only decent thing to do was to finally lay Todd to rest. Now, it seemed strange to Maria to return here, knowing Todd wouldn't be showing up with his usual cheery 'Hello' and broad smile. She missed him. It wasn't long before the three of them were entering the hidden lower room in Todd's' house. Maria warned the men.

"Be careful down here. Todd's' explosives were homemade, and I never really trusted them. I don't know if he was working on anything when he died. If so, it could be unstable."

Tim turned on his flash light to illuminate the darkened room. He was happy that Bob had extra batteries in the shed with the truck and 4X4. They still had a charge. On a shelf on the far side of the room were bottles, all clearly labeled, containing various liquids and powders. On the shelf below, were several books, and papers. He picked up one book, to find that it was a U.S. Army manual. The title was 'Improvised Munitions Handbook', it was dog-eared with slips of paper sticking out, here and there, to mark certain passages. Tim had seen explosives used a few times before. The one thing he learned from those experiences was that if you didn't know what you were doing, it was a good way to make yourself dead in a hurry. He put the book down, without looking in it.

"How did Todd learn about this stuff?"

"John said he was in E.O.D. whatever that means."

"Explosive Ordnance Disposal." Alex answered. "Dad said he thought about doing that, once upon a time. Then he got sober and changed his mind."

"Maria, why didn't you tell us about this before?"

"At first I wasn't sure about you guys, Tim. Now, since Bob took a bullet to save me, I don't see how I could do anything else. You know how it is. Trust is something that is kind of hard to give sometimes."

"Earned but never given." Tim murmured under his breathe.

"What was that?"

"Nothing. Just something Bob said to me. Where are those sheets of plastic?"

"Over by the wall. Todd always put them out of the way when he didn't need them."

Tim and Alex took a look at them. A foot wide, by four feet high, and over an inch thick, they seemed to be just the thing. Then they picked up one. It was heavier than it seemed.

"I don't know." Tim said."Something this heavy might weigh down the cart to much. It was a good idea though."

"Well, what about these?" Maria pointed to a box just under the shelves. Tim opened it. Inside were several vests of body armor, and 'coal scuttle' helmet's.

"Much better. If anything happens to the cart, they will still have some protection." Tim thought for a moment, "Maria, is there anything else you might want to tell us?"

"Not off the top of my head, but if I remember anything, be sure I'll tell you."

Tim and Alex lugged the heavy box back to the store, where they went about figuring out how they were worn. They were both amazed at how heavy the box was, but once they took individual vests out, They realized that separately they weren't that heavy. Even so, they were still uncomfortable, and when Alex stepped outside, he learned that they also got hot in a hurry. But, in the end, they decided they were less uncomfortable than getting shot.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director of the Western Region Ives was amused. He knew that Claire would make a mess of things. He tried for the big play, as the people called it, every time. Instead of using the tried and true method of slowly increasing the pressure, until you got the results you wanted. He hadn't learned anything from his mistakes of the past. Claire was the one that had insisted on swooping down on every church he could find, and grab or kill everyone. It never occurred to him to infiltrate the churches, gather information on its' members, and then quietly pick them up, or kill those who resisted. He'd made that same mistake ever since the first century, when they tried to stamp out the followers of the Nazarene, right up through modern times, when he advised the same heavy handed methods to the masters servants in China, and South Africa. Every time he did, many would escape, and start churches elsewhere.

Now here he was trying to adopt Ives' methods, and was really clumsy at it. Since he had already killed most of the stupid and gullible ones, those who he had sent out to infiltrate the remaining Christian resistors were either already known for what they were, or such poor liars, they were easily found out.

Ives on the other hand knew the value of the ones that were easily lead astray. After all, wasn't it he that had convinced that character Judas to talk to the priests in Jerusalem? Then Claire had almost ruined everything by trying for the big play. Sure he got the Nazarene, but his followers had scattered that night. By the time they had all gathered in one place again, thousands had become followers. And now look how far things had progressed. There were more of them than ever.

Yes, Ives was amused at Claire's troubles. Even with two armies at his command, he was still struggling to pacify the southern region. Ives already had the entire west coast under his control, and the Chinese troops were well advanced into the mountains to his east. A fact which had been aided by the lack of firearms in private hands. He smiled as he though of what the master would do to Claire if only one more thing went wrong.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Claire was pacing. His staff knew this was never a good sign. Something was bothering him, and when that happened, his already short temper got shorter. Then people died. Claire stopped o look out the window. His infiltration plan wasn't working. People he sent out all seemed to simply vanish. No trace of them was found. He was growing angrier by the moment.

That is when he felt it. The building started to tremble. Then a real hard jolt hit, almost knocking him off his feet. An earthquake he knew, but this region hadn't had one of this size in a very long time. As he watched, buildings outside his window began to crumble and fall. They weren't built to take this kind of shaking. Even the one he was in began to crack, and debris fall from its' exterior. Then i came to him, it had to be the New Madrid fault. But if that were true, things were going to get much worse for him.

After a long time, the earth stopped moving. Claire picked up the phone. It was dead. He tried the cell phone. Nothing there either. He went into the outer office. Everyone was gone, having fled the building in case of a collapse. he turned to the radio, but there was nothing but static. He had no way to warn the invading forces of what was coming.

The destruction was beyond anything that anyone had ever seen or even heard of before. Millions lay dead in the streets and countryside. When the fault slipped, the resulting earthquake had caused the Great Lakes to start to drain into the Mississippi River. The invading Cuban and Mexican forces had been caught flat footed. Most of them were gone, washed out down the river to the Gulf of Mexico. Claire sat in his office, or what was left of it, cursing and blaming the one he called the Nazarene for what had happened.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------

While Maria agreed the time for secrets was over, the time of caution wasn't. Todd had given her and John keys to his underground room. Now that everyone knew about it, she felt it wise to lock it up again after Tim and Alex had removed the vests and helmets. There was no point in leaving it open and chance one of the children getting into it. As the men took their box to the store, she returned to the doctors office to check on Bob and the girl.

She gently knocked at the door, and was rewarded by Kathy calling out, "Come on in, it's open.".

"How are our patients?"

Kathy's face took on a serious expression. "Bob is still out, and the wound isn't bleeding. If we keep it covered with antibacterial cream, and we can keep him from over doing it for awhile, I think he will be just fine. But I'm concerned about the girl."

"You still don't know her name?"

"She hasn't said a word. I know she can hear. I dropped a pan behind her, on purpose, and she jumped at the noise. I think she is traumatized by whatever those animals did to her."

"Think she'll recover?"

"It's hard to say. For some people, they do return to normal after awhile. Others never fully recover." Kathy smiled, "Enough of that, sit down and keep me company for awhile."

Bob was starting to come out of it. He wasn't sure he wanted to wake up. He was having such a wonderful dream. He was much younger, and sitting next to Nancy. She was stroking his hair, and told him the most wonderful thing he'd ever heard.

"Honey, I'm pregnant."

He couldn't wait to tell his co-workers in the next room. But wait a minute. He was at work when Nancy called him to give him the news. So, who was stroking his hair? Bob opened his eyes to see the girl sitting next to him, as she tried to silently show her concern for him. She glanced down and saw him looking at her. She smiled.

"Hello there. How are you doing?"

She shrugged.

"Still not speaking? What's your name?"

She looked upset now.

"Are you afraid those men might come back? They won't you know."

She still looked upset.

"It's alright sweetheart. Don't worry about it. You'll talk when you're good and ready. Don't let anyone push you into it."

A timid smile returned.

"Do you know where Kathy, the doctor, is at?"

She nodded, and started to get up.

"Wait a minute. I want to talk to her."

Bob swung around, and started to stand. He found out two things. Whatever Kathy had used, wasn't completely done with him yet. He also found that the girl was stronger than she looked. For a moment, she was the only thing that kept him on his feet. He saw the look of concern come back to her face.

"Don't worry honey. It's just whatever the doctor gave me." He smiled at her.

Together they made their way down the hall to the reception room. Kathy and Maria were sitting with their backs to the door, so they didn't see them until Bob spoke.

"Kathy, just what did you give me?"

"BOB! What are you doing up? Let me help you."

"Thanks, but I already have a helper."

Kathy noticed her for the first time. "Well, let her help you sit down before you fall down."

"Sounds reasonable. Want to help me, Darling?" He said to the girl.

Maria had already gotten a chair ready, and with the girls help, he sat down.

"O.K. Kathy, why did you do it? I told you to just put a bandage on me, and I'd be..."

"You'd be back here in a week or less with a major infection, most likely. I could actually see the shoulder blade, Bob. Sometimes you just have to understand you can't do it all."

"I already know that. For one thing, I can't dance."

"What?"

"It's true. I have absolutely no sense of rhythm."

"That's not what I mean, and you know it. You said it yourself. I'M the medical expert here. I expect you to follow my medical orders. If you don't, how am I supposed to do anything for you or anyone else?"

Bob looked thoughtful for a moment, and then told her, "You're right Kathy. O.K. I promise, I'll be good. Just what are the doctors orders?"

"Lots of rest to start with. You can talk about what needs to be done, but for the next few weeks, you let other people do what needs to be done. AND for the next few days, at least, you check in with me so I can see how you are doing."

"Rest and check ups. Yes Ma'am. I'll do just as you say. So how long was I out?"

"About three hours."

"Anything new and interesting happen during that time?"

"I think I'll let Alex and Tim tell you about that. They know what they are up to better than I do. But for now, I want you at least sitting down for the next forty-five minutes. You need time for get over the shot."

"Can I ask for someone to send for Alex?"

"That, you can do."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Ives chuckled as he thought about how Claire must be doing at that very moment. Ives knew that after the southern invasion forces had been virtually wiped out, as the Great Lakes poured down the Mississippi River valley, the hated Christians that Claire had let slip through his fingers rejoiced and praised the Nazarene for their deliverance. The master was very unhappy about that. And he had very unpleasant ways of dealing with those who failed him.

What Claire had failed to do with his heavy handed tactics, Ives had been doing with his subtle lies and deceits. He left the large churches alone for the most part. Most of them were so deceived that they posed no threat, and could be wiped out at a moments notice. It was the small churches and home prayer groups that Ives had concentrated on. They were the ones that knew what was happening. While Claire had reduced the numbers of that religion, in his failure, he had increased their faith. And that could not be tolerated.

Ives was getting a little concerned about the raids. The were making fewer of them all the time, and sometimes when they went in, there wasn't anyone there, even though they had seen people enter the building. But for now, it was going well.


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bob was true to his word, and didn't try to go against Kathy's medical advice. Maria was happy about this, because it gave her a chance to know him better.

"Bob, what happened when we went down into the valley? I thought that with the dreams, and visitations you've been getting, God would have protected you."

"He did better than protect me. He blessed me. Twice."

"Bob, you got shot. How can you call that a blessing?"

"Do you remember the Battle of AI in Exodus?"

"Not really."

"This was just after Moses had died, and Joshua was put in charge. The Children of Israel had just come off of their victory at Jericho, and were feeling pretty sure of themselves. Then they came apon the town of AI. The spies told Joshua that there was no need to send the entire army up to this place, They could be taken care of with just a small force. Joshua said O.K. and off they went. To be blunt, they got their butts kicked. So, they came back asking Joshua what happened. Joshua asked The Lord, and was basically told, "Why didn't you ask Me for help and protection? You sent these men off to do the job, and left Me out entirely. Now, go back and do the job the right way, WITH Me.' They repented of the sin of pride, and did as God told them to do. This time they won."

"That's all very interesting, but what does it have to do with you?"

"I was guilty of the same sin of pride. I admit, just like everyone else, I got pumped up when those guys showed up. But when we went down to meet them. I forgot to pray. I left God out of it, and was counting on us to handle it. That was my mistake. And so, I got blessed twice. First, I'm still breathing. Second, as the scriptures say, those whom God loves, he chastises. Yeah, I got hit, but it is going to serve as a reminder for a very long time, not to do ANYTHING without The Lord."

[day late]

"Hey Dad. How are you doing?" Alex called as he entered the doctors office.

"Hey Son. Looks like I'm on bed rest for a while, but otherwise, I'm fine. So... What's been going on while I've been out?"

"Um, I think I'll wait for Tim to get here."

"Oh? That much?"

"Sort of."

No sooner had Alex said that than Tim came through the door as well. Between them, they told Bob about the underground room Todd had, the list of names, and the fact that Maria and Michelle were both on it. They also told him of their plan to patrol further out from town, using the go-cart. As he listened, the expression on Bob's face grew ever more grave.

"I don't like this at all. This is very bad. Tim, did you find any car keys when you searched them?"

Tim thought for a moment and said, "No. I didn't see anything like that. Why?"

"You saw the way they were dressed. Those clothes may have been fashionable, but they weren't meant for wandering around in the countryside. The nearest town is what, seventy miles or so from here?" He looked at Maria.

"Seventy-three." She answered.

"Obviously they didn't walk that far. They had no food, no canteens, nothing but the girl, and their guns. I'm willing to bet that we'll," He could feel Kathy's stare at his back, and changed what he was going to say. "YOU will find some kind of vehicle within two miles of here. Chances are that the keys are still in the ignition." Bob thought for a moment and spoke again. "The patrolling idea is a good one, but it will have to wait for a bit. Alex, I want you and Tim to take your mothers' 4X4 and find it. Let Tim drive."

"Why not me?"

"Son you've been hunting with me for a long time. You know how to look for sign. Tim might miss it. I want you to concentrate on that and that only. You'll be looking for tire tracks leading off the road into some brush, or a gully. Once you find it, I want you to take that thing at least two hundred miles from here, and hide it again. DO NOT take anything you find inside from the vehicle. I don't want to give anyone any clues about what happened to those three. When you get out, wipe any fingerprints you've left off of the wheel, shifter, or whatever. You understand?"

"Yes Sir."

"Wait a minute Bob, how do you figure anyone is going to be looking for them? Seems to me that they were the sort nobody would miss."

"Before I answer that Tim, you have to answer something. Alex do you remember what I told you about the rabbit?"

"Sure."

"Ask Tim."

"How does a rabbit survive?" Alex asked. "Considering that the creature has no real 'weapons' for attacking other animals, and it's only defense is speed and camouflage, how does the individual rabbit stay alive?"

"I hadn't thought about it. I don't know. How does he stay alive?"

"He notices every change in his environment, by being constantly alert. Have you ever tried to sneak up one one? You can't do it. The rabbit knows that the first time he misses one of those details, he becomes a hot meal for something else. So what we have to do is become a rabbit. Right Dad?"

"Just so. Speaking of noticing things, Alex since when have you started wearing body armor?"

"Didn't you know? This is this years new fashion statement."

"Well, I must say, I approve of it. You see Tim, that is what I'm talking about. You don't have to worry about everything, just be aware of changes. Now to answer your question, those guys must have driven here, to arrive in such good condition, with no food or water. And why would they drive all the way out here? The answer is Maria and Michelle. That means that someone gave them their names and location. That information could only come from someone in the camps. THAT in turn means they were sent here. We have to make it look like they either never got here, or they came and left again, to throw people off the scent."

"O.K. I get it. But how do we do that, other than moving their car, or whatever?"

"To start with, do you have the list?"

Tim nodded and handed it to Bob.

Bob looked at it and almost absentmindedly he said, "Good, good. Does anyone have a number two pencil?"

Kathy handed one to him. Then Bob picked up another piece of paper, and made a few practice scribbles, trying to duplicate the ones on the list. Satisfied, he crossed out the names of Maria, Michelle, and one or two others, then handed it back to Tim.

"When you park the car, leave this inside. Hopefully whoever finds it will believe that Maria and Michelle have already been 'taken care of' and not come back here looking for them. What I'm more concerned about right now is if those guys were tagged with RFID."

"RFID?" Tom asked.

"It stands for Radio Frequency IDentification. For the past few years, those tags have been put in just about everything. Clothing, tires, passports, even money. Some of them could only be read at close range, while others could be read by a satellite in orbit. We have to find a way to make sure that nobody ever uses those tags to track down our friends out there."

"How do we do that?" Said Maria.

"As far as I know, there are only two ways to do it. First is to microwave the tag, although that might be a little difficult. I saw an article one time that showed the eye of President Jefferson on a twenty dollar bill would explode and burn when you did that. The only other way I know of is to use a hammer on it. The problem there is you have to know the exact location of the tag. There are ways to mask them. Wrapping them in some kind of metal foil works. But I don't think anyone here wants to either strip the clothing off of dead men, for microwaving, or wrap them in tinfoil. So what do we do?"

"You need metal?" Michelle asked.

"Yes. The thing is you need enough mass to prevent any signal from reaching it."

Michelle looked at her mother. "What about that wagon at 'Dead Mans' Curve'? Do you think that would work?"

"That's a good idea."

"Wagon? Dead Mans' Curve?" Bob asked.

Maria smiled, "I guess about half of the towns in the country have, or at least had, a 'Dead Mans' Curve'. It is always a dangerous curve that street racers couldn't resist trying to take at high speed. Often with tragic results. In this case the name is literal. Just north of here is a curve that if you lose it, the choice is slamming into the mountain, or going over the cliff. It's three hundred feet to the bottom. About five years ago, a family in a station wagon went over the edge. It was very sad, nobody lived. Anyway the wagon came to rest on its' side. If we were to put those three next to it, then roll the car over them, that should be enough to block any signal, shouldn't it?"

"I do believe so. Alright, it is kind of late today, so we have our plan for tomorrow. Alex and Tim ditch the car far away from here. While they do that, Sam, Tom, Maria and I will take my truck and dispose of those three, once and for all."

"You can't use the truck. There are a couple of places it won't fit in the canyon at the bottom of the curve. But I think the go cart would fit."

"Can't say I care for that. It's a two seater. The idea of taking them one at a time into the canyon isn't very good."

"Bob, why does your go cart have a trailer hitch?"

"I had a little trailer I used to remove yard debris back home."

"Well, I have a trailer that I think would do for this job. John and I used it for the same purpose. We can put those guys on it and take them out to their final resting spot."

"Works for me."

"What about me?" Michelle asked. "What am I doing while all of this is going on? I'm just as good as any of you men."

"You are going to stay here, and help Kathy keep an eye on the kids, and our new friend."

"Don't you think I can handle it?"

"I'm sure you can, but someone has to be here with Kathy, and you might be able to get our friend to say a few words. You're closer to her age than any other woman here. Stands to reason she'll be more comfortable with you than anyone else. Maybe you can get her to at least tell you her name."

"Barbara. My...name...is Barbara."

As one, they all turned and looked at the girl.

"And I want to thank you for rescuing me."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Alex closed the door of the house that he and Bob shared in the town, on the morning after Barbara had been rescued. He started into the street, and at once stopped to see Maria walking towards him, shotgun slung on her shoulder, and pistol gently slapping her thigh as she approached. He grinned at her, raised his hands, and said,

"Don't shoot. I surrender."

"That's not funny Alex. Especially since yesterday." She looked at the house. Nodding her head, she asked, "Is he up yet?"

"He's been up most of the night. His back is really hurting him, though he won't admit it. And I know there is a set of sheets in there that will never be used again."

"If he's bleeding that badly, why didn't you get Kathy?"

"It wasn't bad, but every time he would roll over or something he's bleed a little. Besides, you know Dad. He wouldn't let me. 'There's no point in waking Kathy for something she can't do anything about. I'll be alright.' or something like it, is what he kept saying."

"That sounds like him. Think it's O.K. for me to go in?"

"Sure. He's trying to get dressed, but he has his pants on."

"Trying?"

"Like I said. His back is hurting. He's having a time with his shirt. And no, he wouldn't let me help."

"Thanks. Maybe I can get him to see reason."

"Good luck. I've got guard duty, otherwise I'd help you."

"That's alright. You go ahead."

Maria entered the room quietly and found Bob doing his best to find a way to put on a shirt that didn't involve moving his right arm and shoulder too much.

"Let me help you."

"What? Oh, Maria. I didn't hear you come in. It's O.K. I can manage."

"It doesn't look like it from here. Come on, let me help." She moved closer to him.

"Really, I don't want to be a burden. I can still pull my own weight."

Instead of answering, Maria walked up to Bob, smiled at him, and with the middle finger of her right hand flicked him, as hard as she could, in the middle of the forehead.

"Ow. What was that for?"

"I though it might help to get your brain started. Bob, do you know how important you are to everyone around here?"

"I don't like to think about that. After all, The Bible says;

Rom 12:3 For I say, through the grace given unto me, to every man that is among you, not to think [of himself] more highly than he ought to think; but to think soberly, according as God hath dealt to every man the measure of faith.

My importance isn't up to me to decide."

Maria thumped Bob in the forehead again. when he looked at her she said,

"It didn't work the first time. Bob, scripture also says,

Luk 14:8 When thou art bidden of any [man] to a wedding, sit not down in the highest room; lest a more honourable man than thou be bidden of him;

Luk 14:9 And he that bade thee and him come and say to thee, Give this man place; and thou begin with shame to take the lowest room.

Luk 14:10 But when thou art bidden, go and sit down in the lowest room; that when he that bade thee cometh, he may say unto thee, Friend, go up higher: then shalt thou have worship in the presence of them that sit at meat with thee.

You're not the only one who knows The Bible. Now, like it or not, you go to the high room."

"Well, I don't know about that."

"BOB! Momma WILL spank. You know your place, it is time to accept it."

He grinned at her and said, "Yes Mother. Why did you come here this early anyway?"

"I thought that after stopping a bullet for me, buying you breakfast was the least I could do."

"Now that I can accept, if you'll help me with this shirt that is."

She smiled back at him. "That's an improvement."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Ives was starting to become concerned. Five of the groups of infiltrators that had been sent out, hadn't reported in on time. True, some of them weren't to good at reporting their progress, but they did report in sooner or later. Now, the members of at least two of those groups had been found dead. He was sure that at least one group had been killed in a drug deal gone bad. Another had been sent out one to many times, and was recognized. Ives had a great deal of pleasure sending in the Chinese forces on that one. The Chinese were such a good choice. There were no Christians among them, so they had no problem entering churches, and killing everyone inside. Well, almost everyone. After all, since the government of China established a one child per family policy, female children were often killed, and every trace of their birth was erased. That way the family could try again at getting a male child to carry on the family name. The obvious result was a shortage of women. That was one of the chief incentives to get the men here. Almost unlimited women.

When they went into a church, they would pull out all of the young and attractive women. Once they were outside, the troops would open fire on all who remained. That is if they didn't just blow up the building, or set fire to it. The women then became almost willing sex slaves, knowing what their fate would be, should they resist.

Now he was wondering about the group he had sent into the mountains to the east. He knew these three were little more than thugs, but they had managed to eliminate a number of those people. He was just about to launch a satellite search for their car, when there was a knock at the door.

"Enter."

"Sir, we've found two of the missing teams."

"Are they alive?"

"I'm afraid only one man is Sir."

"What happened."

"One team was found still in their car. It had been raked with automatic weapons. All of them are dead. We think it was a case of mistaken identity, and they were shot by the Chinese. The other team seems to have run into a wall at high speed. The two in front were killed on impact. The one in the back seat is alive, but just barely. They don't expect him to make it."

"Can he speak?"

"He's out cold Sir. They might be able to rouse him, but it would almost certainly kill him."

"Wake him up. Find out what happened."

"Sir?"

"He's going to die anyway, from what you tell me. At least get whatever information from him that you can, before he does."

"Yes Sir."

The man left quickly. He knew better than to disobey any order the Director gave. For his part, Ives realized that first he was going to need a new group of infiltrators. New faces that hadn't been seen yet. And the strategy would have to be adapted. The old methods were starting to break down. As he contemplated what to do, the matter of Charlie, Jack and Johnnie completely slipped from his mind.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

It was after noon by the time Bob, Maria, Tom and Sam came bouncing back up the dirt trail from 'Dead Mans' Curve' having finished with their unpleasant task. Tom and Sam were somewhat white faced from what they had, had to do. While they were also upset over the grisly task, Bob and Maria each managed to put on a brave face for the younger folks. Bob stopped the go cart near the shed where he kept the truck and 4X4. Tom and Sam climbed off of the trailer. Bob addressed them.

"Gentlemen, you did a fine job today, and I know it wasn't easy. But you both carried out your duties well."

"But I threw up." Tom said.

"Me too." Sam added.

"I know. To tell you the truth, I nearly did myself. Even so, you did what had to be done, without a complaint. I'm proud of you both. Now why don't you go get cleaned up?"

"Who goes first?"

"That is up to you."

Tom looked at Sam and said, "Race you."

Tom started to run past Sam for the shower, only to be tripped by him, and Sam took off like a rabbit.

"No fair." Tom called out, and began to chase his brother.

Bob and Maria chuckled at the scene, and began to unload the shovels and other equipment from the trailer. Bob looked at Maria and told her,

"I'll take care of this. Why don't you go wash up as well?"

"What? You want Kathy to get mad at me? No way. I'll help out."

"Really, I can handle this. Kathy won't get mad about picking up some shovels and a come-a-long. I'll even use my left hand. You go wash up."

"What about you? Don't you need someone to get your back?"

Bob looked up at Maria, and saw a twinkle in her eye.

"Now, now, my Dear. We must set the example for the younger folks. Now you go ahead.'

"That's not exactly what I meant, but O.K. I'll go."

She turned and started to leave. That's when Bob shocked himself, by reaching out and patting her on the backside. Maria turned again, and for a moment Bob thought he had overstepped the bounds. Instead, Maria smiled at him and continued on her way.

Bob turned back to the job at hand, when he heard from behind him.

"Ahem."

Turning he saw Michelle standing there.

"Oh. Hi. I didn't see you."

"Obviously. Bob we need to talk."

"Michelle, are you upset with me over what happened just now?"

"What? No, not at all. Mom is old enough to know what she is doing, and I haven't seen her this happy in a long time. No, it is something else."

"Well, I'm glad to hear that. What's the problem?"

"It's Barbara."

"Oh? What about her?"

"Well it's... I mean...Oh brother, this is hard."

"Michelle, if you have bad news, just spit it out. Like they say, a sharp knife cuts the quickest, and hurts the least."

"Bob, I don't know how to say this, so just let me get it out, before you say anything. I don't know everything those animals did to her, but one thing I know they did was brainwash her. She is convinced that the leader of a group like this has first claim on all the women."

Bob's jaw dropped. "WHAT?"

"It's true. She was made to believe that a woman's only purpose is to sexually satisfy the men. She asked me if you were going to be as rough with her as those bastards were. She figures that you must have done it with all of us by now, and wanted to know what to expect. Bob, she's only fifteen, and terribly confused about everything after what they did to her."

"Did you straighten her out?"

"I tried, but I don't think she believed me. And it gets worse."

"How?"

"On one hand she thinks it is your right. On the other, she WANTS to show you how much she appreciates being rescued in the only way she knows how. What are we going to do?"

"I don't know Michelle. I've never run into a situation like this before. I know what I'm not going to do. I'm not going to be any place where the two of us are alone together. Have you told anyone else about this?"

"I spoke with Kathy. Seemed like the thing to do."

"Absolutely. I'd like you to also tell your mother."

"I will. Oh yes, I almost forgot. Kathy said she wants you in the office, sitting down, with your shirt off by the time she gets there."

"If you see her, tell her I'm on my way."


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bob was waiting for Kathy, as he had been told. He was looking forward to speaking with her about Barbara when she arrived. So he was a bit taken back when Barbara walked into the room with her. Kathy was immediately all business.

"Alright Bob, before I look, did you do anything I told you not to do?"

"No. I was good. Even though I wanted to do the worst of it, to spare Tom and Sam."

"I appreciate that, but even so, I'm glad you didn't do anything to make things worse for yourself." Kathy walked around behind Bob. She nodded in approval when she saw there wasn't any new blood soaking into the bandage.

"Bob, I'm going to remove this bandage, and it will probably hurt a little. Barbara. Would you go into the room across the hall and see if you can find any more of these large bandages."

Barbara nodded, and left the room. Quickly and quietly Kathy asked Bob, "Did Michelle speak to you?"

"Yes. But I'm at a loss for what to do about it."

"One thing at a time. Ready?"

Bob nodded. Kathy removed the bandage.

"KATHY. I thought you said a little pain. That hurt like fire."

"Sorry, it couldn't be helped." She looked at the wound. "You have a little inflamation, not unexpected considering. Other than that, it's not looking bad. I'm going to give your back a sponge bath, so you don't have to wash it when you clean up. Alright?"

"Sure. I was wondering if I should get someone to help me with that."

Barbara returned, as Kathy was cleaning off the sweat and dirt from Bob's back. She gave Kathy the bandage and waited for her to finish. Kathy worked quickly, and soon had Bob's back clean, and a new layer of disinfectant applied to the wound. As she was putting the fresh bandage on, Maria entered the room, her hair still wet from her shower. She said cheerfully,

"Well Kathy, how's my man?"

Startled, Kathy looked at Maria. She winked at Kathy.

"Oh, he's good. we just have to keep him out of trouble for awhile."

"Glad to hear it." Maria stepped up to Bob, kissed him firmly, and as she hugged him whispered into his ear, "I spoke with Mike. Just follow my lead."

"You got it." He whispered back.

"So can I have him back now? He needs a bath."

"He's all yours."

Maria gently grabbed his arm and said, "Come on Sweetheart. Lets' get you cleaned up."

Arm in arm they left the office. Once out of earshot Bob asked Maria,

"What was that all about?"

"Buying you some breathing room. Mike told me about Barbara. She'll back off a little now that she thinks we are an item. But make no mistake Bob, this isn't over. That girl needs some time and serious help. You stay away from her for awhile."

"You'll get no arguement from me." He looked pensive for a moment before continuing. "You know, I should have seen this coming. The Bible talks about the mental stress people will go through in these days. Hearts failing them for fear, and all that. How could I not see this happening?"

"Bob, nobody is an expert at everything. You've done wonders so far, don't be so hard on yourself. Besides, when it comes to women, what man can really say what we're thinking?" She smiled at him.

"Well, that's true." They stopped outside the house Bob had claimed. "I think I better get clean. Thanks for your help back there."

"No problem. Besides, do you think I want to be out done by a teenaged girl?"

"So are we an item?"

"What do you think?" With that, Maria turned and left Bob to his shower.

[day late]

It was late in the afternoon by the time Tim and Alex returned. To every ones' surprise, they brought company with them. Fearing that there might be trouble, Bob approached the S.U.V. carefully, with his pistol loose in the holster. It was when Alex stepped out of it, with a smile on his face that Bob started to relax.

"Hey Dad. Look what I found."

Bob stepped closer, and looked at the man and woman getting out of the back seat.

"JIM!" He shouted. "What in the world are you doing here? I thought you were married to the 'Molly B'."

"Hi Bob. I had to dump her." He grinned back at Bob as they shook hands. "Good thing too, my wife was getting suspicious. Bob, this is Sally."

"Pleasure to meet you Ma'am."

"The pleasure is mine."

"Really, what are you doing way out here?"

"Oh that is a story. Got some place to sit while we talk?"

Bob showed Jim and Sally to the refreshment bar in the store, where they sat and had something to eat, and a soda.

"So what's been happening?" Bob asked.

"Shortly after you guys made the crossing, the Mexicans and Cubans made it up to where we were. We were getting ready to leave ourselves, when Michael showed up and said we were to stay put for awhile. To make a long story short, you folks were the first in a long line of midnight crossings. The 'Molly' made so many trips, she got the reputation of being Clarie's personal midnight express."

"I hope that didn't cause problems."

"No, not at all. Matter of fact, it helped us. You remember the patrol boat that wanted us to stop? Well, it got to the point that they would just wave as we went on by. Anyway this went on for awhile, but things did change. After the enemy forces got there, the river traffic all became either war supplies, or slaves."

"Slaves! Are you kidding?"

"I wish I were, Alex. I managed to avoid that traffic, but ended up transporting munitions mostly. Now Michael had told us before that when the time came, we had to be ready to move, as in right now! One evening he showed up again, and said it was time to go. We loaded our car onto the 'Molly' and made our crossing. Once on the other side, Sally took the car ashore, and I took the 'Molly' back to about mid channel. I sent a distress call, and warned I was carrying munitions. Then I put a couple of flares into the hold and left in the lifeboat. Once I was back to shore, I turned the lifeboat around, and headed it back towards 'Molly'. She was already burning pretty good by then. I knew nobody was going to rush out to save anyone from a burning bomb. So nobody went looking for us when 'Molly' blew to bits."

Jim shook his head at the memory, then continued. "So we drove straight west. Until two days ago. That's when the car broke down. So we packed up what we could carry and kept moving. Last night Michael came back, and told us to get on a certain road, and no matter what, stay on that road. So we did. A little after noon, I heard a car coming, turned around, and there was this familiar looking 4X4 coming down the road, with a familiar face behind the wheel. Alex pulled over to pick us up, and here we are."

"Well we're certainly glad to have you. So what are you going to do now? The only river near here you can cross with a row boat."

"I was thinking about that. What do you folks do about worship services around here?"

"Mostly it's Bible study and prayer."

"Did I ever mention I'm an ordained minister?"

"No."

"We used to have revival meetings up and down the river in the spring and summer. Think there might be a place for us here?"

"I'm certain of it. In fact I was certain of it before you asked. Well, if you don't mind, Alex what happened with you and Tim?"

"Dad, you were right on. We found their car about three quarters of a mile down the road, in a gully. You wouldn't believe the things they had in there."

"Oh I think I can guess. Food, water, or something else to drink, maybe some maps, and loot from every place they had raided. Am I right?"

Alex looked disgusted as he said, "You missed just one thing. Dad they had pictures of what they did to Barbara. I've never been so sick to my stomach in my life. It's no wonder she didn't want to talk. Don't worry, I left them in the car, but I sure wanted to burn the car and everything. I still feel dirty."

"Is there something I haven't been told here?" Jim questioned them. Together Bob, and Alex explained about the three men, and Barbara.

"That explains a lot. Bob there are some other things you need to know. Michael said that there are more people coming here. But we should be wary. Not all of them are going to be what they claim to be. Also we need to be even more careful about that, since the 'space brothers' have made contact, and Christianity has been outlawed."

"Say what? Being a Christian is illegal? And what was that about the 'space brothers'?"

"It's a little complicated, so bare with me. After they stopped dropping nuclear bombs, and the New Madrid quake caused the Great Lakes to wipe out most of the invading forces, these, well most people believe, aliens showed up. They claimed to have come to bring peace to the Earth. You see, they claim to have created us. Then after that, they had to leave for awhile. They haven't gotten around to explaining why they left yet. Anyway, they said that the reason for so much trouble on the Earth is the Christian belief in the end times. So the only answer is, of course, to get rid of the Christians."

"Wait a minute, let me get this straight. Christians are at fault for believing the Word of God, which told us about what is happening now, and told us two thousand years ago. So because we believe what God has said, long before our grandparents were born, the events happening now are our fault? What kind of circular logic is that? Is anybody buying this load of bull?"

"I'm sorry to say, most people are buying it. Either that, or they are so sick and tired of fighting they are willing to blame anyone for it all, just so long as it brings a stop to it. Right now there are three kinds of Christians out there. The ones that are to scared to do or said anything, the ones that are either running or hiding, or the ones that are dead. If someone either captures or kills a Christian, they get to keep any possessions that the Christians might of had. And the fact these aliens are the ones saying it lends some authority to it in the minds of any who don't really believe."

"So what do you believe?"

"I believe that all Satan has to do to keep us from going to Heaven is to get us to stop believing in Jesus Christ. To that end, he will use any deception he can. I think these 'brothers' are really fallen angels sent to deceive us. What do you believe?"

"I believe you are exactly right. I also believe we need to work on security."

"I thought you said we can't defend this place, Dad."

"I did, but that isn't the same thing as security. You see all security measures boil down to two types. The physical, and the psychological. The physical is locks, bolts, and things that physically stop you from getting into something. The psychological stops you by making you think it is a bad idea. Say you have a field you want people to stay out of. You could try putting up 'no trespassing' signs, but that will only stop honest people. So you put up a sign warning of mines, and nobody in their right mind is going to wander out into that field to find out if the sign is telling the truth."

"So what are you thinking about doing?"

"A combination of the two. Who is the best artist we have around here, anybody know?"

"To tell the truth, I used to do a little graphic art work on the side when Jim was slow, or away on the camp meetings." Sally said. "What do you need?"

"I need to get you and Kathy together. We need some large signs showing that biological hazard symbol they use in the medical field. And we need some simple quarantine signs as well. Then we put them about a mile or so outside of town, and get some of us in fake uniforms to make it look real. Anyone comes along, we warn them of some terrible disease, and they leave, I hope."

"What about Christians that make it out this far? Won't we be scaring them off as well?" Sally wanted to know.

"I figure that any real Christians that come this far, are going to be lead here. They won't stop at a sign."

"And what about others?"

"Those are the ones we've been warned to watch out for."
--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Sarah looked at Mikes' face, as he drove the horse drawn carriage they were riding in with Tommy and their two other children. Actually it wasn't a carriage. It was a two horse, two person buggy, with a small trailer attached to the rear, which was where the two younger children rode. Tommy was 'riding shotgun', with a real shotgun, on a seat that they had mounted just behind the seat that she and Mike sat in. She noticed that the wound on Mikes' face was almost completely healed now, but it would leave a noticeable scar. Her mind went back involuntarily to the night he had been hurt. The Lord had surely been looking out for them that terrible night.

Gang bangers that had first been driven out of the cities, and then, they felt, betrayed by their leader, Manuel, and had barely escaped their pursuers with their lives. Wandering through the countryside, they had stumbled upon the hunting cabin that the family had taken shelter in what seemed like a life time ago. They broke in quietly, intending to steal what they could, and kill any who got in their way. There had been four of them. Mike let them get all the way inside the cabin, before he shot the first time. He killed the last one to come in, somewhat blocking the escape route of the other three. Tommy had fired next, and downed the second from the last. The remaining two went for Mike. Mike had worked the action on his shotgun quickly enough to get another intruder, before the last man reached him. From there the fight was hand to hand. They were too closely locked in fighting for Tommy to get a shot without hitting his father.

The gang banger had pulled a long very sharp knife and slashed at Mikes' body, at the same time, Mike tried to duck under the weapon, and had the side of his face laid open by the blade. He fell backwards away from him, and Tommy ended the fight with a well placed shot.

Sarah decided that the scar was really a badge of honor for her husband. Proving to one and all just how much he loved his family, and how far he would go to take care of them.

They crossed another ridge, following the road the angel had told them to take, and found themselves looking at something none of them expected. Clearly posted on either side of the road were bright orange and black signs, with the words 'Bio-Hazard' clearly printed above a strange looking emblem. Below that was another sign that read 'Quarantine'. From a makeshift shelter on the side of the road, a man in uniform stood up, and walked towards them, holding up his hand for the family to stop.

"What do you think Dad? Do I shoot?"

"Lets' see what he has to say first Son."

The soldier, a Sargent by the stripes on his sleeve, spoke to them.

"Afternoon. Where do you folks think you're headed?"

Mike spoke. "We heard there is a town up ahead where we might be able to find some shelter for awhile."

"Fella, you go down this road much further, and you ain't going to go anyplace else." He hooked a thumb at the sign. "That isn't hanging there for nothing, you know."

Sarah leaned closer to Mike. "Could we have taken a wrong turn?"

"There aren't any turns on this road. We were told to stay on it, no matter what."

"Told? Who told you to do a fool thing like that?" the Sargent asked.

"You wouldn't believe me if I told you."

"The Sargent looked closely at them, then said, "You're Christians, ain't you."

"What if we are?"

"Hey Mister, it don't mean nothing to me, except your stuff. You know the law. If I catch you or kill you, all your stuff is mine."

Mike slowly reached for his pistol. "You want to try it?"

"Who? Me? Do I strike you as a fool? There's more of you than there is of me, and I ain't even got a gun. Besides, I ain't got to try anything. My relief will be here in an hour or so, and I'll just borrow his bio-hazard suit, walk down there and take the stuff you ain't going to need anymore."

"Make sure you stay away from the shelter until we're gone, and we won't hurt you. Tommy, keep you gun on him."

"Yes Sir."

With that, Mike clucked at the horses and slapped the reigns. They began to move foreword.

"Mike? Are you sure we're doing the right thing?"

"Honey, I don't believe that the angel would send us to our deaths. We just have to trust The Lord."

"I hope you don't mind me saying I'm still scared."

Mike smiled at his wife. "So was Gideon. You're in good company."

Knowing that a good man with a shotgun could hit targets that most people would consider to far away, the Sargent waited until the family was well out of range, then pulled a radio from his pocket.

"Dad. Are you there?"

"Here Alex. What is it?"

"Looks like we have some Christians coming in."

"You sure about that?"

"They said they were, and I gave them the whole nine yards, and they just went on ahead anyway."

"Yeah, sounds like it. Thanks for the heads up Son."

Bob called Maria to his side, and together they walked to the ridge-line. As they watched the buggy and trailer come towards them, Maria said to him,

"I hope this works out better than the first time we did this."

"Alex says they're Christians, and he is pretty sharp. I'd be willing to bet on it."

"Knowing him, and knowing you, I'm satisfied. But we'd better be careful anyway. You never know."

"Count on it."

Soon the buggy pulled up to them and stopped.

"Howdy." Bob called to them.

"Afternoon." Mike answered.

"Can we help you folks?"

"We're looking for shelter for awhile. Are you going to try to stop us from going into that town?"

"Shelter, or refuge?"

Mikes' eyes narrowed at this. "What do you mean?"

"Well, shelter we can offer." He reached into his shirt, and pulled out a chain with a cross hanging from it. "But for refuge, you need to look to another source."

Seeing the cross, Sarah sighed, leaned over and rested her head on Mikes shoulder saying, "Mike. We made it."

"I think you're right." He answered.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

It took Director Ives longer than he liked or expected to finally come up with a new strategy. First he had to figure out why the old one was failing. After hearing what some of the surviving infiltrators had to say, it became clear. Now that the master had played the alien card, and that religion had been outlawed, those people were becoming far more cautious about who they trusted. They knew, as he did, that the number of true believers, and those that might become such, was greatly reduced. A group of two or three people suddenly showing up asking questions, no matter how innocent they sounded, simply weren't to be trusted. After all groups of people willing to risk almost certain death to find something to believe in, was a bit suspicious.

So the answer was simple. What he needed was individuals that already knew how to talk the talk, to fool those people into showing themselves. Of course it would require even more incentives to get such people to take the risk of contacting those whom the master hated so much. But incentives could always be found, and after the job was done, there wouldn't be any need to keep any promises he made.

He called in his secretary to explain what he wanted.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

It had been a couple of weeks since Jim and Sally had shown up, when Alex came to his father. bob was being checked by Kathy for what he hoped was the last time, and he would finally be allowed to actually be allowed to return to work. He found He missed being as physically active as he had been accustomed to being. Maria sat nearby waiting for Kathy to give her verdict.

"Uh, Dad? Can I talk to you?"

"Have I ever been able to stop you?"

"Do you want some privacy, Alex? I'm sure Kathy and I could leave for a few minutes."

"Uh, no. I think maybe you should stay."

"What is it, Son?"

"Um,...Well...Dang this is hard."

"Something wrong Alex?"

"Yes and no. Dad what do you think about Mike, I mean Michelle, not the new guy."

"She's a fine young woman, Son. Why? Is there a problem between you two?"

"Well, it's not exactly a problem."

"SON. Am I going to have to beat this out of you?"

"O.K. She's pregnant, I'm the father, and we want to be married."

Together Bob and Maria responded with a loud, "WHAT!"

"It's true, ask Kathy."

"Kathy?" Maria asked.

"Yes, she is. She says he is,and about four weeks I'd say."

"Why didn't you tell me?"

"You know about the confidence shared between a doctor and patient. She's a healthy normal adult woman. She has a right to privacy."

"But she's my daughter!"

"And that changes what, exactly?"

"Maria. Give it up now. Kathy takes this kind of thing seriously. You WILL lose."

"I'm not going to give it up. I should have been told."

"That was up to either Mike or Alex. And it seems to me that you just have been told. I have no right to tell anyone anything about the condition of my patients."

"What about family? I had a right to know."

"Only if it was life threatening, and the patient couldn't express their wishes. Mike made her wishes clear to me. So, you weren't told, until now."

"Bob! Aren't you going to say anything?"

"Yes, I'll say two things in fact." He turned to his son. "Congratulations Son. I'm sure you'll be happy together. Have you set a date?"

"We're thinking next Saturday."

"Do you mean you approve of this?"

"Maria, these two may be our children, but they are also adults. They are under no obligation to tell us anything they don't want to tell us. They don't need our approval, and they certainly didn't ask for it. They've made a choice, and like it or not, we have to accept it."

Outnumbered and losing the argument, Maria had no choice but to accept the truth.

"I guess you're right. Its' not like we can undo what's been done. Alex. You better take good care of my girl, or you'll have to deal with me."

"Yes Ma'am, I will. Hey Dad, you said there were two things. What was the other?"

"You're right, I did." Turning to Maria, Bob said, "Well what do you think? Want to make it a double ceremony?"

[day late]

Maria looked at Bob for a moment, then turned to Kathy.

"Is he still using anything for pain?"

Kathy smiled, shook her head and said. "No, we stopped that over a week ago. What he is saying comes from him, not medication."

Maria turned back to Bob. "Of course I'll marry you, you goof. I was beginning to think I would have to propose."

"You don't mind sharing the day with Alex and Michelle?"

"Not a bit." Looking up at Alex, she said. "What are you grinning about?"

"Oh, I was just wondering. Does this mean I'm marrying my sister?"

It was a couple of days later when Michelle caught up with Bob, in the underground room at Todd's' home.

"Bob? What are you doing down here? Planning on blowing up something?"

"Hi Michelle. Not really. At least I hope not. I was just looking around to see what Todd was up to. You never know, something he was doing down here just might prove to be useful."

"How so?"

"Oh explosives have many uses. They used to use them to create avalanches on ski slopes, so that it would be safe for skiers. You know, knock down the extra snow and ice, so that it doesn't turn loose at the wrong time and hurt people. That sort of thing."

"I see. Bob, can I ask you a couple of personal questions?"

"Certainly. That doesn't mean I'll answer, but you can ask."

"I think you will. When you found out, I mean about the baby, why weren't you upset?"

"My Dear, that isn't entirely correct. I confess, I was disturbed by the fact that you and Alex had been doing what you shouldn't have been doing. At least not before marriage. But the truth is that it was a little late to worry about it. Maybe you two shouldn't have done it, but you did. Now it is the two of you that will have to live with the results. I'll also say that given the fact we are in the end times, I question the wisdom of having a child, but again, it is too late to worry about that. You are going to have a child, and that is that. You and Alex clearly love each other, and a child, or children, is the usual result of such love. But I would have preferred it if you had waited."

"I'm glad you're not the kind to get all stuffy about it. And you're right, we should have waited. But at the time, we didn't have a preacher to marry us, and we do love each other. We just didn't know if there was a way we could have gotten married, and we didn't see a reason to wait, under the circumstances. We didn't plan on this, but we aren't upset that it happened. Would you tell me something else?"

"Go ahead."

"Everybody calls me 'Mike' except you. For awhile, I thought you didn't like me or something. So why don't you?"

Bob smiled. "I'll tell you a secret. I've always loved the name 'Michelle'. If Alex had been a girl, that was the name Nancy and I would have given her. So that is the reason. If you find it offensive, I'll change, but I simply prefer 'Michelle' over the nick name of 'Mike'."

"No, I'm not offended, I was just wondering. One other thing, if you don't mind. Are you going to expect me to call you Dad, after we all get married?"

"That is up to you, Dear. I wouldn't expect you to do that just because I'm marrying your mother. You have a life time of memories with John. I can't ask you to give that up for me."



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Since Tim was obviously older than Alex, and other young men in the group, it was decided that to pull off the guard act successfully, he couldn't be a Sargent, so here worn captains bars while he manned the checkpoint. As he watched yet another person approach the check point, he thought back on how far he had come since it had all started.

He and Kathy had a nice home, in a nice area of town. Their lives really had been the American ideal. Well to do, if not really rich. Four fine children, who were doing well in school, and the older boys looking foreword to learning how to drive. They had been active in their church, the Boy Scouts, and various activities around their area. They felt so safe, so secure, that they didn't even own a gun. He shook his head when he realized that all of that, which seemed a life time ago, had in fact been less than a year. When they started out on the road, there had been seven of them. Now in this little out of the way town, their group had grown to something like forty-five to fifty people.

He had changed. Back then, they didn't want their children anywhere near a firearm. Now here he was, impersonating a military officer at a check point, and Kathy had decided that it was time for the younger two of their children to start learning how to shoot, and hunt.

He put the thoughts aside, as this newcomer got closer to him.

"Good morning friend." the man called.

"Hello. Can I help you?"

"I certainly hope so, my good Captain. I've heard there is a place up ahead where people like myself might be welcome."

"People like you? What does that mean?"

"Oh, you know. Fellow travelers on this highway of life. People who don't believe these so-called 'space brothers' aren't quite what they claim to be? I'm Brother Winston, by the way."

"Well, 'Brother' do you have a problem reading? Danger and death are waiting down that road. Don't you see the sign?"

"I've heard that not everyone that comes this way is turned back. They continue on to the place I spoke of."

"It's not my job to stop anyone, just to warn them. You want to keep going, then go on. Just be aware nobody is going to try to recover your body."

"I'm a man of faith, Captain. I have no fear."

"Man of faith? Are you one of those Christians?"

Brother Winston didn't answer at first, he only smiled broadly at Tim. Then he continued. "Captain, you know as well as I do that anyone claiming to be one of them can be killed on sight. If I were one, do you believe me so foolish as to admit it?"

"Look, 'Brother', I couldn't care less what you may or may not believe. You want to go down this road, then go. At least you can't say you weren't warned."

"Thank you Captain. I shall continue my journey." With that 'Brother Winston' walked past Tim and continued his trek. While his 'Brother Winston' had his back to Tim, he signaled Alex in the snipers nest, some sixty yards away not to shoot. Shortly after that, he picked up the radio and called in.

"Base. This is the check point. Come in please."

"Base here, go ahead." Bob answered.

"You've got one coming in on foot."

"What do you think?"

"I don't know. He's a strange one. I asked him point blank if he was a Christian, but he didn't give a straight answer. Just kind of danced around the question. All I got out of him was he's a 'fellow traveler'."

"Fellow traveler. Are you sure that is what He said?"

"Certain. He said he was a 'fellow traveler' on the highway of life. Why? Does it mean something?"

"It could. It could be just a poor choice of words. I'll check him out. Thanks. Base out."

Bob turned to Michelle, who was sitting at a desk.

"Who's up for escort duty?"

"Mr. Timmons."

"Find him please. Tell him to meet me at the observation point."

The observation point was a place on the town side of the ridge, where a person could stand upright, and see into the valley below, while most of their body would be hidden by the ridge. With tall brush growing up behind the person, it help to hide even the head from the view of anyone coming into town. It was here that Mike Timmons caught up with Bob.

"What's going on?" He asked.

"There's one coming in on foot. From what I was told by Tim, it doesn't sound good. I want to check him out up here rather than in town."

"I agree. No point in letting him see anything until we're sure about him."

Brother Winston didn't see Bob and mike, until he was almost on top of them. When he did, he stopped suddenly, and smiled at them.

"Good day my friends. You startled me. I didn't see you there. Have I come to the right place?"

"I'd guess that would depend on what you are looking for." Answered Bob.

"True enough. You see, I'm a preacher, and I'm looking for a place of real believers. Fellow travelers, you might say."

"There are believers here, that is for certain." Bob crossed his arms over his chest, and smiled back at Winston. "And on behalf of them I bid you welcome." He then casually raised his right hand and waved at Winston, saying "Hi".

Winston saw the sign Bob made with his hand, and smiled. "It is good to see I'm among friends. Are there many of us here?"

"There are a few here. Would you like me to make the introductions?"

"Oh yes, please do."

"Very well. Meet them in Hell." With that Bob drew his pistol and shot 'Brother Winston' in the chest.

Shocked mike cried, "What are you doing?"

"He was the enemy."

"How could you know that? He seemed alright to me."

"Twice he called himself a 'fellow traveler'. That is a term occultists us to identify each other."

"That doesn't prove anything. It could just be a poor choice of words."

"That's true. I wouldn't be convinced by that alone either. You didn't see the sign I gave him did you?"

Mike shook his head.

"It was this." Bob held up his hand for Mike to see. The index finger and pinkie were pointing straight up, while the two middle fingers were crossed over the palm, along with the thumb. "This is a hand sign used by Satanists to identify one another. When I showed him that sign, he said he was glad to be amongst friends. Any Christian preacher worth his salt knows that sign is Satanic. He wouldn't be glad to see it."

"That's mighty thin, Bob."

"Is it? Lets take a look shall we?"

Bob opened the coat that was on the dead man. In the inside pocket was a list of names. It was very similar to lists that had been found on other infiltraors that had been killed. Mike saw it, and knew Bob was right.

"So where did you learn about that sign?"

"Long time ago. While I was in the service. There was a coven of witches in my unit. They tried to get me to join them. When I refused, they didn't say anything to me, but for the next six months my life was a living hell. Every thing that could go wrong, did. I made sure to remember everything I could about them, and their ways. I thought it might prove to be useful at some point. I guess I was right."
--------------------------------------------------------------------------

"Good evening, Sally." Bob said as the door opened to him. "I understand that Jim wanted to talk with me."

"Good evening Bob. So he said. Please come in. You'll find him down the hall, second door on the left. Have you eaten? I can whip up something real quick if you haven't."

"No thank you. I ate before I came."

As he walked down the hall, Jim stuck his head out of the door to see who his wife was talking with. Seeing Bob, he smiled and welcomed him into the room. After being seated, Bob asked,

"So what's this all about, Jim?"

"Bob, I have to ask you something about the people here." He paused as if it was difficult to continue. "What do you folks think about Israel?"

"The nation, or the people? And in what way?"

"Both. I'm asking about where you think they fit in Bible prophecy, and the current state of affairs."

"I think The Bible is pretty clear on the subject. They are Gods' chosen people, and it is His chosen land."

Jim looked Bob in the eye. "Why?" Seeing Bobs' expression he continued. "Before I begin to take on the duties of pastor, I think it is a good idea to see if we are all on the same page or not."

"That makes sense. Well, let me start with Jerusalem. I've heard some people claim that, that city and the land of Israel in Old Testament are not the same ones referred to in prophecy. I have a problem with that. First of all is was The Father who said;

1Ki 11:36 And unto his son will I give one tribe, that David my servant may have a light always before me in Jerusalem, the city which I have chosen me to put my name there.

Now I don't believe, and I've found no place in scripture where it says that God has changed His mind about that. Jerusalem is and always has been Gods' city. Another problem with the idea that it wouldn't be the same place, is when it was prophesied;

Zec 14:4 And his feet shall stand in that day upon the mount of Olives, which [is] before Jerusalem on the east, and the mount of Olives shall cleave in the midst thereof toward the east and toward the west, [and there shall be] a very great valley; and half of the mountain shall remove toward the north, and half of it toward the south.

As you know, every time the term 'in that day' is used, it means the day The Lord returns and sets things right. So even if they are right about Jerusalem not being what scripture says it is, they still have to explain away the Mount of Olives. Unless they want to move every rock and grain of sand to someplace else. Not to mention at the ascension, where the angels said;

Act 1:11 Which also said, Ye men of Galilee, why stand ye gazing up into heaven? this same Jesus, which is taken up from you into heaven, shall so come in like manner as ye have seen him go into heaven.

Now some will grab hold of the 'in like manner' part and say that proves Jesus can return anywhere. But then you are back to where we started, in Zec 14:4 and the Mount of Olives. Lets' face it, Jerusalem is Jerusalem, no matter how much anyone wants to change things.

Now on the matter of who is Israel as far as the people go, scripture covers that pretty well too. It is true that during the trial of Jesus before Pilate the crowd shouted;

Mat 27:25 Then answered all the people, and said, His blood [be] on us, and on our children.

To some people this means that the covenant God made with Abraham was broken. They back that up with the words of Jesus, when He said;

Mat 21:43 Therefore say I unto you, The kingdom of God shall be taken from you, and given to a nation bringing forth the fruits thereof.

However they forget a couple of things. First of all the covenant was made with Abraham and his descendants as an everlasting covenant. That means ALL TWELVE TRIBES. The ones that wanted the blood of Jesus were 'Jews'. They descended from the tribe of Judah only. So what happened to the promise made to the other eleven tribes? To say it is broken for all of the tribes because of the actions of one, is to call God a liar. For that matter what happened to the the other tribes? All scripture says is that they were captured and taken away. Everything else is speculation at best.

But even that doesn't really matter. As we know The Bible teaches that God is not a respecter of persons. It also teaches;

Rom 8:14 For as many as are led by the Spirit of God, they are the sons of God.

Rom 8:15 For ye have not received the spirit of bondage again to fear; but ye have received the Spirit of adoption, whereby we cry, Abba, Father.

Rom 8:16 The Spirit itself beareth witness with our spirit, that we are the children of God:

Rom 8:17 And if children, then heirs; heirs of God, and joint-heirs with Christ; if so be that we suffer with [him], that we may be also glorified together.

Since we are sons and heirs through faith in Jesus, and His work on the cross, then genetics are completely out of the question. God doesn't care where we come from, only if we believe in Jesus.

As far as the current state of affairs is concerned, I believe America can be first found in Ezekiel 38 and 39. Gog is described as the Chief Prince on Mesheck and Tubal. Mesheck is Moscow. Gog will team with a number of countries to attack Israel. Those countries are what today we know them as the Islamic World. Then Gog will be turned away from attacking Israel by God and sent north of Mesheck/Moscow to the land of unwalled villages. What is the target if Gog goes north? There's noting north of Russia but snow and ice. Go over the pole, and there is America. Name one walled village in the North American continent. There isn't one that I know of.

I think there can be no doubt that America is what scripture calls 'Mystery Babylon' either. The Book of Revelation gives a good description of it. First we have;

Rev 17:1 ¶ And there came one of the seven angels which had the seven vials, and talked with me, saying unto me, Come hither; I will shew unto thee the judgment of the great whore that sitteth upon many waters:

Rev 17:2 With whom the kings of the earth have committed fornication, and the inhabitants of the earth have been made drunk with the wine of her fornication.

Rev 17:3 So he carried me away in the spirit into the wilderness: and I saw a woman sit upon a scarlet coloured beast, full of names of blasphemy, having seven heads and ten horns.

Rev 17:4 And the woman was arrayed in purple and scarlet colour, and decked with gold and precious stones and pearls, having a golden cup in her hand full of abominations and filthiness of her fornication:

Rev 17:5 And upon her forehead [was] a name written, MYSTERY, BABYLON THE GREAT, THE MOTHER OF HARLOTS AND ABOMINATIONS OF THE EARTH.

There isn't one thing on that list that America wasn't guilty of. As this says, we are, or were, a rich nation, and we do sit on many waters. Namely, two oceans and countless rivers. But that isn't enough. We also know that scripture says a little later.

Rev 18:10 Standing afar off for the fear of her torment, saying, Alas, alas, that great city Babylon, that mighty city! for in one hour is thy judgment come.

Rev 18:11 And the merchants of the earth shall weep and mourn over her; for no man buyeth their merchandise any more:

Why would sea captains 'stand afar off' and mourn the original Babylon, as I've heard some say? It was landlocked. Given the description of Babylon the Great, and the things it is accused of, it would have to be America.

Some ask 'Why would God judge America?'. The real question is why wouldn't He. God has judged every nation throughout history. What makes us special? Especially given the amount of innocent blood we have poured out through abortion? The perversions we have not only allowed, but in some cases embraced, such as pornography, and drug abuse?"

Bob paused to shake his head. "Not judge us? This used to be a nation that called it's self Christian. By taking that name, we put ourselves into Gods' family. And He says that judgment begins at His house. How could we even think we could escape judgment?

Does that about cover it?"

"I'd say it does." Jim answered. "Glad to hear we think the same."

[day late]

Maria woke with a start just as the first rays of predawn light began to lighten the landscape. There was someone in bed beside her. Slowly she started to reach for the pistol she kept under her pillow. As she touched the grip, she remembered. Of course there was someone beside her. She had gotten married yesterday. She turned her head, and found Bob lying on his left side, with his back to her. In the dim light she could make out the scar that ran across his right shoulder blade. Gently she traced the scar with her finger as she remembered how he had taken the hit, while getting her out of the line of fire. She knew he could have dodged the other way, and there was even better cover in that direction than the way he pushed her. He didn't have to do it. At the time they hadn't even known each other very long, but he chose to risk his life in order to protect her.

"Yeah, that's Dad." Alex had told her, while he was out after Kathy had stitched him up on that day. "Always thinking of the other person first. One of these days, that's going to catch up with him, if he isn't careful. Did you ever hear the whole story about the generator, the storm, and Tim and Kathy's' food?"

She shook her head.

"We still had power after the storm. A friend of Dads' didn't, so he loaned him the generator. Three days later we lost power. It seems that the power company was taking sections of the grid off line, one at a time and clearing the lines. Dad fought with Mom for about twenty-four hours about the generator. She wanted him to get it back right away. He said that his friend had small children and needed it more than we did. Anyway, as it worked out, the other guy was able to return the generator on the forth day, and we had power. But Dad wasn't about to break his word and take the generator back, even if we needed it."

Since that time, Maria had learned for herself, that Alex was right. That was Bob. She held up her left hand, and looked at her ring. It wasn't all that fancy, but to her it was priceless. Bob and Alex had locked themselves away for three days, not giving anyone a clue about what they were up to. Then yesterday each of them presented their wives with a hand made wedding ring. The man was certainly full of surprises. That is when she heard him moan in the dark. Suddenly he sat bolt upright in bed, and was shaking.

"Bob, what's wrong?"

Startled by the sound of Maria's' voice, Bob jumped at the sound. Then he came to himself, smiled and said,

"Oh. Good morning, Sweetheart. I'm used to being alone. I almost forgot."

"I did the same. What's going on? You jumped up like you'd been shot."

His face changed into a grim look. "I have to talk to Jim." He started to get out of bed.

"Bob! It's only first light. The sun isn't even up yet. What is so important you have to kick him out of bed?"

He looked out the window and realized Maria was right. "Well, I guess it can wait until before church."

"Good. Now come back to bed and tell me what happened?"

"I had a dream. Trouble is coming, and it is coming here."

What kind of trouble?"

"The kind that speaks Chinese."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

The church, was in fact a sort of community center that had been built by the people who used to live in the town. It had been used for everything from town dances, and get togethers, to sheltering animals in extreme weather. As Jim finished the service for that morning, he closed his Bible and addressed the congregation.

"Brothers and Sisters, our friend and leader, Bob, has heard from The Lord. He has asked that you remain while he tells us what our Father has shown him. Brother Bob."

Bob took the stage, and looked at the expectant faces. Nobody had made a move to leave.

"Friends, I come to you with disturbing news. The Lord has shown me that trouble is on its' way to our town. That trouble comes in the form of the invading Chinese Army."

That caused a stir in the crowd. They waited to hear what he had to say next.

"I have been shown that we have been chosen to stand where we are and meet them. Meet them and defeat them."

"Brother Bob!" A call came from the crowd, followed by a man standing up to be seen. "There are only a little over fifty of us here. How are we supposed to stand against the Chinese Army? They don't take prisoners. If we stay here, we're going to die in very short order. Why would God lead us here, and then not protect us?"

"I'm sorry, Sir. I don't recall your name."

"Foster, James Foster."

"Mr. Foster, do you remember what happened when the Children of Israel first entered the promised land? I'll tell you. They were charged with the task of driving everyone out of the land God had promised to Abraham. In every case, the battle and the victory belonged to The Lord."

"That's what I'm talking about. Why do we have to fight the Chinese?"

"As I said, the battle was The Lords'. But tell me Mr. Foster, who did the killing?"

"Well, the people did. Um...never-mind. I see your point. Sorry to interrupt."

"Not at all Mr. Foster. It is a valid question. Brothers and Sisters, I'm not going to tell you this will be easy. I can't promise you that we will all survive. But this much I know. If I'm going to die, I would much rather die standing for The Lord, against any number of His enemies, even if I have to stand alone."

Another voice from the back of the room called out.

"There can't be thirty of us to stand against them. How do you expect to win?"

"I count twenty seven of us who can fight. Not including women and small children. Even if I'm alone, with The Lord on my side, He and I outnumber them. I know this is something that each of us must think and pray about. That is all I ask you to do today. Go to your homes and pray about what God wants you to do. If you will fight, be back here at nine tomorrow morning"

From one side of the hall, came another voice.

"Mr. Bob, can I say something?"

"Certainly Sam."

Sam climbed up on a chair, to be seen, and faced the group.

"O.K. I admit, I'm fifteen, but I've been here since the beginning. I don't know what anyone else is going to do, but as far as I'm concerned, Mr. Bob isn't going to be alone. I'll be with him." He turned to face Bob. "I guess that's all." he jumped down from the chair, and walked through the crowd and out the door.

"I think that is really the truth. That's all. Go home, and pray. Those who will stand for The Lord, be here tomorrow."


--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Later that evening, Alex stopped by to see his father.

"That was some speech this morning. Do you think anyone is going to join us?"

"Us? Are you sure you want to be there?"

"Dad, when I was a kid, you always said you would rather be at ground zero with The Lord, than any place else without Him. Have you changed your mind?"

"No."

"Neither have I. I'll be there."

"What about Michelle?"

"Dad! She's pregnant. You don't expect her to fight do you?"

"You misunderstand. I mean, what does she have to say about it?"

"Oh. She doesn't like the idea, but we both agree there really isn't any other choice."

Bob nodded. "Well, whatever happens, tomorrow is certain to be an interesting day."



--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Ives waited in his office for the report from the communications office to arrive. It was taking too long for Winston to report in. Unlike most of the other infiltrators that had been sent out, Winston was punctual about reporting in his whereabouts, and plans. When he was late reporting in, Ives had ordered his last report be brought to him. There was the expected knock at the door.

"Enter."

Ives assistant came in with papers in his hand. "I've got the report you asked for, Sir."

"So what can you tell me?"'

"It seems that Mr. Winston was following up on some of the missing infiltrators, based on intelligence that we've gotten. We sent three infiltrators into the mountains to the east northeast of Reno. A place called 'Trinity'." Unnoticed by the assistant, Ives winched at the word. "That town was evacuated before the invasion, but there were at least three people who were known to be there that didn't make it to the camp. Those three infiltrators went out there, looking for them. They went missing, but R.F.I.D. tracked their car some two hundred fifty some odd miles east of Trinity."

"STOP saying that word!"

"Sir? Which word?"

"The name of that town. I can't stand it."

"Yes Sir. I'm sorry, I didn't know it bothered you."

"I hate anything associated with that Nazarene. Go on."

"Yes Sir. Mr. Winston went out there, planning on picking up the trail of the other three, and that is when we lost his R.F.I.D. tag. One other thing, Sir. From reports of other people that have been to that area, there is a check point about a mile or so outside of Trin...er...that town, with Bio-Hazard warnings. It doesn't seem like anyone would be going there."

"You think not? Do you think at all? Why would our Chinese allies waste a Bio-Weapon on a town that had already been evacuated? Why would the American military waste time and personnel guarding an empty town? I believe we have found one of those peoples outposts."

Ives paused to think for a moment.

"This is what I want you to do. Inform the Americans at the pass closest to that town, that we have intelligence the Chinese are going to make a major attack at this pass, one hundred and fifty miles to the south. They need to leave only a token force, and move everyone else south. Then contact our allies. Tell them they need to make an attack on the southern pass. If they break through, fine. If not, it is only a diversion from that attack on the northern pass, where I expect them to break through. Once that is done, they are to make directly for that town. They can have any women they find, but nothing male is to leave there alive. Understand?"

The assistant nodded.

"Then what are you waiting for? You have your orders, get to it. I expect the attack in two days."

As the assistant left, Ives poured over his map. How clever, he thought, for the Nazarene to hide people in a town with that kind of name. Well, Ives would show Him just how clever He was, by wiping them of the face of the map.

[day late]

The next morning, Bob and Alex were at the church early. They waited to see who would accept the task set before them by The Lord. Bob knew that in normal times, most people would simply let someone else do what needed to be done. But these weren't normal times.

The truth was everyone in town had already paid a high price to be at this place and time. All of them had been forced to give up their homes, most of their possessions, and in many cases, even members of their own families in one way or another. Some had been killed by one of the many enemies that had been faced up to this time. Some had died simply because they refused to leave their homes when the time came. Believing against all odds that something would happen to prevent a disruption of their lives. They died with that false hope. Some few had lost everyone and everything they had ever known. The question was, how many would now step foreword and face this challenge that they had no reason to believe they could possibly survive. Placing all their hope and faith in a word they heard had come from The Lord? How many would believe Bob had truly heard what he claimed? In the quiet of that morning, they waited.

Bob wasn't surprised when Tim, Kathy, Tom, and Sam came walking up shortly after they arrived.

"Good morning." Bob said to them. "Kathy? Why are you here? What happened to the younger children?"

"Hi Bob, Alex. The kids are home with Barbara. And You didn't think you were going to do this without me did you?"

"Kathy, we can't risk it. Look, I know that we will win in the end, but that doesn't mean people won't be injured, or possibly killed. What happens if you take a round or two? Who's going to patch you up?"

"Barbara has become quiet a good nurse. She can handle most things."

"Maybe most things, but she doesn't have the training to handle drugs. We need your medical expertise, not your bravery."

Kathy looked at Bob like he had said something vile.

"Bob, I hate it when you do that. You don't leave a single excuse for me to use. It's not fair."

Bob smiled. "You have to remember Kathy. The guy who said life is fair was lying. Besides, for the most part, in the next day or two we're just going to be getting hot, sweaty, and dirty, getting things ready for the people that are coming."

"So, you have a plan."

"Yes. One provided by The Lord. That is why I know we'll win. But what the cost will be, I can't say. Go to your office, Kathy. Make things ready for the injured we all hope will never come."

"I will, but for right now, I'll stay with Tim and our boys."

"Suit yourself."

Before long people started to gather. Bob was glad to see that most of the people he thought of as able to fight, showed up. Men as well as some women were present. One of the last to show up, was the one that in his heart, he hoped wouldn't, but he knew better. Maria came walking down the street, pistol gently slapping against her thigh, and a rifle on her other shoulder.

Next to her was Michelle. He knew she wouldn't be taking part in the battle to come, and assumed that she was here to send off Alex. So he was a bit surprised when, after kissing her husband, she walked over to Kathy.

"I'm guessing that you aren't going to be in this. So, I'm reporting for duty as your assistant."

"Thank you, but I think Barbara and I can handle it."

"What if there are too many?"

Kathy shrugged, and said, "Well in that case, welcome aboard. You'll have to let me know what your qualifications are when we get to the office."

Bob was in for one more surprise when a girl he guessed at about ten or twelve came running up to him.

"Mr. Bob?"

He got down on one knee to look her in the eye. "Yes Dear, what is it?"

"My Daddy said that Tommy and him will be with you too, but right now they have to be at the checkpoint." She looked at him with earnest blue eyes. "Mr. Bob? Are my Daddy and brother going to be alright?"

"We'll do everything we can to make sure that everybody is going to be alright."

Satisfied, the girl smiled at him, turned and ran back to her mother, and their new home.

Bob stood and addressed the group. "I see we have almost everyone here, so I'll begin. Ladies, Gentlemen, I've heard in the past that some people don't believe that God takes sides in modern warfare. I'm somewhat of a student of history. So I know this idea to be false. It was General Patton, in the Second World War who had to fight not only the German Army, but the weather as well, as he moved his men to aid American soldiers surrounded at the city of Bastogne, during the Battle of the Bulge. He had a prayer written for the occasion, it went like this;

'Almighty and most merciful Father, we humbly beseech Thee, of Thy great goodness, to restrain these immoderate rains with which we have had to contend. Grant us fair weather for Battle. Graciously hearken to us as soldiers who call upon Thee that, armed with Thy power, we may advance from victory to victory, and crush the oppression and wickedness of our enemies, and establish Thy justice among men and nations. Amen.'

Folks, I don't have to tell you that we aren't as numerous as Patton's army. But the God we serve, is the same God that has granted victory after victory to those who acknowledge Him as Lord. So I ask you one and all to kneel with me now to present our prayer to The Lord God of Heaven."

As Bob knelt, they all did the same.

"Father, you know our situation, and our need. You have shown us that the enemy of all who believe in You and Your blessed Son, Jesus Christ, is even now on his way to destroy us. We have heard Your call to stand in the gap, and defend this place, putting our trust in You for the victory, even though, like Gideon we are greatly outnumbered. And so we ask that you strenghten, and protect us in the fight ahead. Let our God arise, and his enemies be scattered. And we ask it in Jesus' name.

Amen"

A murmured 'Amen' went through the group. Then they stood and looked expectantly at Bob.

"Alright folks, I need three groups of people to start with. I need some people that have any knowledge at all about dealing with explosives. Even basic training with hand grenades will help. Second, i need some people who aren't afraid of either getting dirty, or of heights. Finally I need the rest of you to go through town, and find every piece of two strand electrical cord you can find."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

The day after Director Ives gave the order, the majority of the American forces guarding the northern pass pulled out and headed south. Unexpectedly, they left much of their heavy weapons behind them. The general thought being two fold. First, moving them would mean they might not be able to get to the expected attack site quickly enough. Secondly, if the intelligence they had received was faulty, the weapons would be needed to defend the pass. Along with the weapons, the most experienced gunners were left behind as well. For the same reason.

This choice, proved to be what cost the Chinese heavily. When they moved up into the pass, high explosive shells rained down on them for hours. What had started out as four infantry companies with the support of a dozen tanks was reduced to slightly under three companies in the exchange. Half of the tanks were left blown apart and smoking in the pass. They didn't take the pass, but they did manage to fight their way through it due to the reduced number of defenders.

They quickly moved ten miles from the pass, and then stopped to regroup. Two of the tanks were so badly damaged that, while they were still running, they were cannibalized to provide parts to repair the remaining four vehicles. They had just finished with the repairs, when the American infantry found them, and started using mortars on the troops. Instead of standing to fight, the Chinese chose to continue with their mission. By now, the troops had been further reduced to about two companies, and one more tank have been hit with a lucky shot from a mortar and sat burning where it had been hit.

By this time, night was beginning to fall. Once they were sure they had escaped the Americans, they set up a camp for the night, with guards posted all around. The officers were wondering what it could be in that small town in the middle of nowhere that was so important that casualties on this scale would be worth it all.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Maria walked into the room quietly, and found Bob deeply in prayer. not wanting to disturb him, she backed out and waited for him to finish. Shortly, Bob came out of the room he had been using, and found his wife.

"Hi Honey. What brings you here."

"Lunch. You don't think I'd let any man of mine go hungry do you?"

"Thanks so much. I was getting hungry."

Maria couldn't help but notice that Bob still had a concerned look on his face.

"What's wrong Bob? You seem to be upset."

"I'm just trying to be sure I haven't missed anything."

"I guess I don't have to remind you, we do what is possible, and trust God for the impossible."

"I know, I just want to be sure I've done all I can."

"Just trust in Him, Bob. Trust in Him. As you've said yourself. He wouldn't lead us all the way out here, just to die."

"I know, I just wish there were more of us."

The radio crackled to life.

"Base, this is check point. We have a problem."

"Base here." Bob answered. "What is it?"

"Looks like a convoy of three military trucks coming down the road."

"Stop them if you can, otherwise get out of their way. I'm coming now."

Putting down the radio, Bob stepped outside and found Tim nearby. He called him over.

"Grab the first six men you can find, and come with me. EVERYBODY carries a weapon."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Mike Timmons had spent his share of time at the check point, but nothing had prepared him for this. Nobody had ever shown up in any kind of motorized vehicle. Now here were three military trucks baring down on him. He decided to stand at the side of the road, and try to flag them down. Much to his surprise, they ground to a stop in front of him. The driver of the lead truck leaned out the window, and without any pleasantries demanded.

"Where's Bob?"

"Excuse me? Who's Bob?"

"Look don't give me a problem. There isn't much time. Now where is he?"

"I really don't know what you mean."

"Alright, alright, we'll do this the official way. I need to speak with your C.O."

"I've called in your convoy. There is someone on the way."

"Good. mind if we stretch our legs while we wait?"

"Go ahead."

The Captain called out to the men in the other trucks.

"Dismount. Take ten."

Mike counted eight men as the got out of the vehicles, and saw that these men were professionals, by their baring and manner. The got out of the trucks, but never got far from them. Everyone of them carried a sidearm, and over half had rifles slung over their shoulders. Before long, one of the men said;

"Sir. Check the ridge."

The officer looked and saw six men with arms at the ready, but not aimed at them, and one man coming towards them.

"Stand down Sergant. They're just checking us out. We'd do the same. And I think that is our contact on the way down. Everyone stay loose."

When Bob reached the officer, he smiled and said,

"Glad to meet you Bob."

"Excuse me? If we've never met, how do you know me?"

"I tell you in the name of Jesus Christ, the one who lead you here has sent us to you."

"That's good to hear, Captain. You know that staying here could be hazardous to your health, don't you?"

"Yes Sir. We left the Chinese about thirty-six hours behind us, licking their wounds. That's why we're here."

[day late]

Bob looked at the Captain.

"Son, I have to ask two questions. First, what is the name of the one who lead us here? Second, what is your name?"

"Michael lead you here, and us to you, and I'm Captain Ferguson."

"Well, Captain, what is it that you plan to do to help us?"

"Why don't you take a look back here." Captain Ferguson hooked a thumb towards the back of the truck.

Once they had gotten to the back, Captain Ferguson stepped up on the back, and pulled away the canvas covering. Bob saw a literal truck load of explosives and weapons. Mortars, and their tubes, 'plastic' explosive known as C-4, with detonators and what he knew was called 'det-cord', rifles, machine guns, and ammo for both by the crate load.

"We have all three trucks packed with this. Think we might be able to change the minds of those Chinese?"

"How on earth did you lay your hands on all of this? I would think that your C.O. wouldn't want to turn loose of all of this to save a bunch of Christians, given the situation."

Ferguson got a grim look on his face. "Bob, we didn't exactly ask for it. For that matter, we aren't exactly 'on duty' if you get my drift."

"Sorry, but I don't."

"It is like this. Once being a Christian became a crime, these men and I were given a choice. Give up our faith in God and His Son, our Savior, or give up our positions in the Special Forces, and become civilians."

"Must have been a tough choice."

"Not really. When you boil it all down, it is a simple choice. Heaven or Hell, you get to choose. So we made our choice." Ferguson looked Bob squarely in the eye.

"Truthfully, I'm no longer a Captain. These men no longer hold any rank what so ever. But we are all Christians, Special Forces, and loyal Americans. For the past month or so, we've been hanging around the edge of the fighting, lending a hand, here and there, whenever we felt we could make a difference. We may be persona non grata to most of the nation, but on the line, there have been a few people that were glad to see us, and happy to have our help. So, when Michael told us to come here, ready to do what we do, we knew where to get what was needed."

"Well, I'm not the rest of what is left of this nation, and as far as I'm concerned, you are a Captain, and your men still hold their ranks, whatever they may be. And I'm most grateful for whatever help you can provide, and your skills in the field. Welcome to our midst." Bob held out his hand. Instead of taking Bobs' hand, Captain Ferguson saluted.

Bob looked at him and asked, "Captain, you are the expert in all military matters, so why do you keep deferring to me?"

"Sir. Michael made one thing very clear. There is one man who is in command here, and it isn't me." He held the salute.

Bob, remembering his military training, snapped to attention, and returned the salute.

"Sir. If I may ask, what is your battle plan?"

"Do you remember a bottle-neck you came through about two miles back?"

"Yes Sir."

"There is a steep cliff on one side, and a ridge line on the other. It is my intention to wait for the enemy to pass through that bottle-neck, and then bring down the cliff side on top of them. After that, any survivors will be engaged by small arms fire from the ridge line."

"How are you going to bring the cliff face down on them?"

"Using the best that we have. Black powder charges placed in the cliff face. The major problem we have at the moment is setting them off at the same time. All we have are home made fuses."

"I think we can help out with that, Sir." Ferguson turned and called to one of his men. "Busby. How many radio detonators do we have?"

"About twenty, Sir."

"Think that will do it?"

"I would think that, that will be more than enough."

"Sir? Have you considered flankers?"

"I figure it will more likely be scouts, rather than a platoon or something, in limited radio contact. They wouldn't want to give away their positions with a lot of chatter. What I have in mind is to let them pass, then take them out quietly from behind, once they report in the all clear."

Captain Ferguson looked at Bob, and without smiling, and in all seriousness said. "I'm glad I'm not the one coming after you. You'd make it mighty difficult."

"That's the idea."



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The Chinese commander wasn't happy. He had started out with over five hundred men, eight tanks, and thirty five trucks. Now, after fighting his way through the pass, he was down to four tanks, and only three of them really fully operational. Man power had been reduced by over fifty percent, only two hundred thirty men in condition to fight, and fifteen trucks. He wasn't allowed to swing south and help with the assault there. He had to take a nothing town in the middle of nowhere. Even the maps showed that the pavement ended at the town. There must be something very important in the town to warrant the lost of men and equipment. Whatever it was, he felt that he would be well compensated for his efforts, even if he had to compensate himself with whatever was in this town. He had wanted to have helicopters also, but had been over ruled, when it was pointed out that he would be operating behind enemy lines, beyond the range of refueling and rearming them.

He looked through the binoculars again. The gap between the cliff, on the left, and the ridge to his right didn't look to imposing. Still no point in taking chances. He might be a little behind the timetable, but resistance had been heavier than expected. He ordered a squad of men to each flank, ahead of the main body. He watched as the two squads moved further away, and climbed the respective slopes.

For both squads it was an easy climb since the ground rose gently on each side of the gap. Soon the men on the right side had gained the top of the ridge, and fanned out to cover a larger area. About the time their heads disappeared from view, the second squad reached it's objective, and did the same thing. He waited for several minutes, until the first squad reported in. They had found no sign of recent activity, and all was clear, as far as they could see, which was at least a half mile. He ordered them to hold their position, and wait for the second squad to report. Moments later, the second squad reported that they could see the first squad, and everything was just as they had said. All clear, as far as the eye could see.

The Commander ordered both squads to make their way down the slopes, and rejoin the main body as they came through the gap. Satisfied, he put down the microphone, and signaled the advance.

The two squads moved to comply with their orders. At a whispered signal from one of the radios Captain Ferguson had brought, men quietly popped up out of holes that had been dug and then hidden, they were called, 'spider holes' after the trap door spider which used the method of catching its' prey.

Bob had chosen these men very carefully. Ever since they had first arrived in the town, Bob had schooled everyone with the bow and arrow. As newcomers arrived, they too were taught how to use the ancient weapon. Most of them could now put a group of ten arrows in an area the size of a baseball at thirty yards. Now the best archers they had were drawing a bead on the backs of the Chinese troops as they moved down the side of the slope. As one, the men on both sides of the valley released their arrows, aiming for the head and necks of their enemy. They shot the ones closest to them first, so the troops in front didn't know what was happening, until they too had died.

The Chinese force, assured that there was nothing to threaten them moved foreword through the gap. At a point where the road came closest to the cliff face, explosions boomed overhead. The commander had a chance to see the avalanche of stone coming towards him, before he died. In his last moments, he realized that the squads he'd sent to scout the hills were dead, and hoped that those men who survived this attack could make it to the ridge to his right, and possibly manage to fight their way back to friendly territory.

The slide that they had set off with the explosives did most of the work it was intended to do. The tanks, being slower than the trucks, never had a chance to escape. They were buried under tons of rock. Two of them were overturned, exposing their thinner undersides, The boulders crashed into them crushing them like a soda can. In the third tank, instead of trying to run away, the tank commander turned towards the cliff. He managed to reach an overhanging portion of the cliff, and took shelter there. The slide buried them as well. With all that debris on top of them, they were trapped, and would never escape.

Two of the trucks managed to avoid the falling rocks, along with about fifty men. Once they had retreated from the danger as far as they could, they hoped that the danger was over. They were wrong. within two minutes, mortar rounds began to drop from the sky among them. The barrage lasted for about twenty seconds, and when it ended, thick clouds of dust and smoke blanketed the area. It took almost fifteen minutes before the cloud had cleared enough for the people of the town to be able to see well enough to enter the area and make sure nothing remained alive.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

After leaving Tom with his mother, and Alex with his wife, Bob took Sam, and they went back to the scene of the battle. Most of the townsfolk had already left, with arms full of weapons, ammunition, equipment, canteens, and other things that might prove useful in the future. Captain Ferguson still remained keeping a watchful eye out for any enemy soldiers that might not be as dead as they seemed.

"Captain. How are things going?"

"Fair enough. Looks like we got them all. I am a bit concerned that we've blocked off the only route out of here."

"Not quite Captain. We've blocked the only paved route. There are four dirt roads, that don't show on maps, leading different directions out of town."

As the men spoke to each other, Sam started to wander around, not so much checking for bodies, but rather to see if there was anything he considered valuable. Shortly he was a good thirty yards from Bob and Captain Ferguson, when he noticed movement among the rocks. Just as he had been taught about hunting, he froze. A wounded Chinese soldier, who was behind the men, raised himself slightly, and crouched behind a small boulder. Slowly he raised his pistol to aim and fire. It was the last thing he did. As he started to aim the weapon, an arrow thudded into the left side of his back, just at heart level. Bob and Captain Ferguson jumped as the pistol went off, from an involuntary jerk of the trigger. Both men pivoted and brought up their weapons, only to find the soldier lying face down on the stone, and Sam standing, with his bow still raised, about twenty yards behind him.

"I thought he was going to shoot you." He said almost apologetically.

"I'm sure you are right." Bob answered.

Captain Ferguson walked over to Sam, reached out and shook his hand with a simple, "Thank You."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Ives after being informed about the failure of the Chinese element, learned from satellite photos, was becoming angry. Taking heavy losses getting through the pass was unfortunate, but could be understood. But to have two companies of men wiped out by so few resistors, was unacceptable. As he stared at the photos, it became clear, another way would have to be found to get those people. The gap which the Chinese had entered was now nearly completely blocked. No vehicles would be going through it until after many days of clearing the debris. He would have loved to just use a nuclear weapon on them, but the master had forbidden that option. The plains to the east of them were not to be contaminated. He would need the food grown there for feeding those who supported him, after the new order was established.

Even worse, The Americans had beaten back the attack on the southern pass, and since then had re-enforced the northern one. That left only one option. A massive air strike. Something to level the entire town, and anything else within the target area. The only problem with that idea was that he was unsure if the resistors might have gotten hold of anti-aircraft missiles. He couldn't be sure, unless, he sacrificed some lesser aircraft first, to get them to show their hand. However, with the losses the Chinese had been suffering of late, they weren't likely to be willing to give up any aircraft for the purpose. He considered sending an unmanned aircraft over the area, but they were in short supply, and needed on the active front lines.

He finally decided that the U.A.V.'s would have to be used. The Chinese would just have to make do with their fighters and helicopters to get the job done.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

That evening, Tim and Kathy held a special dinner in honor of their 'two heroes'. Bob, Maria, Alex and Michelle were also in attendance. The two young men were given the meal of their choice, out of the available stores. Everyone involved in the fight spoke highly of them, and told of the actions they had witnessed. As supper was being finished, Captain Ferguson knocked on the door, and was asked to join the group.

"I'm here, to do something I don't usually do." He held two certificates, quickly drawn up by Sally, which he awarded to Tom and Sam, for 'Bravery in the Face of Enemy Action'. The two of them were at a loss for words, being the center of so much attention. They murmured their thanks for the awards, and soon excused themselves. Kathy made sure Barbara, who was now living with them, stayed to help cleaning up after the meal. Captain Ferguson signaled Bob, and pulled him to the side.

"Have you given anymore thought to what happens next?"

"Yes, and it's not good. First of all, there is no good reason for the Chinese to come here. It is a nothing town, in the middle of nowhere. There are no resources here that they would want, and this place has no strategic value. That means someone sent them. So the question is why would anyone send a force that size to a place like this? The only answer I can figure is the number of Christians here. That in turn means our enemy is someone in league with Satan, and in control of these armies. Looking at our situation, in the natural, we are toast if we stay here. Every instinct I have is screaming at me to pack it up and leave. The sooner the better. But my spirit tells me to trust The Lord. The last thing I heard from Him, was to sit tight.

Again, looking at it from the natural, in order to prevent another attack, we would have to guard the next nearest place the enemy would have to pass through to get here. As you know, that means the gap on the other side of the plains outside of this valley. That gap is thirty miles from here. Which would require us leaving our people thirty miles from help, or resupply. I can't do that. And even if we had a battalion of trained men, we couldn't hold those plains for very long. The only choice that leaves is to try to fort up here, and hold on until The Lord tells us something different.

My main concern right now, is an attack from the air. We are out of range of artillery, and American forces are between us and the Chinese, so that means the next attack must come from the air. If it were helicopters, we might be able to knock them down with small arms. So I imagine, they will use fighters, or bombers. I don't think they'll use bombers, again, because of our distance from the front. I believe it will be fighters with missiles. And against that, I'm not sure what we can do."

"Do you have any electronics experts around here?"

"I'm not sure. Lets' find out."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Ives was becoming more and more frustrated. It was bad enough those people had defeated the Chinese forces sent against them, but it had been ever more difficult to convince the Chinese commander that an air strike was actually needed. After the Commander had ruled out using the unmanned vehicles, siteing his need for them to be used to overcome the American forces, He had spent four days convincing the Commander that he had to take out the town. To take revenge for his lost men, if nothing else. It didn't matter that the town had no real military value, revenge must be taken, or else the rest of the Americans might be encouraged to rise up and fight them. Then what would he do?

The man was becoming more cautious with each passing day. Even now he was only willing to assign five fighters to the strike. Ives knew that the Nazarene must be involved in this somehow. No mere man would have been able to figure out what he was up to, and be prepared for the actions he had taken so far. All right, this time he would be cautious. The planes would be ordered to come in low enough to evade radar. That way, even if those people had some way to plug into the American system, they would never see them coming. Ives smiled as he thought of how surprised those Nazarene followers would be, as they died.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

"Bob. I'm glad I found you. I wanted to tell you that the transmitters and generators are in place, and operational. Our forward observers will be in position within the hour." Captain Ferguson reported.

"Good. I'm glad to hear it. None to soon if you ask me."

"Bob? Are you certain about the transport for those O.P.'s? I mean it seems to make more sense to use the trucks, instead of the go-cart and those chain-saw engine bicycles you have."

"It does make sense to use them." Bob insisted. "First of all, those things make smaller targets. Those trucks can be seen quite a way off. Also the bikes and cart are gas powered, the trucks are diesel. We don't have diesel, but we do have gas."

"Alright, it's your call. When do you expect the attack?"

"What time is it?"

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

It was twenty four hours after their conversation that the attack came. Four two man groups had been placed out on the plain, between fifteen and twenty miles from the town. When they heard the aircraft coming, they reported in.

"Here we go." Bob said, and warned the men on the transmitters to listen to the radios and be ready to fire. He thought back the conversation he and Captain Ferguson had with the only man in town with the needed electronic knowledge.

"Captain, Bob, what you are asking can be done, but you have to understand there are problems that have to be overcome. But as I said, yes, you can turn a microwave oven into a weapon. You see, that is the easy part. All that you do is open it, get the parts that actually create the microwave, and then direct the energy inward and change the direction towards whatever you want to shoot at. But here is where you start to run into problems. This weapon will be short-ranged. Two to three hundred yards is about the best I can promise you. Even then, you will have to keep the beam of energy on your target for a few seconds. If you are talking about planes and missiles, that is going to be tricky to say the least. However your major problem is going to be the hazard it creates for whoever shoots the thing. After all, this is a microwave. It cooks things. Without proper shielding, well lets' just say that it would be a good idea for your gunners to be older family men. That way if anything goes wrong, at least they already have their family. You can without a doubt sterilize a man by accident. Not a good choice for a young man."

"George, we have full confidence in you. Just do the best you can, and trust God for the rest."

Now they were going to find out just how good George really was. The plan was simple enough. Men at Observation Points placed in the plains had announced the jets were on their way in. Now, when they heard one of them launch a missile, they would report it in. Failing that ten seconds after the jets passed overhead, the microwave transmitters would be turned on. They were placed so that their fields of fire would overlap in depth. That way, as the missiles came in, they would be hit by more than one beam of energy, which would fry the electronics inside the missile. At the prearranged signal, all of the weapons were turned on.

The Chinese pilots fired at a distance of ten miles. the missiles came in low, just above the ridge line. Tim radioed Bob.

"Bob! I don't think it worked. Most of the missiles just flew right over us. We only knocked down one of them."

"Keep firing towards the enemy. One salvo isn't going to wipe out this town, and they know it. They'll fire again."

As Bob finished speaking, there was an explosion on the far side of the ridge. As one missile fell short. He looked up and watch three more of them pass harmlessly overhead. The missiles were blinded by the beams, and continued to fly straight ahead, instead of to their intended targets.

"Bob! The next wave is inbound. We got three this time. One of them took off like a moon shot."

"We're waiting. Engage the planes as they come over."

Again, a missile fell short, and hit the other side of the ridge The last missile cleared the ridge and suddenly turned right and continued its' flight out into the plains to the east.

For their part, the pilots failed to understand why they had lost video from the missiles. They flew in low, as ordered, and into the microwave beams. Suddenly all of their systems went out. As they tried to regain control of their aircraft, they flew into the ground, exploding in huge fireballs.

"Gunners! Cease fire." Bob shouted into the radio. "O.P.s' report any sign of further activity." He didn't wait for them to answer.

"Bob. Loks like we did it." Captain Ferguson smiled at him.

"Thank The Lord, Captain. Thank The Lord."

[day late]

Sargent Gary Busby was standing on the street corner, in civilian clothes. Things were different tonight. Not that being different was anything new to Busby. He had been different all of his life. He had always been taller and more mature looking than any of his peers, and had started working out at the school gym at a young age, which only added to the difference between him and others his age.

He didn't mind though. Working out got him away from the house for extended periods of time, which was what he wanted. Ever since he could remember, his parents were either stoned, getting ready to get stoned, or fighting over who had used the last of the drugs they had, and who should go out and buy some more.

He had always felt that there had to be more to life than that. So when he had just turned seventeen, he left home one day, with the excuse of spending the weekend with a friend, and gone down to the Army recruitment center and signed up. It wasn't hard to convince the recruiter that he had been an orphan. And with his size and build, plus the fact the enlistments had been dropping off for years now due to the war, they didn't press to hard for answers, nor check his story to closely. Before the weekend was over, he was already in basic training. He knew his parents wouldn't think to look for him in the service. They both hated it, and tried to convince their son to do the same.

It didn't take long for him to realize that he was once again different. He actually liked the structured lifestyle. It gave him a sense of stability he had never know before, and a sense of belonging. He excelled at being a soldier. When the chance to join the Special Forces came up, he jumped at it.

There too, he excelled. He and the S.F. were made for each other. With his upbringing, he had never been a religious man. He hadn't ever even prayed that he could remember, until the terrible and yet wonderful day in Iraq.

His team had been sent on a mission. Simple orders, provide cover for a mixed U.S. and Iraqi army advance. It seemed everything went bad all at once. They had been moving forward, towards a row of buildings, from which they could cover the advance. The only way to reach them was to cross open ground, with a few isolated building here and there, between the drop off point, and the objective.

That is when the insurgents opened fire on them. Busby found the only piece of cover he could, a shallow depression in the ground. He was returning fire, even as he hit the dirt. By the time he could look around, he found himself alone. Nobody from his team could be seen from his position. There was nothing but a small building to his left, and a row of buildings to his front, that were erupting with gunfire directed at him. But the Iraqis' knew exactly where he was, and were doing their best to kill him.

Busby didn't know how long the fight had been going on, when his weapon ran empty, yet again. He reached for the pouch on his belt for another magazine, only to find it empty. He reached for the pouch on the other side, with the same result. But it wasn't over yet. From long habit, he carried even more magazines in his pants pockets. The problem was reaching the magazines, since he was laying on them. He rolled over onto his back and struggled to pull the next one out. That was when the mortar round hit. It buried itself in the ground between his knees. For a man in a fire-fight, he stared at it for a long time. All of ten seconds. For the first time in his life, he found himself thanking the God he had never even spoken to before. Dirt kicking up from the ground brought him back to the fight. The magazine came free from his pocket, he jammed it in the rifle, and began to fire again. Of the five enemy soldiers running at him, he shot two. Then his over-heated rifle jammed.

As Busby looked up, and it seemed the earth itself raised up to fight them. Geysers of dirt spouted up between them, and the men were suddenly cut down. Rolling over onto his back again, he saw the helicopter. Bolts of flame shooting out of the front, and then streaks of fire erupted from under the stubby wings on each side of the chopper. Rockets raced past him and blasted the buildings the enemy fire had been coming from. Then just as suddenly as the chaos had started, it stopped. Busby laid there, and tried to stop shaking.

He felt hands roughly grabbing him from behind, as he heard his name called.

"Where the hell have you guys been?" He asked.

"We had to clear that building, before we could get a shot. Man that was some kind of fight you just put up."

That had been the terrible part. The wonderful part came later that night. Busby talked with the Chaplin, telling him everything that happened.

"Son, if you ask me, The Lord has plans for you. I don't remember seeing you at church. Do you know The Lord?"

"Can't say I do Chaplin. I've been busy learning other things."

"Take this." the Chaplin handed him a Bible. "Get to know Him. I'll be here if you have any questions."

Busby read The Bible. It turned out to be the best thing that had ever happened to him. He and the Chaplin had many conversations. Eventually, he gave himself to Jesus. He never regretted the choice. Now here he was, standing in the street, in civilian clothes, feeling different once again. He remembered the conversation he'd had with Captain Ferguson just a short time ago.

"What's the matter, Busby? Thinking of leaving the team?"

"Oh, No Sir. It's just that, well these are the end times. And I got to thinking of the things I've never had. Like a wife. I think it might be nice to have a wife. And, well, with the latest group of people to come here, eligible women actually outnumber men. Sounds like good odds to me."

"Busby, if you think there's a woman out there that can put up with you, I say go for it. Just remember one thing. In uniform, or out, you are still a member of this team."

"Don't worry Sir. That won't change."

Now that he was on the street, he found that he actually didn't know what to say to a woman. Opportunities to mix with the fairer sex had been rather limited in his life. He stood there thinking about it, when a man walked up to him and began to speak.

"Friend, you look like a man with a lot on his mind."

"You could say that. Do I know you?"

"MacPherson is the name. Glenn MacPherson. Good to meet you, Mr.?"

"Busby."

"Mr. Busby. Tell me Mr. Busby, are you happy with the way things are going around here?"

"Oh, it's O.K. I mean it could be a lot worse."

"Don't you think it could be a lot better?"

"What do you mean?"

"Well, wouldn't it be nice to have some lights at night? Why don't they bring those generators into town? I mean we haven't seen so much as a glider since the day of the rocket attack. Why can't they bring them back here so we can use them?"

"I'd guess that it's a better idea to keep them out on the ridge where they are going to be needed."

"We could get them out there if we had to, and still have lights at night."

Busby knew it was useless to try to tell a civilian about military necessities. So he kept silent.

"Ah. Your silence tells me you can't argue with what I'm saying. And can you tell me why that Bob guy, and his friends have the choice pick of all the places in town? What makes them so special? Mr. Busby, who is it that made this Bob guy the leader? Can you answer that?"

"He's always been in charge."

"Yeah, but did you vote for him to be the boss around here? I sure didn't. And what has his leadership gotten us? We've been attacked by the Chinese twice now. Why would they be coming here I ask you. I've never done anything to them. There can't be anything around here that they really want, so why are they attacking here? It has to be him. Even if he isn't the reason, why do we have to stay here? There's nothing around here to do, and good old Bob doesn't seem to be wanting to do anything about it."

"So what are you saying?"

"I'm thinking maybe it is time for someone else to be in charge around here."

"And who would want the job? I can't believe there are too many people that would want the hassle."

MacPherson smiled at Busby like he wouldn't have to look to far to find someone new for the top spot.

"Lets' just say that I think a vote on the matter is the best idea. After all, this is America. That's the way we do things."

"Maybe there is something to what you say, I'd have to think about it."

"Why don't you do that Mr. Busby. But don't think too long. There's others who think like I do, and things could change real fast."

Busby did think about it. It was true that nobody had cast a ballot to put Bob in charge. He just was in charge. Captain Ferguson always treated him like he was of a higher rank, and the Captain was a man Busby respected. The two of them had saved each others lives, as well as the other team members, countless times. And there was the fact that Bob was the one that got dreams and visitations from angels. No, nobody had voted for Bob. He was simply appointed to the job by the One that Busby had surrendered his life to back in the desert sand. That was enough for him.

Busby walked into the room where the Captain was sitting, drinking a cup of coffee. The Captain looked up as he entered, and smiled.

"What's the matter Busby? You can't tell me you've already been turned down by every woman in town."

"Sir? I think we have a problem."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

It was the next morning when Captain Ferguson and Sargent Busby caught up with Bob. Once they had explained the conversation between Busby and McPherson, Bob simply shook his head.

"You know Captain, in a way I'm surprised it has taken this long for people to start talking about my leadership."

Surprised at his answer, Captain Ferguson said, "You mean to tell me you expected this?"

"Captain, these people are civilians. Unlike you and your men, they aren't used to taking orders. They certainly don't like doing without all the pleasures they had before everything started. They want their old life back. Sitting in the easy chair with a drink in one hand and the T.V. remote in the other, watching the big game every Sunday."

"But they are all supposed to be believing Christians. How could they even think of questioning the man that God has put in charge?"

Bob shrugged his shoulders. "They did it to Moses. And that was after the Red Sea crossing. They had seen Gods' unbelievable works first hand. They had seen the army of Egypt wiped out before their eyes, yet they questioned Moses. Why should I expect anything different?"

"I wish I could be as calm about this as you are, Sir." was Sargent Busby's' comment.

"I'll tell you the truth, Sargent. If it were up to me, I'd let this MacPherson person have his way. Let him come up with ways to protect, feed, and otherwise take care of this group. It is a tiresome chore."

The Captain smiled, and nodded his head. "I can identify with that. Still, what are we going to do about it?"

"As with everything, first I'm going to pray. Then if they give us enough time, I'll ask Pastor Jim for some time on Sunday morning to talk to everyone at once."



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pride. It always made things easy with these apes, Ives thought to himself. He enjoyed the report that one of his servants had brought to him. Once he knew for certain where those people had gone, and realized a direct assault wasn't going to work, since they were being helped by the Nazarene, he sent out his servant to see what could be done to weaken them.

The servant had influenced a number of those people to begin to question why they didn't have the right to run things. After all, they were as good as the one who was in charge. Even better in some cases. He had caused some of them to think. Really, what were this guys qualifications? And at the same time actually believe they could have done the same, or better, believing in themselves instead of trusting the One who had kept them safe, and His servant in the town. Yes, pride was such a useful tool. He should have thought of it sooner.

Now all he had to do was wait for a little bit, and those people would tear into each other and divide themselves into at least two camps, thereby separating and weakening both camps. Hopefully, by that time the Chinese would have finally gotten through the mountains, and after their losses at that town, they would be more than willing to finally wipe it off the map, along with everyone there. Well, maybe except the women.

He had already sent his servant back to work on more of them, now if there was another way to use this to his advantage. He knew the master would be pleased, which was something he needed right now. The master wasn't happy about the failed attacks, but didn't replace him yet, because of recent victories in the field.



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Jim had just finished his sermon, on the giving of the law to Moses. He hoped that it would have the desired effect. He closed The Bible, and then spoke to the congregation.

"Brothers and Sisters, I want to ask that everyone remain outside, for something that Brother Bob has to say."

Most of the people had no idea what this was about, but if Bob wanted to talk with them, they'd listen. Bob stood on the porch outside the church, Maria at his side, and waited for every-ones' attention.

"Friends, it has been brought to my attention that there are some here that believe a change in leadership of this town is in order. It has been truthfully pointed out that I wasn't elected to this position. And it seems that there are those who feel that not enough is being done for the people here. Well, I've never claimed to have all the answers, so if there are any here that would like to address this issue, please speak up."

A murmur went through the crowd. It not like anything they had heard Bob say before. He had always lead from a position of strenght, and nobody questioned him. So what was this all about?

Glenn MacPherson moved to the front and said,

"May I speak?"

"That's why we are here. Please go ahead."

MacPherson hitched his Chinese rifle up onto his shoulder, and stepped up on the stairs leading to the porch, turned and addressed the group.

"Friends, I'm sure that we all are grateful to Bob for all he has done for us. When we were wandering the countryside, he took us in, and gave us a place to stay, food to eat, and a safe place to live."

While Macphereson was speaking, something caught the eye of Captain Ferguson. It was common practice for everyone to go armed in town, but most people simply carried a pistol. Some of the younger folks would carry a bow and arrow. But Ferguson noticed that this time there were a number of men present carrying fully automatic rifles. It made him uncomfortable. He signaled Sargent Busby to his side. After hurried whispered instructions, Busby nodded and left the gathering. The Captain turned half of his attention back to Macphereson, while keeping his eye on the rifle carrying men.

"Now friends, I ask you. Why is it that we don't have those generators here in town where they would do the most good for one and all of us?" MacPherson continued to try to turn the crowd against Bob. "Why don't we get the chance to move around outside of town, and see what is out there?"

"Ain't nobody stopping you." A voice called out. "You want to wander around, go do it."

"What if I wanted to go west? What would happen? You already know the answer to that. These soldiers would stop us, that's what."

"That's not true Mr. Macphereson. If you want to go towards the combat zone, we won't stop you. But do you really believe that is wise?" Captain Ferguson said.

"How do we know it is a combat zone? The Chinese were beaten by us, so how do we know the American Army hasn't had better luck than we have?"

"You know the answer to that. We've picked up radio broadcasts telling us that the Chinese are just about stalled out, but they are still out there."

"So you say. None of us have heard these so-called broadcasts. You people have the only radios, we haven't heard a thing for ourselves. How can you be sure you are listening to American broadcasts, and not propaganda from the Chinese? You can't know. All you have is a voice coming out of a box."

"And do you have anything better?"

"I have common sense. Like I said, we've beaten the Chinese, with almost nothing. I'm sure the Army is doing better."

"We've beaten two small elements of a much larger force. The main force hasn't made a major attack against us. If they had, we might not be here by now."

"I say that they are being defeated by our Army, and we shouldn't be hiding out here in the middle of nowhere, while the fight is still going on. We should join with the Army and repel these invaders. Not to mention that we'd have better food, and more of it. We'd have electricity. Hot showers anytime we wanted." He turned his attention to the crowd once again. "Who's with me? Who says that we replace Bob with someone that will do something more than just cower here."

"I'm with you." Came a call from the back. It was followed by more voices supporting MacPhereson. Captain Ferguson noticed the calls came mostly from the rifle carrying men.

"I say we vote on it. Right here, right now. Most people of voting age are here, lets' do it." MacPhereson challenged.

Bob held up his hands for attention. "Friends, it seems to me that the best way to do this, is to just divide this crowd. All those who want to follow Mr. MacPheresons' lead, move over to my left. Those of you who want to continue as we are, please move to my right."

There was a brief shuffle as people moved to one side or the other. Bob noticed that in some cases, those who supported MacPherson, tried to pull others to their side, but they would pull loose, and move to the right. In the end, about twenty armed men moved to the left. Everyone else, moved to the right. MacPhereson was furious.

"Can't you people see you're being lead like sheep? Can't you think for yourselves?"

"Mr. MacPhereson, it seems that you are out voted. Please don't take this any further." Bob asked.

"I haven't been out voted. You've hood-winked them. You've blinded them to the truth, so you can continue to play God over us. Well, we'll see about that. If they can't see the truth, we'll make them see."

He turned and signaled the armed group. They reached for their weapons. A blast of automatic fire ripped the ground between the two factions. Every head turned to see Sargent Busby standing at the corner of the church, with his weapon trained on MacPhereson. The other members of the Special Forces popped up from nowhere, surrounding the armed group. Every man pointing his weapon at them. Slowly they dropped their rifles, and raised their hands.

"You set this up." MacPherson screamed at Bob.

"No Mr. McPherson. You did when you had armed men come to church." Bob looked at those to his right. "What do you folks say we should do?"

"Shoot them." Came a call.

"Why?"

"Bob, don't you think they were going to do that to you?"

"Possibly. But the truth is that no one was hurt. I can't order a mans death without a cause."

"Bob." Came another voice. "You've always done the right thing. What do you think we should do?"

"Yeah. We sure can't trust them after this. You can't just turn them loose either. So what do you think we should do?"

"There is an answer. The way I see it, these have placed themselves outside of Gods' will. They have turned their backs on Him, so we turn our backs on them. Banishment is the way. Cast them out from among us. They don't want to do things Gods' way, then let them follow their own way, somewhere else."

It didn't take long before the chant went up.

"Cast them out! Cast them out!"

Bob waved the crowd to silence, then turned to the men.

"You will remain here. One at a time, you will be escorted to where you live. You may take with you, only those things you brought with you. Everything else remains here. As soon as all of you have your possessions, you will leave this place. If you ever return, you will be shot."

[day late]

The wound on Glenn MacPherson's' arm had started to bleed again. Of the twenty or so men that had been cast out of the town, there were only three left, that he knew of for certain. And it had only been four days since they were cast out. He couldn't believe he had made such a mess of things. He couldn't fathom what had made him believe that he would do a better job than Bob had done. But he knew he would show Bob who was the better man. He thought back over the time since that day.

True to his word, Bob had allowed everyone of them to collect what they had brought with them into the town. He had allowed them to take two canteens of water per man. He had also allowed them to each have a pistol, and two magazines of ammunition. When he had protested to Bob that they needed rifles, Bobs' answer had been short and to the point.

"Not a chance. We don't need you guys sitting up in the hills, playing sniper and taking pot shots at us. Besides, if and when the Chinese come back, we'll need them."

"We won't stand a chance without rifles. You have to give us at least a couple."

"I'm giving you a better chance than you were going to give the people of this town. No rifles."

As they left, Bob had even seen to it that they were given a map, and the general areas where he knew where water could be found, within three days march on foot to the east. It didn't take one day for things to start going down hill. They had left around the middle of the morning. By noon, some of the men were already complaining about not having hats to protect them from the sun. By sundown, tempers were already growing short. That night wasn't any better. First they had trouble starting a fire, and then after they got one going, they realized how it gave away their position to anyone within sight of it, they fought over how big of a fire to have. They ended up agreeing to a small fire, and that was when they realized just how little food they had with them.

MacPherson decided that first thing in the morning, they would have to do some hunting. When he announced this, he ran into more problems.

"Considering the mess you've made of things, who are you to be in charge around here?" One of them shouted at him. "You told us that we'd be on top of things, and now we are stuck out here in the middle of nowhere, with nothing."

"Fine, you don't want to hunt, you don't get a share of whatever we get. For that matter, if you aren't going to help, you're no use at all. We don't need a slacker dragging us down." With that, MacPherson shot him. "Is there anyone else that doesn't want to do his share?" He asked angrily.

There was no answer at that time, but by the time they woke in the morning, six men had left the group in the night, taking more than their share of the food and water with them. At first, they all started to try to track them down, but it soon became clear that the thieves had a several hour head start. MacPherson talked the rest of them to continue their trek eastward.

As the day went on, they grew hungrier and thirstier on the short rations. By nightfall the next day the remaining fourteen men were barely speaking to each other. Nobody felt like starting a fire, and the last of the food was soon gone, since none of them knew anything about hunting, no game had been taken. MacPherson checked the map, and told them water should be only a few miles ahead the next morning. With that news, three of them decided it would be better to move at night, while it was cooler, to find the much needed water. The rest of them didn't feel like arguing with them.

On the morning of the third day, they all started out, following the map. Within a couple of miles they found a body. It was impossible to tell how he had died. The animals that found him hadn't left much. As they checked around, they found footprints, running from the scene of the death, with what seemed to be dog footprints following. MacPherson gave up on finding the other two alive, and directed the remaining members of the group towards the waterhole they were looking for.

It was nearly two o'clock, he figured, when some of them decided that he didn't know what he was doing, or where they were going. The group divided almost in two. A man named Brian shouted at MacPherson.

"What an idiot you are. They give you a map and you still can't find where you're going. For the life of me, I can't understand why I let you talk me into this. Give me that map. I'm leading from now on."

He grabbed at the map.

"Like hell I will."

MacPherson pulled it away. The two men began to fight over the map. They went to the ground. From there, MacPherson lost track of what happened, but the next thing he knew, shots were being fired all around him. One round hit him in the arm, and he went down. He pulled his weapon and fired at anyone that moved near him. By the time it was over, seven men were dead.

Somehow Brian managed to escape without a scratch. He picked up the map that had been dropped in the fight. After checking for landmarks, he signaled the other two men to follow him. He started to walk away in the direction he believed water to be. That was when Macpherson aimed his pistol and shot him in the back.

The last two men turned to find MacPherson aiming at them.

"Give me your weapons." He demanded. They complied with the demand. He picked up the map, and said, "Now, follow ME."

They started walking again. It was only twenty minutes later they found a small lake.

"Now, tell me I don't know what I'm doing." Was all he said.

All three of them dove into the water, and drank their fill. While it was welcome relief, it didn't stop their hunger.

Still they stayed there for the night, and in the morning, started out again. MacPhersons' arm had started bleeding again that morning. As the three men continued eastward, towards a town that was just few miles more, according to the map, MacPherson began to think about how he would turn in Bob and the rest of them. Then he would lead government troops to the town. He would only ask the pleasure of killing Bob himself. Well, that and his share of the loot. That was all he could think of now. The thought even helped to block out hunger. He was so engrossed in his thoughts of revenge, he failed to notice the movement in the bushes around them. He was still in his fantasy of how painful Bobs' death would be, when the dogs attacked. They were thirteen miles from the next town. The demon that had so poisoned MacPhersons mind, left to return to his master.



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Ives wasn't really disappointed with the report from his servant. True the leader that was becoming his obsession was still alive, but the group had been weaken. He had his servant go back to the town. Pride had done some damage to them, not as much as he had hoped for, but some. Now they would use fear. Fear had always been such a useful tool. He instructed his demonic servant in the best ways to put fear in the minds of the people. To give them wild imaginings. Cause them to be unsure of their leader. Did he really know what he was doing, since he had to throw out the others. Could they hold out in this nowhere town. Why should they try? After all, they could have more of the comforts they had enjoyed before if they just went to a larger town, that was still part of the grid. But he had to move quickly, before those people had a chance to start praying to the Nazarene.



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

"Hey, Dad. Have you got a minute?"

"Sure Alex. What's on your mind?"

"Well, I'm kind of concerned about Mike. I mean she's O.K. from what I can tell, and Kathy says that morning sickness is normal for a lot of women, but I'm kind of worried about it. What was Mom like when she was pregnant with me?"

"I wish I could help you Son. Your mother was unusual. She never had a moment of morning sickness with you. She had a few cravings, and even those weren't for anything unusual, just at strange hours of the day and night. Why don't you just trust what Kathy tells you. I mean, a woman doesn't have four children without learning a thing or two, even if she is a doctor."

"I know. It's just that lately I've been kind of worried about her and the baby, that's all."

"Trust The Lord, Son. He made women, and knew that this would happen when he did. And trust your doctor. Try not to worry, and if it gets to be to much, pray about it. After all 'Perfect love casts out all fear."

"O.K. I'll try."

That was the first 'odd' conversation that Bob had that day. People kept coming to him with questions and concerns about things they had never mentioned or thought of before. Was there enough water for the people of the town? Was there enough food to see them through the coming winter? When would the Chinese return? Did he think the men they had thrown out would either betray them, or come back with others to kill them all? Anything and everything that might be a concern, Bob was being questioned about. Finally, he went to see Jim.

"Afternoon Jim. Got a minute?"

"Don't tell me you're worried about something too."

"That's what I thought. I am worried about something. I'm worried about all these people who keep coming to me with the strangest concerns. I gather that you have been going through the same thing.'

"Very much so, I just didn't know it was happening to you as well." Jim looked at him closely. "Do you mind telling me what they have been asking?"

Bob told him of the peoples worries, starting with Alex and working through the list.

"That's what I thought. Exactly the same for me, except I had Michelle asking me about her pregnancy. You realize what this means, don't you?"

"I'm not sure, but it is a strange thing for certain. Very unusual."

"Unless I miss my guess, we are under some kind of demonic attack. I'd like to get everyone together, tonight, and talk with them. Could you put out the word for me?"

"Certainly."

As the sun was setting, the majority of the townsfolk gathered at the church. Jim was brief. He told them about what was happening. He told them that The Lord had warned about such groundless fears, and how to deal with them.

"Let me finish tonight by saying that I'm calling for a solemn assembly. I want to ask you all to join with me tomorrow for a day of prayer and fasting. Praying for The Lord to remove these fears from our hearts, and our minds. Asking for the Holy Spirit to guide us back into a perfect trust in The Father."

Some of the people began their fast that very night.



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Ives' demonic servant, didn't know what to think. He had told Ives about what he had experienced. It had gotten uncomfortable just before he had left one evening. The next morning, as he tried to return to the town, he couldn't even get close. It was like running into a brick wall. There was no avenue he could use to get to the towns people. He just couldn't understand it. Things had been going so well the day before.

Ives knew what had happened. Those people, those monkeys, had appealed to the Nazarene for help. Now he had placed a wall of protection around them. He knew very well what had happened. The same thing had happened to him once. Back when he was riding with Saul of Tarsus on the way to Damascus. He'd never been hurt so much since they had lost the war for the Throne that the master wanted so badly. While he was musing over these things, the servant quietly slipped out, unnoticed.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Ives gave his problem long and careful thought. He couldn't keep the master pleased, or at least not angry with him, much longer. The Chinese had stalled out in their drive into the mountains, just short of the continental divide. He had to come up with a way to disrupt the American forces from behind. The thought also occurred to him that he would also have another chance at that town.

The question was how. What could he do to cause such disruption, that while the Americans were trying to get it sorted out, The Chinese could take advantage of the situation. Something nagged at the back of his mind. Then he remembered. Claire had an idea. Find an excuse to call up the civilians, arm them, and send them to the front. Of course, what Claire had done was his ruination. What he had to do was get the people moving, without arming them, and still cause trouble.

Slowly a new idea began to form. What if he sent the civilians to the front, to be trained by the American forces? And what if he reminded them about the rewards for capturing or killing Christians? Especially if he suggested where they might be hiding out. He began working on the announcement.



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

"Captain, Can I talk to you for a moment?"

"Anytime, Bob. You're the Boss."

"That's still hard to get used to. I feel like I should look over my shoulder to see who you are talking to. Anyway, I was thinking. It's been awhile since we've been attacked from the west. From what we've been picking up on the radio, the American forces seem to be holding their own. but our enemy isn't limited to just Chinese soldiers. We have to remember that being a Christian is illegal now. And I've been praying and thinking about it. What if anti-Christian forces come at us from the east?"

"It would certainly put us between a rock and a hard place. Have you come up with any ideas?"

"A few. First of all, we have about fifty men capable of fighting. But I'd like to avoid that if possible. If we subtract you and your men, we are down to a little over forty. I'd you to divide your men into teams of two. Each team will take a group of men, and train them well enough to impersonate actual soldiers."

"Bob, it would be easier to make them into soldiers, than trying to just fake it. We would also have the advantage of an actual force we can work with. Anyone can be a great soldier in the barracks, but it's another matter when the bullets start to fly."

"When you put it that way, it makes a lot of sense. I admit having a force like that would make me feel better. The point is that we could start doing some real patrols around here, and with your men leading each of these squads, we'll have a much better chance of pulling this off. The way I see it, we can't use the old 'Bio-Hazard' routine any more since the main road is blocked off. We need another dodge. That is where I'm coming up short. A new idea I mean."

"Let me think about it. Largely it depends on the situation. If we run into another unit, we'd better have soldiers to use. If it is a bunch of civilians, we'll have trained men to deal with it. One thing though. What about the women. I know there are some that are willing to do whatever it takes. Your wife for example. You aren't thinking of keeping them out of it are you? I don't think they'll take kindly to that."

"No. We won't leave them out, but from what I've seen and heard, women aren't sent out on patrol. We'll use them to guard the town, and a reserve force, if it comes to that." Bob was thoughtful for a moment, then spoke again. "Captain, this is totally under your control, and I wouldn't think of telling you your business, but wouldn't it make things better if you had an officer as your second in command?"

Ferguson smiled, "It would, and I've been thinking that Busby would make a fine lieutenant. But if possible, it looks better if civilian authority recommends the promotion. Officers are appointed by the president you know."

"We don't have a president anymore, as far as I know."

"True. However we do have a civilian authority in this town, don't we? As far as I'm concerned, you have the power to do anything from testing and then to promote, right up to battlefield commissions."

It was Bob's turn to smile. "Very well, MAJOR. See to it."

Ferguson saluted and responded. "Yes Sir. And thank you."

"You've earned it."



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

It took a month before Ives was ready. When he was, he made sure that everyone would know about it. The notice from Director Ives was posted publicly and spread by word of mouth all over the western portion of the former United States.

NOTICE:

The Director of the western region hereby declares, and makes it known;

The American forces engaged in the mountains have stopped the advance of our enemy. These brave men and women have put up a valiant fight to preserve our lives, peace, and safety. In the face of overwhelming odds, they have prevented the Chinese forces from moving inland any further, and continue to fight to regain the land we have lost in this war. I know that all the people of this land wish to offer them our thanks, and whatever support that we can give.

But this victory has come at a high price. Many of our finest have been wounded, and even killed in this fight for freedom. Their numbers have been reduced to the point that new soldiers must be trained, and brought into the fight against the aggressor, if we are to win.

I know that you, the people of this great land, have given much to preserve this land of freedom and opportunity. Now, I must ask for you to give one more time. Not food, money, or possessions, but to give yourselves for the future welfare of your families. Your wives, and children. The enemy has been stopped, but to drive them from this land, we must have more soldiers.

Therefore, I'm asking all who have any military experience, and any others willing to join in the final push to rid this land of these aggressors to come to the city of Fort Carson, Colorado, for training and deployment. Even if you are in poor health, you can use a typewriter, and be a clerk, thus freeing a trained soldier for duty on the front. Everyone can do something to further the war effort. We need cooks, truck drivers, and persons of every type to refill our ranks.

Will you step forward and be a patriot? Or will you choose to be like those cowardly Christians? Those who hid and let others do the hard work of freeing this land. If you know any of these people, you know what the true creators, our brothers from space, have said about them. Let them give up their religion and join us, or let them be destroyed. They are the ones at fault for all of these troubles. If they hadn't clung to their false ways, the enemy would have never invaded, because we would have been too strong for them. We would have been contacted sooner, and would have had the means of defending this land from all enemies.

I remind you of this, because it has come to my attention that many of them have sought refuge in the mountains of the western states. As you come to Colorado, let no town or village go unsearched. Root them out, so that we know the only enemy will be in front of us.

By Order of Director Ives,

Director of the Western Region.



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bob turned off the radio after the announcement had been read.

"If anyone had any doubts before this, I'm sure they are gone now. Ives has pulled out all the stops in an effort to get us, and any other Christians in the mountains, just like Claire did back east." He shook his head. "Major, how long before your men are ready for what's coming?"

"If it is just civilians, we're ready now. Thank The Lord, most of our men are vets. So for them it was really a refresher course in being a soldier, and getting them back in shape. And with a little extra training from those of us in the S.F. they pulled it off in quick time. And the gillie suits help a lot as well. By the way, I've been meaning to ask you. Where did you learn to make one? You said you ere just a regular grunt."

"Truthfully, I wanted one for years, but they were kind of pricey. So, I studied up on how they were made and did it myself." Bob smiled at the memory. "Nancy thought I was a little crazy for doing it, but I got it done. Now I'm glad I did."

Bobs' mind drifted back on the making of the suit. He had taken an old pair of pants, and a shirt, then sewed lines around them, with embroidery thread, making the stitches about four to six inches apart. Then he had bought a couple of burlap turkey blinds, and unraveled them, thread by thread. Once that was done, he cut the threads to lengths of eighteen to twenty-four inches long, and died about have of them. Then came the long part. He took each thread, folded it in half, then pushed the loop under the stitching, and brought the loose ends up through the loop, and pulled it tight. All told, it took him about three weeks working in the evenings and at nights to get it done, including the hood he wore over his hat. But it had been worth it. He remembered how one time while hunting, two other men walked up close enough to him, without seeing him, that they almost jumped out of their skins when he greeted them.

"What about regular military forces you might run into?" Bob asked.

"Honestly, I don't think that will be much of a problem. They are at the front, and they'll have their hands full between the Chinese and their new 'recruits'. And I even have an idea of how to make them look the other way."

"How's that?"

"Why, we tell them the truth. We're looking for Christians."

[day late]

Surreal. That was the only way Lieutenant Busby could think of to describe the recent past. First was the day he had gone from a Staff Sargent, to a First Lieutenant in one day. O.K. that was different, but not unknown in a battlefield situation. Then he and another team member had been given fifteen civilians and told to turn them into soldiers, A.S.A.P. He thanked God that most of them had been in the service at some point, and already knew a lot of the things he was supposed to teach them. Things like how to move forward while under fire. How to make a camp that won't be seen, and break camp so that nobody would ever suspect that they had been there. How to follow a road without actually walking on it, by moving parallel to it, and avoid being seen. These men in turn helped to teach the ones who had never served a day in their lives. Things went quickly and well, and his two squads were ready by the end of the third week.

While going on a long range patrol was something he knew well, normally the team would be dropped off, and picked up by helicopter. Right now, his thighs were telling him that he had a long way to go before he could consider himself any kind of horseman. He was sure that his men felt the same way. But to their credit, none complained. On the day they had left town, he'd looked back at the men following him, and couldn't help but think they looked like they were in an old John Wayne movie. Sixteen men, on horseback, riding off into the brush, looking of hostiles. He had questioned the Major about bringing one of the microwave weapons, and it's generator, but the Major had insisted.

"Busby, lets' hope it isn't needed. But if you run into more than what you are expecting, that thing can be used against people. It won't fire them the way it does electronics, but after a few seconds of it, they'll want to be someplace else. Just set it up in an overwatch position before you engage the enemy."

Busby shook his head, and grinned at the thought. Horse soldiers with Chinese made automatic and microwave weapons. John Wayne would be proud.

Then there was what happened yesterday. They had been out for four days, without seeing anything except wild animals, and birds. On the second day they had taken a deer to supplement the rations they were carrying. They got up on the third morning, donned their gillie suits, and began again to parallel the road once again, about forty yards from it. The suits were hot, but by leaving the front of the shirt open, and being on horseback, it was at least tolerable.

Once again they came to a ridge-line. It had already become almost a habit by now that when they came to one, the main force would stop under cover, while he and, what was that mans' name? Foster! That was it. He and Foster would ride out to just below the crest of the ridge, dismount, and slowly walk up to it, to peek over to see what might be on the other side.

This time they saw, alright. They saw a group of ten to twelve men moving down the road, towards them. Busby knew they were almost certainly civilians by their lack of discipline, not to mention the way they were dressed. They were moving slowly because some of them were on foot, while some rode horses, and some rode in an mule drawn wagon. Suddenly one of the men in the lead called a halt.

"Alright. You guys in the wagon, the ride is over. You guys on foot, you're turn to sit for awhile."

Busby was impressed. As he signaled Foster to move back to the rest, He thought about it. Whoever this guy was, he was looking after his men. Making sure they all arrived at the Colorado Springs/Fort Carson area in good shape. He would bare watching.

The men gathered around Busby, at his signal. "Alright. It looks like we have twelve men coming this way. Who has First Squad?"

"I do, Sir. Chaplin is the name."

"O.K. Chaplin, look here." He drew a line on the ground, and then a 'V' intersecting it. "I want you to take both A and B teams of fist squad. Cross the road, and spread your men out in a line on the other side, like this." He indicated one side of the 'V'. "I want no less than five yards between men. Take whatever cover you can find, get down, and don't move. Murphy." He called to his S.F. team member.

"Here, Sir."

"You take both teams of second squad and do the same on the other side. Put yourself in the middle of the line. Now, you men, this is the first time you've done anything like this. I know you are nervous. Just Murphy and myself. Don't do anything we don't. If the shooting starts, just make sure of your targets before you pull the trigger. Any questions?"

"What about us, Sir?"

Busby looked at the two men assigned to the microwave.

"Position yourselves here." He made a dot in the dirt map just about Murphy's' squad. "Make sure if you have to use that thing, you don't cook any of us. And for heavens' sake, DO NOT start that generator unless the shooting starts. Any more questions?"

There were none.

"Move out."



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Terry Buckley was proud of himself. His group had been on the move for a little over a week, and he hadn't lost anybody, and they were all in good shape, and spirits. They knew that their goal was only a few days ahead, and they had enough food and water to reach it with a little to spare. Then they would finally have a crack at those Chinese. Teach them who not to invade. Shame they hadn't been able to locate any Christian though. Still, things were going well, and looked to continue that way. But when they came over the last ridge, they saw the two men sitting on horses in the middle of the road. As they got closer, Buckley could clearly see the two were in uniform, and showed no signs of getting out of his way. He waited until they were within five yards of them before he called a halt.

"What are you men doing on this road?" Busby demanded.

"We're on our way to Fort Carson to join up, and fight the Chinese."

"SIR!"

"Excuse me?"

"You're on your way to join up and fight the Chinese, SIR! Or are you so blind you can't recognize an officer when you see one?"

"Hey we're civilians. I don't have to salute you yet."

"We are, and have been for some time now, under martial law. That makes a buck private your superior. Do I make myself clear Mr.?"

"Don't give me that crap. Like I said, we're civilians. Besides, there's twelve of us and two of you, out in the middle of nowhere. What do you think you're going to do about it?"

Busby sneered at Buckley, then said, "I'll show you. A team, First squad, B team, Second squad, on your feet, take aim."

Buckley knew real fear for the first time as the bushes on both side of the road stood up and aimed their weapons at him. He thought quickly and said, "Buckley. Names' Buckley, uh Sir."

"Mr. Buckley, let me inform you of something. From this time on, you will obey any order given to you at any time, by anyone wearing a uniform. Understood?"

"Yes Sir."

"Good. My men and I are looking for Christians, so get those men out of the wagon. I want them lined up on the side of the road, with five yards between them."

"Yes, Sir. Alright. You heard him. Out of the wagon, line up."

The men hurriedly did as they were told, while looking into the brush, wondering how many more rifles were trained on them.

"Alright Buckley, I'll start with you." He sternly looked Buckley in the eye, and asked softly, "Are you a Christian?"

"Oh hell no, Sir. I always thought there was something strange about them."

Busby grunted, and started to turn away.

"Is that all you're going to ask, Sir?"

"Buckley, you better get your head on straight, before some Chinese takes it off. Christians can't deny their God. If you ask them, they have to tell you, because they can't lie about it. It would send them to hell."

"Sir, everyone here has been asked about that."

"Buckley, do you plan on making a career of questioning orders from your superior officers? If so, I want to tell you that is a good way to get yourself in heaps of trouble real quick. Now, SHUT UP and get back in line."

Busby turned to his left. "First Squad, team B, assemble on me."

More bushes stood up and moved to the Lieutenant.

"Follow me." Was all he said. Busby, moved down the line of men, stopping briefly in front each one and asked them. "Are you a Christian?"

Most of the men immediately denied it. However he found four men who's' answers were evasive. He signaled men from the team, two at a time, and they escorted these four out of the area. Having finished his questioning, Busby returned to the front of the line.

"Mr. Murphy, I've taken four of your men that I want to question further. If they aren't Christians, they will be freed to return to you. If they are, you won't have to worry about it any more. Now listen carefully to what I'm going to tell you. There is a pass up ahead that has been completely blocked by a landslide. Unless you want to abandon this wagon, and anything you can't carry, turn that thing around. Go back about ten miles, and there is a fork in the road. Take the east road. It is clear. It will take you a longer time to get to Carson, but the way is clear. Now get moving."

"Yes Sir." Murphy turned and ordered his men to either remount or get back in the wagon. Then they turned around and started back the way they came.

Busby waited until the wagon had disappeared over the rise, and then waited some more. Finally a bush stood up and waved at him. He waved the man to come back. Then he turned and walked into the brush towards the waiting frightened men. Since there were four of them, they had been put together, two together, in separate places, and held under guard. He went to the nearest two.

"The reason you are here, is because I didn't like your answer when I asked if you were Christians. Understand me gentlemen. We can't afford having the wrong men set free. You will give me a straight answer to a straight question, or I will shoot you where you are sitting. You." He pointed to the man on his left. "Are you or are you not a Christian?"

"He is. I heard him praying last night." The man on the right said. "Shoot him."

"If that is true, why didn't you turn him in?"

"Turn him in where? We've been on the road for over a week. I was going to turn him in as soon as we got to Colorado."

"So how do I know you're not one of them? That you're not trying to throw me off the scent?"

"Sir, I always believed what I believe is my business, not anyone else has a right to know. I just didn't realize how serious you were, or I would have told you."

Busby turned back to the left hand man. He was sitting quietly, holding his head. He seemed to be praying.

"Well, how about it? Are you a Christian?"

"I believe in The Father, Son, and The Holy Spirit. If that is a crime, I plead guilty. Shoot me if you must."

"You see, you see, he admits it. You have to take care of him Sir."

"Don't worry, I will." Busby pulled his pistol and shot the man on the right in the head. The Christian looked stunned, and started to speak. Busby covered his mouth with his hand and said, "Not a sound. Understand me?"

He nodded his head. Busby stood up, and made his way to the other two men. They had had a chance to talk to each other, and come to an agreement. When Busby entered the small clearing where they were being held, they stood together.

"Sir, I am a Christian. If I have to die for that, I am ready."

The second man simply said, "Blessed be the name of The Father, Son and Holy Ghost."

Busby looked at their guards and said, "Bring them."



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

It had taken the most of the rest of that day for the men to realize that they weren't prisoners. That they were in fact free men once more. Free to worship God as they had always done. Not in secret, but in a gathering of brothers and sisters in The Lord. They happily joined in when grace was said around the fire at supper that night.

When Busby had left town, he had been at the head of a column of sixteen men. But the time he returned two weeks later, there were twenty three men, seventeen women and girls, and of all things, a cat. A pet of one of the younger girls. How she had managed to keep it hidden and feed, Busby couldn't guess. He spied the Major as he rode in, and rode over to him after giving orders to his men to see to their guests.

"Lieutenant, what on earth is all of this?"

Sir, with your permission, I'd like to take care of my horse, and clean up a little. Then I'll give my report."

"Take your time Busby. Tomorrow is soon enough."

"Yes Sir. Thank you Sir."

He turned and rode towards the stable. Wondering just how different things could get.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Early on the morning of the third day after Lieutenant Busbys' return, there was a knock on the door.

"It's open." Maria called.

The door opened, and Major Ferguson and Lieutenant Busby stepped in.

"Good morning Ma'am. I hope we aren't disturbing anyone."

"Not at all, Major, Lieutenant. I assume you want to speak with Bob."

"If it's not a bother, Ma'am."

"Major, the only bother around here is you. You know my name, use it. When you call me 'Ma'am' you make me feel like an old woman. At my age, that's not a good idea."

"I'm sorry, Ma... Maria. I meant no offense."

"None taken Major. You've never been married, have you?"

"No, I haven't, Maria. I never found a woman that could put up with me."

"I find that hard to believe. I think you just weren't looking."

"Maybe so, Maria, maybe so."

"Maybe what?" Bob asked as he entered the room.

"Oh, I was just nagging the Major about finding a wife." Maria said.

"I think I'm going to stay out of this one. Morning Major, Lieutenant. What can I do for you?"

"Morning, Sir. I'm sorry it has taken this long, but we have a report about the Lieutenants' patrol for you."

"Good. I've been waiting for it. So, what's the story?"

"Mostly good news. The Doctor, Kathy, has gone through all of the usual chest thumping, say ah, turn your head and cough, kind of thing on all of the people the Lieutenant brought in, and they all seem to be in good health. The worst thing was treating the wounds on the wrists and ankles of the women from their chains. Other than that, everything looks O.K. physically. Also, everyone of them claims faith in The Father, Son, and Holy Spirit. We've checked them on that, and they all really are Christians.

"That's good to hear. How about the men? Are they willing to help out around here, and are all of them willing to accept the situation as it is?"

"Sir, they are so happy to be here, they'd accept a dirt sandwich at this point."

"Well we'll have to keep an eye on them for awhile. We don't need someone making trouble like we've had recently."

"Funny you should mention that. Lieutenant Busby has news of our old friend, Mr. MacPherson. Lieutenant."

Busby Looked at the floor, and then put his hand into his pocket, and pulled out a pistol.

"Sir, do you recognize this?" He handed the weapon to Bob.

Looking it over carefully, Bob noticed the grip of the pistol had the letters GM carved into it.

"Didn't this belong to MacPherson?" He asked.

"I believe so, Sir. It is hard to say. There wasn't much left when we found it."

"You're losing me Lieutenant."

"Well, Sir, we'd been out about ten days when we found what was left of some people. The animals didn't leave much, just some bones, and what they couldn't eat. That was near one of the bodies. The slide was locked open. The magazines we found were all empty. I don't know what happened, but he didn't go down without a fight."

"Well, we know he wasn't a coward. Stupid, maybe, but not a coward. So what else can you tell me about what is happening out there?"

"Sir, I think it is best if I start at the beginning. As you know, we left here to patrol to the east, looking for anyone that might cause us trouble. During the first eleven days, we came across eight groups of men headed for Fort Carson, and the front. Each time, we laid an ambush for them and let them walk into it. Once we had them stopped, we did as the Major had suggested. We told them that we were on patrol, looking for Christians. Then we would separate them, and question them individually. Most of them denied both The Lord, and Christianity right off the top. In some cases it seemed like each man was trying to out blaspheme the one before him. Once in a while, we'd find a man or two who wouldn't actually deny Christ, but wouldn't admit to being Christians themselves."

"That seems reasonable, given the circumstances. Are you certain they didn't deny Him?"

"Yes Sir. That was one thing we were very careful about."

"Not to offend you lieutenant, but how did you do that?"

"No offense taken, Sir. Basically I gave them no where to go. They had to declare for The Lord, or against Him. I told them I wanted a simple answer to a simple question. 'Are you a Christian?', either answer yes, or answer no. If they gave any other answer, I'd shoot them on the spot."

"Isn't that rather harsh, Lieutenant?" Maria asked.

"I don't think so Maria. We have reached the point in history where either you are on The Lords' side, or you're against Him. It is time to take a stand. That is what I made them do."

"Lieutenant, what happened to the ones who took a stand against?" Bob wanted to know.

Busbys' face took on a hard look. "They are still out there on the prairie. Feeding the scavengers."

"You killed them?" Maria gasped.

"Maria, you have to understand something. If you leave a known enemy behind you, an enemy who has sworn to kill you, then you are going to die. At a time and place of his choosing. I'm not going to expose my men, this town, or myself to such an unacceptable risk."

"I suppose you're right. It just seems so cold blooded. I mean you didn't give them a chance, did you?"

"You're wrong, Maria. When we first stopped these convoys, they had a chance to declare for or against. If it was against, in order to keep our cover, we'd let them go. It was only the suspected Christians that we questioned further. By the time we were done, there wasn't any doubt that we were Christians. We couldn't let them go, only to have them send others after us."

Bob interrupted the exchange. "What about the women? How did you happen across them?"

Busby looked disgusted. "Sir, have you ever seen those wagons they used in the old west, to transport prisoners?"

"Yes. Well at least pictures of them. They were iron cages on wheels, with nothing overhead, except bars."

"That's it. Except they had put a canvas cover over the tops of these wagons. There were two of them, with eight men. One each driving the wagon, two out front, two bringing up the rear, and an outrider on each side. Sir, I take no pleasure in killing. In this case, however, I'm glad we did what we did. Not only were the women locked inside those cages, they were shackled together. They couldn't get to the water barrel, and had to depend on the men to give them a drink. Gave a whole new meaning to the expression,'hell on wheels'. Sir, we never gave them a chance. They rode into the ambush, and we shot them. Two rounds per man."

Busby shook his head at the memory, and continued.

"Sir, I have to tell you, what happened next was just so unreal. Once we made sure all the men were down, we found the keys. We unlocked the cages, and tied the door open, then unshackled the women. They thought we were some sort of bandit gang and we were going to do who knows what to them. They were all praying, and reciting psalms, and you name it. They couldn't believe that they were being freed. It wasn't until we started to move, with the chains off, and the doors open that they began to settle down."

"I'm sure I already know, but tell me. Where were they taking them?"

"Because they were Christian, and had the misfortune of being attractive, they were on their way to the front, to provide rest and relaxation to the men there. That was the only purpose in their lives anymore. They were told, if they didn't satisfy the men, they wouldn't have any other reason to be allowed to live. To prove it to them, just before hey left, one of them was taken from the group, and told to preform certain acts to please the head man in the convoy. When she refused, she was shot on the spot."

"What have we become?" bob said to himself.

"Sir whatever once was America, is no more. I could understand it, if the men had been Chinese, but these were American men. It makes me ashamed."

"Major. Obviously, we have large numbers of men wandering around out there. What are your thoughts on keeping them away from here?"

"Sir, Busby has already done something about it. They backtracked those convoys, and put up a sign warning of a pass, blocked by a landslide, at a fork in the road. So, everyone is being diverted to the eastern road. That should keep them at least another forty or fifty miles from us. But I think it would be wise to continue to patrol out there, just in case."

"I agree. Very well, I leave that in you hands. When is the next patrol going to be ready to go?"

"They left yesterday."

"Good. Now what is being done for the new arrivals?"

"Kathy thought it would be a good idea to just let them get to know us. Talk with some of the people around here, that sort of thing."

"Sounds like a good idea to me. Is there anyone talking to them now?"

"Kathy thought the sight of a pregnant woman and her husband would be the quickest way to show them we intend no harm, so Alex and Mike are with them right now."

"O.K. I hope they don't have any problems."



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The community center had been changed once again. Now it was a makeshift dormitory for the newest arrivals. Alex and Mike, who was starting to show her pregnancy, sat speaking with them.

"So, how did you two meet?" One of the women asked Alex and Michelle.

"Truthfully, the first time I laid eyes on my lovely bride, she had a shotgun in my back, and was threatening to shoot great big holes in me."

"What!"

"Alex! You were about to shoot my mother."

"Say what?"

"That was because she was going to shoot my father."

"What the...Wait a minute. Are you two serious?"

Alex and Mike burst into laughter. After regaining control of themselves, they explained the strange circumstances of their first encounter.

"So, obviously, it all worked out in the end."

"Not without a few bruises, I have to say."

"Now, Alex. I apologized about that."

"I know, Sweetheart, but my arm was still in a sling for the rest of the week."

"O.K. Hold it. What is this all about?"

Alex smiled. "That was my fault really. You may have noticed a shortage of grocery stores around here. We've had to rely on The Lord to provide. Mike and I went out to find editable wild plants, which are pretty abundant around here. While we were out there, I put my arm around her waist. Next thing I knew, I was face down in the dirt, and Mike was trying to fit my left elbow into my right ear. Not a good fit, I have to say."

The woman looked at Alex. "Are you sure it's safe to sleep around her?"

"Oh, it's O.K. She has promised as long as I'm a good boy she won't beat me up any more."

Mike slapped him on the arm. "Alex. Be nice or Momma WILL spank."

"Yes Dear."

At this they both began to laugh again. It wasn't long before chuckles were running through the group as they witnessed the cheerful playfulness of the young couple. Before long, they were all begining to feel, if not at home, at least safe and welcome.

[day late]

What had started out as simply friendly conversation between Alex, Michelle, and the crowd of newcomers, slowly changed as time went on. It began with questions about the two of them.

"So just how did she beat you up? You're bigger than she is."

"She has a black belt."

"When are you expecting to have you're baby?"

"Did your parents ever work things out?

As it continued, the tone of questions changed.

"What about police protection? Are there any police around here?"

"How about water? We have to have it. Is there any kind of water plant here, or do we have to actually go out and get it from a well?"

"What happens if we run out of food? You don't expect us to go out and really kill something, do you?"

"What do we do about homes? You can't expect us to all stay here indefinitely."

"What do we do about power? Winters' coming, and we need heat for our homes."

"How about schools? Who's going to teach the children?"

They did their best to answer all the questions, but it seemed there was always one or two more. After what felt like forever, Alex excused the two of them on the excuse that Michelle needed to rest. As they started back home, Alex shook his head and told his wife,

"I've got to apologize to Dad."

"For what?"

"When I was growing up, Dad always had the answer for everything that happened, either good or bad. There was always something he could and would do about every situation. I always took it for granted. No matter what happened, Dad was always there, and would handle it."

"That's just being a kid, Alex. I did the same with my father."

"Maybe, but I haven't changed, even after we got here. I believed Dad would be more than able to handle whatever. But after what we just went through, I think I have a better understanding of how tough all of this has been on him. And I never gave it a thought before this. I mean Dad has always been Dad. Do the job, do the best you can, and don't complain about what you can't do anything about. I never knew."

Michelle hugged Alex a little tighter.

"I think he understands. But it wouldn't hurt to let him know how you feel now."

"I think you're right." He looked up and smiled at her. "That's why I married you. You've got a good head on those pretty shoulders of yours."

"Other parts aren't too bad either, you may have noticed."

"I have. Believe me, I have."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Major Ferguson had taken Bobs' advice seriously. About half way through the mornings talk, he had slipped in, to quietly listen to what was said. Now he sat with Bob, and Maria telling of what he had heard.

"Bob, I just don't understand these people. Less than a week ago, they were either in hiding, or prisoners. Now they want police protection and all the civil services that were falling apart before the invasion. What is wrong with them?"

"Ever hear of a horse running back into a burning barn? Much as I hate to admit it, most people are the same way. In the back of their minds, they have always believed that one day things will return to normal. They haven't yet learned that from here on out there is no normal, except what we can make for ourselves. And even that will depend on the situation at the moment."

"Given the situation they were in, I just can't figure out what they are thinking."

"Ah, but that is the problem, isn't it?"

The Major looked at him, unasked questions plain on his face.

"Years ago, I was a really big science fiction fan. I recall reading one book where the author wrote something along these lines.

'Most people simply don't think. They prefer to stumble along through each day without a thought about tomorrow. Of the remainder, who actually can think, most try to twist facts to fit their own ideas of how the world should work. Only a small percentage actually do think, and do it accurately each time, accepting facts for what they are, instead of what they want them to be'.

And that is our problem. We have terrified horses, running back into the familiar setting, rather than accepting that setting has not only changed forever, but it has in fact become deadly to them."

Absentmindedly, Bob reached around, and tried to scratch the scar on his back. Maria, knowing that this meant that he was considering what he was going to ask The Father, walked up behind him, and gently took over the task.

"Thank you Dear. Still Major, they have a point. There is a lot to do around here. I can't think of everything, let alone try to get it all done. If you'll excuse me, I think I have to have a talk with The Lord, and find out what He wants me to do."

"Certainly, Sir. I hope He answers soon."

"As do we all. As do we all."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bob was awake and fixing breakfast the next morning, when Maria joined him. She knew he had an answer to his problem, by his cheerful whistling.

"So, what was it this time? A dream, vision, or visitation?"

"Good morning my lovely. Tell me. have you ever been reading The Bible and have the words just jump off the page at you?"

"Are you speaking literally or figuratively?"

"Figuratively this time. I was reading about Moses last night. All of a sudden the answer was right there in front of me. You know Solomon had it right. There is nothing new under the sun. Everything that will happen, already has happened."

"Bob, I'm always happy when The Lord shows you what to do, but sometimes, afterward, you're real hard to follow."

"Don't worry Honey, all will be made clear soon enough."

It took the rest of the morning, but by shortly after noon, everyone not working on a detail for the benefit of the entire community assembled once more at the front of the community center. Bob waited until he was sure most of the people were present, before he began to speak.

"Ladies and Gentlemen. Your attention please."

The crowd quieted in order to hear him.

"As we all know, our population has been growing beyond our expectations. We have been blessed with a number of people in differing fields of endeavor. We've been joined by an engineer, a couple of electricians, carpenters, and others with useful skills. Believe me when I say that those of you who have these skills and others I haven't named, you are all most welcome here.

Now as we all can tell, winter will be upon us all to soon. I'm certain that we all have concerns about it. I know I do. Ladies and Gentlemen, I'm just one man. I want to meet and get to know you all, to find out what your needs are, and what can be done about them. But my time is limited."

"You've done alright so far Bob. All of trust you to make the right decision." Came a call from the edge of the crowd.

"Thank you my friend, but how can I make the right decision for everyone, when I don't have the time to talk to all of you?"

"What do you have in mind Bob?"

"Look around you. We are no different than any other social group. We have done like anyone else would. We've begun to cluster in groups in which we have common interest. People from the southeast, gather together and talk about old times. It is the same for those from every region of the country. I suggest we divide ourselves into groups based on geographical origins. Then each group chooses someone from among them to sit on...well, call it an advisory council. The people of your choice, will note your concerns, and then the council will sit with me to decide the best course of action."

"Excuse me, Sir. I just got here. I don't want to offend, but how can we be sure this council won't be just a rubber stamp for whatever you want to do?"

"A fair question, asked openly doesn't offend. The only thing I can think of is that none of the original group, or of the military men will be able to sit on the council. I've already spoken to them about it and they agree with me. Council members will come from among you."

"What about you, Bob?"

"The Lord has chosen me to lead here, but he never said I couldn't ask for help. I'll sit as the head of the council, until such time as The Lord replaces me."

"How many councilmen/women or whatever do you think we should have?"

"I'm thinking six. One each from the southeast, the northeast, north central, south central, Northwest, and Southwest. That seems to be a good place to start."

The talk went on for most of the afternoon. The people liked what they heard. Later that evening, Maria asked Bob a question.

"Are you sure you're done the right thing?"

"If not, I'm in good company. Moses did the same thing, in dealing with the Children of Israel. I guess it'll work for me. I know it will lower my tension level. Now I only have to deal with six people, instead of one hundred and sixty."

"That must be tiring. How could you do all of that without losing your mind? I mean all those complaints, the attacks, these new patrols, and who goes on them. I'm glad at least some of that stress is off of you."

"Well, we'll have to see what happens, but I won't be trying to answer every little thing that comes up anymore. A lot of that will be done by the council members, and they will only be bringing me the important things."

"Well, that's good. I think you need to spend more time with family. Especially now."

"Uh oh. What did I miss?"

"Kathy says she thinks Mike is going to have twins."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

The good thing was the master wasn't angry. The bad thing was he wasn't pleased. Ives knew that, after all, he had planned to eliminate most of the people in this country. Now that the population had been reduced by nearly fifty percent, he was at least satisfied with that progress. What he was dissatisfied with was the fact that by now, he had expected all of those followers of the Nazarene, those monkeys, to be all dead. That hadn't happened yet. Ives knew that the Nazarene had been helping them. And now, with the first snows of winter threatening, and very few vehicles available to track those apes down, progress would be slowed even further.

That had him worried. How would he eliminate them, when his people couldn't move because of the weather? On the other hand, if he found any of their hiding places, like the one in the mountains, they wouldn't be able to move either. That would give him the chance to get his people in position before the weather lifted, and they could escape. Perhaps that would keep the master from punishing him. But to make sure, he needed a plan to deal with them, when the chance came.

Then he remembered. The Russian troops that had invaded from Canada, and stalled out during the summer months, could be diverted to the mountains, still coming in from the north. They were used to and trained in winter fighting. They would be able to get through the mountains, even in deep snow. All that was necessary was to leave enough troops to keep the Americans in the Mid-West tied down, and move the rest into an area they knew how to fight in.

He began to call for weather reports. He had to make sure of when those people were snowbound, and have his men in position to take advantage of the situation.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

When the men of the Special Forces arrived, Bob thought it wise to inform them of the underground room at Todd's' house. After looking it over, the Major decided that the best idea was for him to move into Todd's' house, but to keep the room a secret from the rest of the people in town. He was sitting in the living room, when Bob knocked on the door.

"Afternoon Major. Have you got a minute?" Bob asked.

"Any time. What can I do for you?"

"First of all, I want to thank you for all you've already done. You've saved our bacon more than once, since you've been here. And that is why I came. With winter coming on, what do you see as the biggest problem we have, militarily speaking."

Ferguson pointed at a military type radio in one corner of the room. "I've been listening to that. From what I've been able to pick up, we don't seem to be in any immediate danger from the west. American forces actually are making progress towards pushing the Chinese back into the Pacific. Not much, mind you, but some." He smiled. "It would seem that Director Ives may have some explaining to do. What is that old saying? 'The best laid schemes of mice and men oft times go awry'. Ives called for men to go to Carson. They went in droves. Now it turns out they became decent soldiers in a pretty short time, and the Chinese are paying for it."

He paused for a sip of coffee, then continued.

"Speaking of the Fort Carson area. They've still got a lot of men training down there. They aren't ready for action just yet, but it is only a matter of time. We need to keep an eye on them. We still have men patrolling to the east. While the number of men going to Carson seems to have slowed, we can't be sure of that. It is possible that the warning sign that Busby put up is still keeping them away from us. We still run into men moving towards Carson from time to time.

What has caught my attention is to the northeast. American forces have recently started making gains in the border area between North and South Dakota. Again, not much, but they are making progress. What I've found disturbing, is when they over run a Russian camp, as they have done."

"I'd think you'd be happy about that."

"Normally, I would. But as you've said, nothing is normal anymore, and never will be again. The thing that bothers me is after they occupy the camp, it looks like there are far fewer enemy soldiers than there used to be. They have found places where there used to be tents, and such, but now it is just empty ground."

"You think the Russians are being moved somewhere else."

"Yes, I do. The question is where are they going, and why?"

"So what are you thinking?"

"There are two possibilities. First they are moving eastward, in a flanking move. Trying to get around the Dakota lines. But that would require boats. They'd have to cross Lake Michigan. Trying to do that is inviting disaster. Shore batteries on the American side would make short work of them. The other option is that they are moving westward. Trying to break out somewhere in the Rockies. If that happens, we could be in trouble. The Russians are excellent mountain fighters, and they are used to fighting in deep snow. Look at what they did to Hitler."

"Is there anyway you can find out for sure?"

"Right now, all we have to go on is radio intercepts. And frankly, I can't sit at this thing all day long and just listen. There are still men and women that need training."

"What would it take to train people to take a turn listening for activity?"

"A couple of years, I'm afraid. It takes awhile to learn Russian, and that is going to be our best chance to find out what they're up to, and we may not have that long."

"What about listening to American outposts along the boarder? If one or more of them were to suddenly drop out of contact, wouldn't that tell us something?"

"It might. But it could also be nothing more than equipment failure. Like I said, listening to Russian transmissions is our best bet."

"You also said we can't do that. Major, for the first time, I'm giving you an order. I want you to get the number of people you think it will take, and begin training them on radio operations, and what to listen for."

Ferguson looked at Bob and smiled. "I thought that is what you would say. They begin training tomorrow morning."

Very good. I see you have it well in hand. So, I'll stay out of your hair. Right now, I have to let people get into mine. The first council meeting start in about twenty minutes."

"Want an armed escort?" Ferguson joked.

"Not this time, but hold onto that thought, I might need them in the future."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

The lunch counter at the general store had been chosen as the meeting place for the advisory council. By the time Bob arrived, three members of the council were already seated. Soon after he got there, the remaining members got there. He noticed the group was evenly divided between men and women. Three each. Once everyone was in a seat, Bob addressed the group.

"Friends, before we get started, I want to go over the ground rules, so we're all on the same page. This council IS NOT here to get answers to every little piddling problem your groups might have. You are here to advise me on major concerns that the people have. Things that affect the welfare of the entire community. What do I mean by that? For example, if your neighbors have a problem with a little old lady that feels two A.M. is the prefect time to pull out her trombone to practice for the concert next Monday, you deal with it. We are here to deal with important issues."

"You mean we have to handle problems too?"

"That's right. Welcome to the frying pan. If you are unwilling to take on this responsibility, then call your groups together and find someone who will. But, for now, what do we have today?"

"Wait a minute. What authority do we have?"

"You were chosen by the people. That gives you the authority. Now who wants to go first?"

"I will, if nobody minds." Foster spoke up. Everyone remained silent, so he continued. "Brother Bob, right now we don't really have a problem, but winter isn't far off. What happens if it is a hard one. The wells around here might just freeze solid. What do we do about water?"

"My wife is a native of these parts. I think you should talk to her."

"No offense, Bob, but what would she know about it? I mean they had electricity back then."

"I'm sure they had to face this before. Winter storms have taken down power lines before. She'll know what to do, and advise you on how to get it done."

"I'll look into it."

"Good, next problem?"

"Brother Bob. Some of the people around here don't think that they should be called on to hunt for food. They believe that should be a job for someone else. What about that?"

"The Apostle Paul once said that if a man doesn't work, then neither should he eat. I think that applies in this situation. If they aren't willing to kill and butcher their food, then they better get started on green houses and putting in a crop to see them through the winter. Understand, Ladies and Gentlemen, we must pull together if we are to stand any chance of getting through the winter, let alone the rest of the Tribulation. Anyone that doesn't feel like they should do their share, needs to find some place where someone is willing to take care of them."

"Brother Bob. I don't think that's quite fair. There are some people that do jobs that help out all of us. There are a few women around, that I know of, that used to home school. I've talked with Sarah Timmons, and some of the others. They are willing to start some kind of school for the children, so you can't expect them to drop everything, grab a gun and run off into the bush."

"You're right. I didn't think of that. Alright, how does this sound. Anyone not engaged in some activity that benefits the entire community will be expected to hunt. Not just for themselves, but for the ones that can't go hunting. The teachers, Kathy, the doctor, and anyone else whose duties are more important than just simple make work."

Words of approval went around the table. They were starting to like the ideas presented. One of the women choose this moment to voice a private concern of her own. One which had been bothering her since she found out about it.

"Brother Bob, What do you think we should do about people that,..well...aren't really suited to be members of our community?"

"I'm afraid I don't follow you."

"You know. People that aren't, well, good people. Ones that say might have been involved in something illegal before coming here."

"Ma'am I'm afraid you are going to have to be a bit more specific. Just who and what are you talking about?"

"Alright, I shall. There is a woman here that before this, was engaged in the sex business. I don't think we need that sort around here."

"Do you mean she was a prostitute?"

"Well, yes, but I just didn't want to say it."

"In this town, there are eighty women, and sixty men over the age of fifteen. We have no money of any sort, and all commerce is done by barter. I find it hard to believe that any woman could make a living in that profession. Are you certain that she is still doing this?"

"Well, no. I can't say I know that she is still working, but you know that type. Once they are that way, they never change."

"Truthfully, no. I don't know that type. I've never employed or associated with prostitutes. And I won't ask how you know about them. However, this is a serious matter. Have the woman brought to me here, tomorrow at nine in the morning. I will ask for a few witnesses to be present, and I will question her."

[day late]

Anna Rodgers walked into the general store at shortly before nine A.M. as she had been told. When she entered, she saw four people. Two men and two women. The older man she knew was the head man around here. Bob was his name she remembered. She also recognized the doctor that had looked her over when she first arrived in the town. The second woman she didn't know, but she looked to be a girl really. The only face she knew that she thought might be friendly was that Lieutenant that had rescued her and the other women from the 'whore wagons' as she thought of them.

"Please come in and have a seat." Bob told her. "There is one more person coming, then we can begin."

"I don't know why we are even bothering with this." Anna said. "We all know why we're here. Just go ahead and toss me out, that's what you want to do, isn't it?"

"Miss Rodgers, before yesterday I'd never even heard your name. Now why don't we wait another minute or so for the last member of these proceedings to arrive?"

Just at that moment, Mrs. Molton came through the door. She had clearly taken time to put on make up, and in a time and place where women's clothing was on the more practical side, she found a dress for the occasion.

"Mrs. Molton. I'm glad you could make it." Bob said. "Since you are the one who has brought this charge against Miss Rodgers, for the sake of everyone here would you repeat it?"

"Certainly." She pointed at Anna. "This woman doesn't deserve to be in a town with decent people. She is a prostitute. She'll corrupt the moral fiber of everyone she comes in contact with. She should be banished. That's my vote. Banish her and any others like her you find."

Anna was about to speak, when Bob beat her to it.

"Mrs. Molton. You seem to be suffering from a misconception. You don't have a vote on this matter. You are the one who has brought the charge, and your own words show that you have tried and convicted her already, and are ready to execute the sentence. You are here, only as a witness to the truth, if any, of the charge you have brought. You are not here for any other reason. Do I make myself clear?"

"What do you mean I don't get a vote? You told us just yesterday that we had to make choices about how things are done around here. I certainly should get a vote about this."

"As I said, you are mistaken. Your job as an adviser to me, is to take responsibility for things within your group. That is not the same thing as making tough choices that affect the entire town. That is what The Lord put me here to do. Now please, calm down, and let us begin."

"Wait a minute. You mean that I can't have any say about this harlot?"

Bob dropped his head and sighed. Then he looked at her again, and spoke.

"Mrs. Molton. We are trying to determine IF any action should be taken, and if so, what that action should be. Right now you are trying to take over these proceedings, and run things your own way. I will not tolerate that kind of behavior. You shall not be allowed to usurp the authority that was placed in my hands. What is more, if you do try to run this show again, I will ask Lieutenant Busby to escort you from here, by force if necessary, and you will only be allowed to return if and when your testimony is called for. Do I make myself clearly understood?"

"I still want to have my say."

"You can want whatever you please, just be quiet and let us get this over with."

Bob turned back to Anna. "Do you know why you have been called here today?"

"I think so. You want to condemn me for my former profession, and get rid of me."

"That isn't quite accurate. I believe that in all arguments, side A says one thing, side B says another, and the truth is usually somewhere in between them. Would you please tell us about yourself?"

Anna thought for a moment. There was something about this man. "I'll tell you the truth. I thought about coming here and giving you a song and dance about the poor little girl who was abused and forced into that line of work. I could have made you believe it too. Making people believe things is part of what I used to do...."

"You see! She admits it. We don't need to hear any more, just get rid of her."

Bob shook his head, and then said more to himself than any of the others, "Some people just refuse to learn." he looked at Lieutenant Busby. "Would you escort Mrs. Molton outside, and have one of your men hold her there, unless and until we call for her? Then bring yourself back here."

"Yes Sir. Mrs. Molton, will you come with me?"

"You can't do that. I have a right to be here."

"You've forfeited that right by trying to disrupt these proceedings. Take her outside."

Busby grabbed Mrs. Molton by the arm and half dragged her out the door. She was stammering and sputtering all the way. A few moments later, he returned, and took his seat.

"I'm sorry for that outburst Miss Rodgers. please continue."

"Where was I? Oh yes, I could lie to you, but I won't. I had a good childhood. We were very upper middle class. Some people called it border line rich. The summer I turned fourteen, my brother was sent to a posh boarding school, Mom was always busy with some excuse or other, and Daddy was always working. It left me with a lot of time, and nothing to do. Then the boy next door, of course, introduced me to sex. His name was Gerald. I found out something that summer. I liked sex, a lot. I liked Gerald too. We swore we would be married one day, so why wait? The next year he moved away, and we never saw each other again.

When I started high school, just like the neighborhood, it was a border line rich school. That is when I found out something else. Many of those boys were willing to pay me for having sex with them. I didn't ask for it, they just did that and give me expensive presents. Turns out I liked that as well.

By the time I started college, I have a degree in business management by the way, the boys were willing to pay even more than in high school. Since I liked it, and the money, I thought, why not? Everyone got what they wanted, and everyone was happy. I didn't see any harm. I don't know when or how it happened, but one day I woke up with lots of money, things, and living the good life. And I was miserable.

Then one day I met a man. Curtis wasn't interested in having sex with me, but he was very interested in me. Well, my soul at any rate. I'd never met anyone like him. He was teaching me about Jesus, when everything started to happen. He had to go home, to take care of his parents. That was the last time I saw him. I didn't forget him, or what he was trying to show me about God. I kept studying on my own during the day, and working at night. Then came the day, I knew I just couldn't keep going on like that. One thing or the other had to go. I gave up my profession.

Then came the day when being a Christian became illegal. I still had many powerful and rich contacts. Some of them even offered to take care of me if I would just give up my faith. I couldn't do it. Next thing I knew, I was in a 'whore wagon' headed for Fort Carson. I'd lost everything, but it didn't matter. I had Jesus. Then there were gunshots, and the Lieutenant and his men came out of the bushes, and next thing I know, I'm here.

So, that's it. Now you know. Yes, I was a prostitute, but no more, and never again. Do what you must, I won't change my mind."

Bob cleared his throat. "Miss Rodgers, may I ask you to wait outside while we discuss what we've heard?"

"Alright." She left, head held high.

Bob looked at Barbara. "What do you think?"

"Mr. Bob, I don't even know why I'm here. What could I tell you?"

"Barbara, you are the only one here with any knowledge of that life. I know it wasn't your choice, or you fault, but I believe your insights would be helpful."

"I believe her."

"Why?"

"I wasn't really a believer when I was brought here. I knew about Christianity, but didn't really believe. I do now. I feel the way she does about some of the things she said. Like the last part. I'd never go back."

"Thank you. Kathy what do you say?"

"Did you notice how from the very beginning she referred to her profession in the past tense?"

Bob nodded.

"If she were still doing it, she would have probably slipped up somewhere. She didn't. I believe her."

"That's two. Lieutenant?"

"Sir, I was watching her eyes. She looked right at us. She didn't try to hide them. You know what The Bible says, the eyes are the windows to the soul, I believe her."

"Very well, that makes four. I believe her as well. Would you ask both ladies to come back in please?"

Mrs. Molton was the first one to return. She stormed in, and sat in a huff. Anna walked in behind her, and sat on the other side of the room.

"Miss Rodgers, I guess the only thing I can say is welcome to our community."

"You're joking! How can you welcome this...this harlot into our town? Have you gone mad?" Mrs. Molton stormed.

"Mrs. Molton. A harlot in Jericho saved the Hebrew spies sent by Joshua. A woman caught in the act of adultery was forgiven by Jesus. There are many other accounts in scripture where people that we might not think of as being of high moral fiber, were changed forever by our God. We believe that this is the case here. Miss Rodgers has shown every sign of being a sinner in repentance. We all agree, she should be given a chance. If you don't like that, I'm sorry. Sorry for you that is. Sorry for someone with such an unforgiving heart.

Miss Rodgers, We do welcome you. However you must realize that there are going to be some people that aren't to happy with that idea. I offer you three choices. First, you may stay with the group you are currently in. Second, you may try making your way in another group, knowing everyone there will know everything that has been said here today. Third, you may choose to leave this town, in which case we will do everything we can to help you find another place to live, and help you get there."

"Do I have to decide right now?"

"Of course not. It is a big decision. Take your time."

"Thank you. Thank you all, for having faith in me."

The door suddenly opened, and the Major came in.

"Bob I hate to disturb you, but there is something that needs your attention."

Anna looked at the Major. Her eyes grew wide.

"Gerald? Is that you?"

Fergusons' head snapped around, and he looked at her.

"Anna? Is that really you? I've missed you so much."

Anna looked at his uniform. "Have you?" She turned to face Bob. "I thought there were only Christians here."

"Anna what are you talking about? Of course I've missed you. I've always wondered what became of you."

"You're in the Army. The Army is hunting down Christians and either capturing them, or killing them."

"Miss Rodgers." Bob spoke up, "Things aren't quite what they appear to be. You, above all people, should understand that."

"O.K. I'm listening."

"Anna do you remember this?" The Major reached for his wallet. He reached in and pulled out half of a penny. "I still have mine. Do you?"

Anna remembered. Just before Gerald had moved away, he had taken a penny, and cut it in half. He gave her the other half. Something to remember him by. Something to show that they hadn't forgotten what they had meant to each other, all those years ago. She reached into her shirt, and pulled a chain out that had two things hanging from it. One was a cross, the other was a half of a penny, circled in gold and hanging by a loop.

"I remember. But I don't understand."

"Miss Rodgers, if I may." Bob said, "The Major and his men were given a choice. Give up their God, or give up their rank. They choose to side with God. He is still an officer, just not with the U.S. Army. He serves The Lord, by helping us."

"How can I be sure? I mean so much has happened."

"Miss Rodgers. I realize that all of this is a bit much to take in all at once. I will tell you that I don't believe in coincidences. I believe The Lord has it all under control. Think about it. What are the odds that Major Ferguson, Gerald as you've called him, and you would even be here? And yet you are. Clearly there is much to think about. I suggest that you spend the next couple of nights with my wife and myself. We have a place just down the road from the Major. It will give you a chance to think, and for the two of you to get reacquainted."

"I don't know. So much has happened since then. Maybe we aren't meant for each other."

"Then why did you keep the other half of the penny?" asked Ferguson.

She smiled at him. "You know what they say, hope springs eternal. Alright. I'll do it."

"Good. Now that that is settled, Major, what was it that you wanted?"

"Oh. I almost forgot. We've picked up so radio traffic you need to know about."
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
After the meeting had broken up, Bob and Major Ferguson went to the Majors' home. When they entered, Bob was happy to see a half dozen people listening to various radios, or to Lieutenant Busby, as he explained what was needed.

"So, what do we have, Major."

"It's nothing concrete, but look here." He pointed to a map of the Canadian and U.S. boarder region, on the wall. "We know that certain Canadian stations are working with the Russians. Because of their lack of security precautions, we believe they are civilians that have been put into service by the Russians. Sometimes they say things that a professional wouldn't. From that, we can get an idea of what is happening up north.

Now we picked up a transmission a few days ago from a station we know is broadcasting from the Winnipeg area. They talked about a need for large amounts of supplies that needed to be ready for a near future operation. We thought, at first, it would be another push into the Dakotas', but nothing happened. So we kept listening for any other such announcements. Yesterday we got an urgent call for large amounts of water purification equipment over here, in Regina. That's nearly three hundred miles to the west." he smiled and said, "It seems some dirty rotten Americans did some pretty bad damage to their water works."

"Hm. That would indicate that you were right. They are moving a major force to the west. Any thoughts of where they might be headed?"

"Again, nothing concrete, but there has been another call today for large numbers of tents and heaters, over here." Again he pointed to the map. "This is a place called Medicine Hat. If it was me, at this point, I'd divide my force, and send half down this way into eastern Montana, and the other half over to a place called Lethbridge. From there, they can come down through the western central portion of Montana into the Rockies."

"Why would they divide their force? It would seem to me that a larger force would almost guarantee success on an operation."

"That would depend on the size of the force, and the nature of the operation. We haven't gotten anything about the size of the force that is on the move, only indications that it is pretty big. Given that, we have to move on to the second question. What are they planning? Since we know that it is a big force, they will try to get as much out of it as they can. Once a force of any size manages to break through the lines, they can raise all kinds of trouble in the enemy rear, and cause an entire section of the line to collapse. But this seems to be large enough for that along the Dakota lines, with plenty to spare. So, what else could they be up to? It would make sense to me that they would move down into the plains, and eastern portion of the Rockies.

Once they get into the plains, they can move fast, and cover a lot of ground in a short time. Kind of like the German blitz in WW II. If they do that, they cut off major food resources to the Americans, and disrupt their lines from behind. Not only along the Dakota front, but perhaps all the way down to Colorado Springs, and Fort Carson. Should they manage to pull it off, we are pretty much done for."

"What do you think we can do about it?"

"As a fighting force, nothing. There simply aren't enough of us to do anything except die. However, I think I still have some people that will listen to me in the Dakotas. I want permission to try to contact them, and warn them of what I see coming.?"

"How would you contact them?"

"It would almost have to be face to face, which is why I wanted to talk to you. I know, I know. It is a big risk, but if I were the person I'm thinking of, I wouldn't believe a voice over the radio, would you?"

"I suppose not. What if you are captured?"

"That won't happen."

"Major, there is no way you can be certain of that."

"True, but I've been on more than one long range patrol. I know what I'm doing." He paused, looked Bob in the eye, and spoke again in a very calm and clear voice. "Bob I've been doing this for a long time. I've forgotten more about this line of work than most people know. At least I've tried to forget it. If it comes to that, I assure you, anyone trying to capture me will pay a very high price for their effort. I will not go quietly."

Bob nodded, understanding his meaning. "I guess there is only one thing left. I suppose you are going to pray long and hard before you leave."

Ferguson smiled. "Standard procedure for every mission."

"Well, we'll be praying for you until your return."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

The blizzard that had suddenly blown down from the north had slowed the Russian advance, but not halted it. Director Ives knew it was the work of the Nazarene. Most of the American scalar weaponry had been put out of action by this time. What they had left was used only sparingly, and then against the east and west coasts. That was O.K. He would show that Nazarene that he was someone to be taken seriously. The Russian commander had reported that they would take between three and four more days, before they were in position to the southeast, and southwest of Lethbridge to begin the attack. That would put they two days behind schedule, but since it was before the attack actually began, that was acceptable.

Just as long as they didn't slow down again after they started until they had made a minimum of four hundred miles. That would put them well below and behind the Dakota lines, and force the Americans to weaken their western lines by diverting men away from there, to meet the new threat. Then the Chinese could stop retreating, and take the offensive again. With the Americans caught in the cross fire of the wedge shaped area they would still control, they would have to fall back, or lose a large portion of the Army they had left. Not to mention the bonus of taking control of certain weapons and munitions plants that were operating in the mountains.

Soon, he thought. Very, very soon, and America would be a foot note in the history books. He felt so good about the plan, that he decided to take the night off, and enjoy himself. He called his secretary, and ordered a suitable girl be brought to the estate he had taken over for his personal use. It was nice there. Nobody around for a couple of miles to hear the girls' screams, except his servants. But they wouldn't say anything. They always enjoyed his leftovers so much.

[day late]

He waited in the dark, near the agreed meeting place. His contact wasn't easy to convince, but eventually Major Ferguson did it by reminding him of the past. He had gotten near the Dakota line, and then started to send out a signal on the military radio he had with him.

"Blacksnake, this is Viper Three. Come in."

"Unknown station, Blacksnake is no longer a valid I.D. Please consult your C.E.O.I."

"I know it is no longer valid. I'm trying to contact someone from Iraq."

"Wait one."

"Unknown Station. How did you get these identifiers?"

"I told you. They are from Iraq. There is someone who used Blacksnake in a previous operation. I need to speak with him, A.S.A.P."

"Wait one."

Shortly the radio came to life again, this time with a familiar voice.

"Viper Three, if you are who you claim to be, identify yourself."

"I pulled your backside out of the fire down by the river in Fallujah."

"Viper Three. I remember. Good to hear you again. What is on your mind? Over."

"Sensitive intel. I need a face to face with you. Over."

What followed was a discussion about where, when, and how to meet. Now he waited in the dark. As he did Major Ferguson couldn't help but think about the day before he'd left. He remembered the conversation that he and Bob had, had.

"What about Miss Rodgers? Do you plan to just walk away, without a word?"

"Oh no. We'll have some time to talk. But lets' be honest Bob. We haven't seen each other in over a decade. If anything happens to me, she won't lose much. I've been out of her life for a long time."

"Right. Sure. And that's why she kept a half of a penny around her neck for all this time. You must have made quite an impression on her."

"It was young love Bob. Do any of us ever forget our first true love?"

"I guess not."

He and Anna had spent many hours talking as he gathered the things he would need on this patrol. He wasn't shocked at her former profession. He'd been places, and seen things in his career that would leave most people speechless. He was a bit surprised that Anna had taken up the profession of her own free will, but such things were not unknown. He was also a bit surprised when she didn't have many questions about his life in the service.

"Gerald, I've known a few men from the service. Some of them needed real help and others, well, they didn't sleep well at night. I've heard enough from them that I think I have a good idea of what happened to you. I know I've heard enough that I don't want to hear any more, unless you need to talk about it. I'm a very good listener."

He didn't need to talk about it. He'd made his peace with God long ago. He rarely had nightmares anymore. But that worried him sometimes. What kind of man was he becoming?

He stopped worrying about it as he heard a vehicle approach. Ducking a little lower in his hole, he pulled the mylar blanket closer around his head, to avoid giving off a heat signature that could be detected with the proper equipment. The Hummer stopped at the agreed place, and the engine was turned off. The Major waited. Shortly a man got out of the passenger side, which told Ferguson that the man wasn't alone. He walked around to the drivers side, and spoke with the driver.

"Any sign of him?"

"No Sir. I think we are all alone out here."

"If this is who I think it is, you won't see him, until he wants you to see him. Sargent, take this thing half a mile back down the road. Wait there for me to call."

"Sir, I'm not real comfortable with that idea. Maybe I should just hunker down in the seat and wait with you, just in case."

"Sargent, if this is who I think, he already knows you're here. I'll be fine. Just do as I told you."

"Yes Sir."

The vehicle started, then slowly turned around and moved back down the road. The officer looked around in the dark, then paused to light a cigarette. It glowed brightly in the dark. Major Ferguson waited until the cigarette was finished, knowing that even the small amount of light it gave off, could be used to illuminate him in the night. Shortly, the officer tossed it to the ground, and crushed it out.

"Alright, Ferguson, if it is you, The cig is done. Come on out."

Quietly Ferguson stood, and moved towards the other man.

"Just being careful."

"Always a good idea. So it is you. What are you doing here, and where have you been?"

"Major Grimes, I've been on a listening post, out west of here. I have information that the Russians are trying to flank you in a 'Hail Mary' like we used in the first Gulf War."

"It's Colonel now. What gives you that idea?"

Major Ferguson explained everything he had learned to Colonel Grimes, as he had to Bob, and a couple of other things he had picked up before he'd left. He finished, and waited for Colonel Grimes to speak.

"Last I heard you were dismissed from service for being a Christian. Why shouldn't I shoot you where you stand?"

"Two reasons, Sir. First of all, you would loose a potentially valuable asset on your western flank. Second, that has been tried before, and I'm still standing."

Grimes smiled at the Majors' frankness. He found it refreshing. "Very well, why should I believe you?"

"What do I have to gain? I've already told you that I'm to your west. What is my benefit from bringing you closer to my area of operations? Another reason, is that ,yes, I'm a Christian. I'm also an American, and I have no love for the idea of my native land being over run and occupied."

"Alright, Ferguson. I'll have my men check this out. if it is true, I'll cover your back, this time. If you come across any other intel you think I should know, I'm now Black Goat. From here on, you are Angel One."

"Don't take to long in checking it. From what I've heard, the only reason the operation hasn't started yet is the blizzard that blew in from the north. As soon as it clears enough, they will be on their way."

"Ferguson, do you know why I came here tonight?"

"I was wondering."

"You know I have no love for you people. But you have always been straight up with me. So I have to tell you something. I'll do what I can for you if this pans out, BUT, should we ever meet on the field, I'm going to do my best to kill you."

"I wouldn't expect less. Neither should you."

Again, Grimes smiled at his honesty. "I won't. Good luck to you."


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The blizzard lasted three days longer than expected. Ives was very unhappy at the delay. At least he couldn't be blamed for that, by the master. He had no control over it, outside of the temporary control of scalar weapons. Weather like this was totally controlled by that hated Nazarene. He knew this to be true, because it had taken the lives of three of his scientists to prove it to him. It was so unfair that He had so much control over things like this. What was Ives expected to do against such opposition?

On the good side, was the fact that the weather had also slowed the American advances against the reduced Russian troops along the Dakota front to a crawl. With winds like they had, their remaining aircraft hadn't been able to do more than a few harassing sorties. Even the artillery had been affected. The Americans weren't able to get a satellite fix on Russian positions, so the firing had almost stopped.

Of course the storms had prevented him from getting up to the minute fixes on the Americans as well, but there was no reason for them to suspect this change in plans. Besides as long as they were still having some small success on the front, they wouldn't be looking for this little surprise.

Finally, the Russian commander reported enough of a break in the weather that the advance could begin, even without the satellites. They would just do it the old fashioned way. Roll forward, and over anything that got in their way. Ives agreed and gave the order to advance.


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The Russian units moved out, having been assured of only light resistance. They started into both eastern, and the western central portions of Montana. While there were mountains, they weren't as bad as the ones further west, the Americans called, most suitably, The Rocky Mountains. The advance went well for the first couple of hours. The only resistance was a few small bands of civilians, and they were crushed in short order.

The eastern flank of the advance had made it's way into a broad valley. The lack of trees in the valley made the advance roll on much quicker than if it had been heavily forrested. As the skies cleared above them, they took it as a good sign, and continued to move to the south.

On the western flank, things were almost as easy. They did have a few more mountains and valleys to deal with, but things were going well.


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The secretary trembled as he knocked on the Directors door. It wasn't good to bring this kind of news to him.

"Come in." Called almost joyfully.

"Sir, we have finally gotten the satellite imagines for you. I was told to bring them without delay."

"Bring them over here." He said as he sat at his desk.

The secretary laid them on the desk, and was looking for a way out before the photos touched it. Ives bent over the pictures, hoping to see large numbers of dead, both American and Russian. That would certainly please the master. After all, once the Americans were dealt with, he wouldn't tolerate a vast Russian Army that might oppose him. The smile quickly faded from his face. This couldn't be. He had to do something, NOW.


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

"Is everything ready?" Colonel Grimes asked his second in command.

"Just as you ordered, Sir."

"Send them to Hell."

"Yes Sir."

The major gave the order. Artillery pieces that had been stripped from the front, for this operation, opened fire on the eastern flank. At the same, hundreds of miles to the west, aircraft came up over the mountains while hugging the ground as close as they dared. At the last moment, they pulled skyward. As they continued to climb, the back of each aircraft opened, and large bladders were expelled. Once they reached their predetermined distance from the ground, the M.O.A.B. bombs began to explode.

As the fireballs from the explosions began to fade, a second wave of planes came over. With the element of surprise now gone, they flew over as high as they dared, while still having any hope of hitting their targets. Soon their bombs were also exploding over the Russian forces.

"Sir." The major shouted to Colonel Grimes on the eastern flank.

"What is it?"

"Observers report there are so many enemy vehicles on fire, they can no longer direct artillery fire."

"Have they reported any enemy vehicles leaving the area?"

"No Sir."

"Shift fire. Start at this end of the valley and walk it foreward. Cover the entire thing."

"Yes Sir."

The spotter aircraft for the attacking Americans in the west, was having similar problems, but with a different end to the day. What Russian tanks, trucks, armored personnel carriers, and even soldiers on foot, that could still move were making their way back the way they came, as fast as they could go. He reported it back to Grimes by radio.

"Have the third wave wait until they have all entered the valley, then expend all ordnance remaining on them." Was the order.


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Ives couldn't believe it. How did they do it? They didn't have a clue. No sign of the plan had been leaked. How did they know? He sat in his office, cursing the Nazarene with all the hate he had.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Anna was in the kitchen with Maria, talking when Bob walked in looking for breakfast. he heard Maria speaking.

"I know he is a good man. You'd have to ask Bob about most other things. Those two are as thick as thieves as far as anything else goes."

"May I presume that you ladies were speaking of Major Ferguson?" He asked.

"Morning sleepy head. Did you know it is almost eight thirty?"

"No, but thank you for telling me. Good thing there isn't anything pressing this morning. Good morning, Anna."

"Hi Bob. Yes, we were talking about Gerald. I was wondering if he was, well interested in any of the other women around here."

"Not to my knowledge. However he is a bit closed mouthed about anything personal. I didn't even know his first name, until you showed up. I just addressed him by his rank. He seemed happy with that, and never offered his first name, so I never asked."

"So you don't know."

"I know this much. He has never been seen in the company of any of the ladies around here, and has never asked me about any of them."

"Bob, this isn't anything 'pressing', but you need to speak with Kathy."

"Oh, is there a problem?"

"I don't know. There could be."

"I'll see her right after breakfast. Now do I get something to eat, or do I have to go out and kill it myself?"

Maria placed a plate of food in front of Bob, then said to Anna, "MEN. What would they do without us?"




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

As he had said, Bob went to see Kathy first thing after he had eaten. She invited him in, and asked him to take a seat.

"So, what's going on Kathy? Maria seemed to think it was important."

"Yes, she could say that. Tell me something Bob. When you found out that Mike was expecting, You said that you questioned the wisdom of bringing a child into the end times, do you still feel that way?"

"Much as I hate to say it, I do question the wisdom of it, but that is something that those kids have to deal with."

"Bob, it's not just them."


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bob never noticed that he passed five different people that wanted his attention as he raced home. He burst through the door with a loud "MARIA!" on his lips.

"So, she told you." she answered.

"Yes, but why didn't you?"

"I wasn't sure how you'd feel after what you said to Alex and Mike."

"Feel? Maria I love kids. I couldn't be happier."

"What about the whole end times thing?"

"I don't care. You are having a baby. MY baby. Lord, love you woman, I can't find the words for what I'm feeling. Are you alright? Come on, sit down, you need to rest." The words tumbled out of his mouth almost before he could form them.

"Bob, RELAX! I'm only a few weeks along, not an invalid. This isn't the first time for me you know."

"Yes, yes, of course I know. I'm just...well you know. But how did this happen?"

"You should know. After all, you had something to do with it."

"No, no, I mean I thought that you were old enough that you were past all that."

"I'm not that old. But if it means anything, I thought I was past it too. I guess you never know. I thought you'd be upset."

"Upset? Maria, I couldn't be happier than I am right now. Don't you know how much I've wanted this? I know, I never said anything, but if you couldn't, then why make you upset? Girl, I could walk on the moon I'm so happy."

"So do I break out the bubbly?" Asked Anna from the other room.


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Ives wasn't happy at that moment. On the other side of the door was the messenger from the master. He knew the master was unhappy with his recent performance. The Russians had lost thousands of men and hundreds of machines in the recent defeat. The Americans on the other hand hadn't lost a man, and only one of their aircraft had suffered minor damage.

"The master is very displeased with you." the messenger said as he entered.

"I know that I've failed him. All I can offer is that I was up against the Nazarene. He prevented the satellites from picking up the American troop movements, until it was to late to do anything about it."

"At least you are bright enough to know who your enemy is, not like that idiot Claire. He thought he was only up against these monkeys. What are you going to do about this situation?"

"Please give me some time. We've only just recovered our stragglers. I need time to come up with a new plan."

"You have forty-eight hours. Starting now. It would be best for you if you don't fail again."

"Thank you. I'll come up with something."

After the messenger left, Ives sat down to go over the situation once again. The Russians had not only failed to gain any ground, they had also taken heavy losses in both men and equipment. They had also lost ground to the Americans on top of it all.

He poured over the maps on his desk. Whatever he was going to do, it had to be done quickly. Not just because that is what the master required, but also because at this moment, the Americans had obviously stripped their lines of men and weapons. That gave him a window of opportunity, that he had to exploit. Then he saw it. The weak spot he had been looking for. When the Russians had moved their men and equipment to the west, they had left reserve units near Fargo, North Dakota. In stead of having them move westerly to re-enforce the lines, he would move them eastward. He picked up the phone and gave the orders. He would salvage something out of this mess. His freedom at least.


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

"So, you question the wisdom of bringing a child into these times, do you?" The voice came from behind Bob as he was already working on changing one of the rooms into a nursery.

"Hello Alex. I was expecting you to come by and rub my nose in it." Bob replied. "But you aren't going to get my goat today. I'm in too good of a mood to let anything spoil it."

"I'm not trying to ruin your day, I'm just enjoying the irony of it. I think it's cool myself. Mike is having a good time with her Mom. You should hear those two."

"Oh, I'm sure I will. What do you think about having a baby brother, or sister?"

"I think it's about time. Why didn't you and Mom have any other kids?"

"That was something that was her choice, but to be fair, I agreed with her. I told you before that she never had morning sickness. it fact, her entire pregnancy went rather smoothly. Up until the last month. You see, when a woman's' abdomen gets stretched out that far, the skin begins to itch a lot. While your mother, She itched from the soles of her feet, to the crown of her head. Poor woman was in torment. We tried everything. Ointments, creams, lotions, everything. None of it helped. The only relief she got was the shower. I'd wake up a two in the morning, and hear it running. So, after you were born, she informed me that there was no way she was going to do that again. Honestly, I couldn't blame her. I will say that later in life, she regretted the choice, but it was too late for her to try again. I've often wondered how different our lives would have been with another child or two."

"I guess we'll find out. You do realize that you are going to be a grandfather before you're a father again."

"Actually, I've been too busy to think about it. That's a strange one. Our wives will most likely raise our children together. Yet the younger one will be the aunt or uncle to the older one."

Alex laughed. "How do you manage to get yourself mixed up in these strange kind of things Dad?"

"I don't know, Son. I'll tell you one thing though. It certainly keeps life interesting."


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

It took another three days for Major Ferguson to get back from his mission. By the time he made it, everyone in town had heard of the 'Battle for Montana' as it was being called. What surprised him the most, was the fact Anna was waiting just outside of town, when he came pulling up in Bobs' pick up.

"Don't tell me you are thinking leaving us?" Was the first thing he said.

"Waiting for you actually. Mind if I ride with you?"

He opened the door wide. "Please. Climb in." Instead of heading into town, Ferguson drove slowly and took the long way around. "Have you decided to stay?"

"At least for now. Lets' face it Gerald, there are going to be a lot of people with wrong ideas about me, even after everything that's been said. I'm sure there are people with nasty little minds that have been making up things about Maria, Bob and me since I've been staying with them."

"You're probably right, I'm sorry to say. Don't worry about them. I've found those kind usually shoot themselves in the foot, sooner or later. Then only the other narrow minded people will listen to them. Even then, the others will try to prove them wrong, just so that they can 'prove' that they are right."

"Maybe so, I just wish there was something I could do about it."

"Maybe there is. I'd say that you just find some kind of job around town that will put you in contact with other people, and just be normal. The talk will stop soon enough."

"Gerald? I have to ask. What about us?"

"Is there an us?"

"I don't know. I think it's been a long time, and we've both changed a lot. Do you think there could be?"

"Why don't we just take it slow and find out. Not push it, just get to know each other again, and see where it leads."

"I think I'd like that."

"Me too."

Ferguson pulled the truck up to the shed where Bob kept it, and shut off the engine. Before he could get out, Alex came up to him at a trot.

"Major! You need to see Dad right away."

"What's the rush? I just got back."

"The Russians have broken through the American lines, and are on the move."

[day late]

Anna followed The Major, as he entered the general store. Bob looked up and said, "Welcome home Major. I wish it was under better circumstances."

"Alex was a little short on details. I thought the Russian force in Montana was in a full retreat."

"They are. A route actually, but somehow, they are making major advances in the east, according to the radio."

"Where are they, and where are they headed?"

"Near as we can tell, they started moving southeast from somewhere near Fargo, North Dakota. They seem to be headed to the Mississippi River. Best information we have puts them on the move, going down I-10 headed towards the former city of Brainerd. Any idea why they'd do that?"

"It makes sense. They could kill two birds with one stone. The northern part of the state would be trapped between the Russian army, and the Canadian boarder. Secondly, if they make it to the river, they have a passageway right through the middle of the country. I'm sure you remember the Mexican and Cuban forces were trying to come up the river. At that time, the Russians were stopped cold in the Dakotas. Now they've finally made it, and they still have the force to make it to the gulf. If they can do that, the country is done for."

"Let me guess. The people in the mountains on the eastern side of the country will be between two armies. Meaning they will have to retreat, in order to avoid capture or death. Do you think the Russians still have enough of a force to accomplish something like that?"

"Depends on what kind of forces have been brought in, and how many of them there are. Not to mention that by now, the Cubans and Mexico have had enough time to rebuild the forces they lost. They won't be as experienced, but they will be just as numerous, or nearly so. While we haven't been able to train any more soldiers. I don't count the ones that went to Fort Carson. They have most likely been deployed by now, filling up the gaps in the line with warm bodies if nothing else."

"It sounds like you believe they could take everything east of the Mississippi."

"As much as it hurts me to say it, yes I do." "What do you think would be our best course of action for the future?"

"Right now, all I can think of is to pray from a miracle."




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Ives was now starting to feel better. The Russian forces had at long last broken through the American lines. His first objective was to get them to the Mississippi River. Once there, re-enforcements would come down through what used to be the Great Lakes, And into the river. Before the New Madrid earthquake that had proven to be the undoing of Claire, That wouldn't have been possible. Then have them advance on both sides of the river. Once they reached the area near the former city of Dubuque, Iowa, then instead of striking into the center of the country, they would move towards the east. At that point, the American forces in the northern Appalachian Mountains would have no choice but to retreat to the south. That would put the entire northeastern part of the country in his hands.

The master would be pleased with that, and perhaps, he would finally prove not only his worth to him, but also the fact that he should have been put in charge of the destruction of this country from the start. The only real problem he had was getting across the river. Every bridge that had once crossed the river was either gone, or totally useless, being actually in the river due to changes in the landscape because of the quake.

Still, he could deal with that later. Right now it was most important that the next set of orders out.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Once the Russian forces had reached a point just east of Moorhead, they followed Ives orders and divided themselves into to prongs. One of them headed east for Detroit Lakes, while the other moved southeast towards Fergus Falls. Between them, they had continuous heavy patrols, in force. It gave the appearance of being a much larger force. Because of that, the military and civilian population had no choice but to leave before they arrived. The Russians were not taking any chances. At the first sign of any resistance they simply crushed it. Even a dog barking at them in the street was shot on sight.

They made advances exceeding even their hopes, after the fierce fighting they had been encountering from the beginning. On the first day of the advance, they had managed to make almost thirty miles from Moorhead. By the end of the second day, they had not only reached the lakes located between Detroit Lakes and Fergus Falls, they had nearly encircled them. Noon on the third day, had the two prongs of the attack once again sending patrols between them and the advance continued, unopposed.

It was at this time, Director Ives had the answer to his problem. On the Canadian side of the boarder, there were many cargo transports that hadn't been damaged in the quake. Many of these were flat bottomed vessels with powerful engines, or just barges. The flat bottom was important. They could make it through the areas that had remained flooded after the quake. These areas had many obstacles just under the surface of the water. Soon, the men sent to join their comrades were on their way downriver.

The men on the boats stayed close to the western shore, and avoided any small arms fire from the eastern bank that they could. They still took casualties, but the number of them was quite small. It was near noon on the fifth day, when the two forces met. With fresh men coming down from Canada, both through North Dakota, and down the river, the corridor they had cut through Minnesota remained open, and the land occupied.

Americans north of that line, in Minnesota and Wisconsin, were panicked to get out. Some tried to sneak though the Russian line. Some made it. Most died in the attempt. Some tried to run south, and beat the Russian advance. Many either waited to long to leave, or underestimated how long it would take on foot, and were trapped behind the line. Others took to the waters of the Lake Michigan, trying to reach the state of Michigan. Again, some made it, by crossing at night, without the aid of lights, and following the stars. However, many were caught in the attempt. Most of them were turned back by Russian patrol boats. If someone in any of the escaping boats were foolish enough to open fire on the Russians, the boat they were in, and any nearby, were immediately sunk and the survivors were shot in the water.

The real tragedy came when they started to reach the shore in large numbers. Their fellow Americans, being short on food and other necessities themselves, would turn them away. Any who failed to leave peaceably were forced at gunpoint, or shot if they refused to leave.



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Ives was becoming more and more like his old self as the advance continued. He was cheerful, and could often be heard laughing while he sat in his office. Even his secretary was no longer afraid to get near him. When he got the report of Americans shooting each other, he became bold enough to request a meeting with the messenger of the master.

"Why do you summon me?" He asked when he arrived.

"I wanted you to inform the master of the success I have achieved in the plan. The destruction on this country can only be a short time away."

"Fool. Don't you think the master keeps his eye on all of us? He knows of your recent gains. He also thinks that what you are doing now, should have been done long ago. You are fortunate. He has shown patience with you. Mainly because you have made some progress. But after what happened in Montana, he nearly replaced you. This advance is all that kept him from it. And don't be so confident in yourself. The Nazarene defeated you once, only using these monkeys. Imagine what will happen if He lends a direct hand in this." Somewhat subdued by the messengers words, Ives spoke again.

"Of course, you are right. I should have remembered the master watches over us all. Forgive my rashness. It was simply my happiness over making progress towards putting him on his throne."

"Never send for me again. When the master wants you to know something, I'll be back."

After the messenger had left, Ives decided that the next phase of the operation needed to be started. He issued orders that all Russian forces not currently engaged against the enemy in the Appalachians were to withdraw to the coastal areas for re-suppy, and

re-arming, before they would exploit breaches in the lines created by the forces coming in from the west. Once that was done, they would move to the north, and take control of any areas not yet under his control. And there was no need to take prisoners.

He smiled broadly as he thought of the coming slaughter. Let that Nazarene stop him now. There wasn't anything He could do about it. His men would be in complete control of the entire northeast within two to three weeks.



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

It had long been the habit of Bob, Maria, Tim, Kathy, Alex, Michelle, and Major Ferguson to get together every week to ten days, just to talk about things. On this occasion, Anna had also joined them.

Maria looked at Bob, and with a gleam in her eye asked.

"So, Bob. What's the matter with you? Aren't I enough woman for you?"

Bob choked on his coffee, sputtered a moment, and asked,

"Maria, what in Heavens name are you talking about?" Maria chuckled and said, "Oh, it's Mrs. Molton. Since you allowed Anna to stay, that woman has had nothing nice to say about you, me, or Anna. Not to mention that women outnumber men around here, by almost two to one. I think she believes you're starting some sort of sexual retreat for the men."

"Well, as you know, it wasn't just me. There were four people on the panel that made the choice. And we all agreed. How she can blame just me, I don't know."

"That's easy." Said Anna. "You're the one that tossed her out, so naturally it is all your fault."

"Talk about circular logic. Some people I'll never understand. I wonder what she is going to say when the numbers get to seven to one."

"Seven to one?" Tim asked.

"Sure. Remember what is written in Isaiah?

Isa 4:1 And in that day seven women shall take hold of one man, saying, We will eat our own bread, and wear our own apparel: only let us be called by thy name, to take away our reproach.

Which brings up a couple of other things. Major, I'd like it if you could start selecting women you feel are suitable for combat training. Michelle, you are the martial artist, I'd like you to begin working out how to teach everyone in that group what you know."

"Bob, I'm not exactly in the condition to be teaching that kind of thing right now."

"I know, but you won't be pregnant forever. After the baby comes, and you've had a chance to recover, I think it wise to begin such training."

"Why is that, Bob?" Kathy wanted to know.

"I'll take that one." Ferguson said. He looked Kathy in the eye, and seriously said, "Kathy, women will outnumber men seven to one. The Bible says it, so it WILL happen. So you tell me, where did all the men go?"

"Oh. I see. You think that there is going to be more fighting around here, and while we will win, the price will be high."

"That's what the scriptures indicate to me. Maybe I'm wrong, but I'd rather err on the side of caution than not. Bob it's a good idea. I'll get started on it today."

"Bob I think you're making a mistake." Anna said. "I've known a lot of people like Mrs. Molton. Once these kind of people get their teeth into something, they don't let go. She will be a thorn in your side from now on."

"What would you have me do, Anna? Banish her because she chooses to be unpleasant?"

"She won't get any better you know."

"I know. Still, there is little I can do about it, without proving what she is most likely saying. I'd bet she is playing herself up as the victim. Talking about how I didn't avail myself of the benefit of her sage advice. So, obviously I must be some kind of evil person, because I didn't give you the heave-ho. Unfortunately to do anything, without a real cause, will play into her hands, and gain her allies. We don't need that kind of trouble."

"Would it help if I moved out, and into a place of my own?"

"It might, it might not. As you know, she has already made up her mind about you, and about me as well. You move out when you're ready, and don't let her push you into anything."

"You could move in with me." Major Ferguson said.

"No, Gerald. I don't think I should. Who knows what she would say then, and anyway, it wouldn't be right. Not without being married."

"I thought I would offer. Alright. Have it your way."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

It was later that night that Alex and Lieutenant Busby were on patrol on the outskirts of town. It was getting cold, and the first flurries of snow were starting to work their way south, after the blizzard that had cost the Russians so dearly. They were taking a break, as Alex quietly told Busby about what his father had said.

"Seven to one, you say. I can't imagine it. I mean there are some nice women around here, but I can't believe that any of them would be willing to go in for that kind of thing."

"Yeah, I know. Mike didn't seem too happy with the idea."

"Well, I'm not going to worry about it, until it happens. Guess it's a good thing I haven't found someone special yet." Suddenly his head turned towards the darkness outside of town. Listening intently for a moment, he signaled Alex to get down.

"Something's moving out there." he whispered.

They looked down into the valley. A horse drawn wagon was moving down the road towards them. Shortly they heard a voice softly call, "Whoa." and with a pull on the reins, the horse stopped. Three men got out of the wagon. Silently Busby signed Alex to move to the right, as he moved to the left, to put the strangers in a crossfire position. Then He and Alex waited in the dark. After a long period of time, as Busby looked out on the black landscape, he saw the three people moving towards them. They didn't seem to know that the two of them were there since, while they moved quietly, they made no effort to try to conceal their presence.

Busby signaled Alex to remain quiet and low, and as they came close, he challenged them.

"Halt." His voice suddenly seemed loud in the dark. The trio stopped in their tracks. Alex could see them trying to figure out where the voice came from. One of them slowly reached for a pistol.

"Don't! You'll never make it." Busby called out.

The last man in line hesitated. Then started to reach for it again, and Alex wracked the action of his shotgun.

"The man said don't. It would be a good idea to listen to him."

This time the man stopped, and raised his hands above his head.

"Drop the weapons, and step away from them." Busby ordered. Three gun belts hit the ground, and the men backed away from them slowly.

"That's far enough. Anyone care to tell me what you're doing out here?"

"We were sent here."

"By whom, and why?"

There was a brief whispered conversation between the three, and at last the one who seemed to be the leader said,

"There's only one way to find out." He looked in Busbys' direction and replied, "We were sent by Michael. We are looking for someone named Bob."

Busby thought how that sounded good, but how to be sure?

"What does this Bob person look like?"

"I don't know, we've never met."

Alex spoke next. "What about that Michael guy you mentioned?"

"Um, He's an angel. Big fellow, white robes, commanding personality, you don't tell him no, that's for sure."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Ives was less and less pleased as each day passed. His plans were going well, and that was what made him uneasy, after the defeat he suffered in Montana. When things seemed to be all going his way, it had to mean the Nazarene was up to something. But what, he couldn't figure. He was especially disturbed by the loss on satellite communications that had recently happened. He couldn't prove it was the Nazarenes' doing, but the timing was suspect. Then again, satellites were known to fail, for any number of reasons. Still it made him uncomfortable.

One thing that had brought a few smiles to his face, was the fact the Russian break through had gone better than expected. They had almost reached Dubuque. It was about time to have they turn east, and then attack the stubborn resistors in the Appalachian Mountains from behind. Doubtless they would know the Russians were on their way, but they would be caught between two armies and have to either retreat, or die.

It was also encouraging that the Mexican and Cuban Armies had refilled their ranks, and even now were in the process of launching waterborne landings along the Gulf coast. Soon they would once again be in position to move up the Mississippi River, and eventually meet up with the Russians coming down the river, according to the original plan. And this time, there wouldn't be anyone to take the credit, as Claire would have.

First thing in the morning, he would order the Russian forces on the coast to begin to move inland again, and prepare for the advance.


--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Unknown to Ives, far across the Atlantic, there was a deep rumbling coming from underneath the island of La Palma. The locals knew what it meant. They had started leaving the island, and other nearby islands, en masse, when it became clear that it wasn't going to stop. Tremors had shaken the islands for a couple of days now, and there were an increasing number of rock slides coming from the volcano, called Cumbre Vieja.

Once they hit the shores of Africa, they continued to move inland, many, many, miles. They knew they didn't want to be anywhere near the shore, when the volcano blew.

Just before nightfall, it did blow. A fault line on which the volcano was sitting let go at the same time. The resulting earthquake shook loose a massive section of the island. It was over a mile long. It slid into the Atlantic and and the displacement of water started a chain of events that no one could stop. The landslide from the eruption traveled over 35 miles from La Palma's coast, causing the formation and then collapse of a dome of water 3,000ft high and miles wide.

The tsunami that resulted hit the African coast within an hour. It had a height of over 300ft from crest to trough when it crashed into the shores of nearby north-west Africa.

Within five hours it would reach southern England and within 12 it hit America's east coast. What was left of New York, Washington DC, Boston and Miami and most of the eastern seaboard, were almost wiped out by the tsunami generated by the insecure rock falling into the Atlantic.

Since it had traveled at night, and with the satellite out of service, the Russian forces on the coast were largely wiped out, along with the cities. The island of Cuba was devastated. The wave that slammed into it was large enough to inundate all but the highest areas on the island nation. Florida was all but completely washed away. The Mexican Gulf coast was hit almost as hard as Florida.

Nobody ever found any trace of the invasion fleets. It was, of course, far too late to do anything about saving any of the men along the coasts, or in the Gulf of Mexico, by the time Director Ives woke in the morning. Within a half of an hour, he found himself in need of a new secretary. The old one didn't stand up very well to his wrath.


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bob, Major Ferguson, and an even half dozen men, carefully climbed down the slope towards Lieutenant Busby, and Alex. They had called in the three strangers after they made certain that they weren't hiding any further weapons. They hated to wake him, but it was standard procedure not to allow anyone to just waltz into town before checking them out.

By mutual agreement between them, once they reached the spot, Major Ferguson began the questioning, and let these men believe whatever they wanted.

"Who wants to tell me who you are, and what you're doing here?" Ferguson asked.

One man stepped forward and spoke. "You're not Bob."

"I know that, now tell me something I don't know."

"We were instructed to speak with Bob."

"And those instructions came from where, exactly."

"I think I'll save my words for the one I was told to speak with."

"Fine. You don't want to talk to me, head on down the road. I've got better things to do than stand out here in the middle of the night. Sleeping for example." Ferguson turned on his heel, and started to walk away. Bob started to say something, but the Major caught his eye, and gave his head a slight shake. Bob remained silent.

"Alright." The leader called to him. "I guess I can give you the basics.'

Ferguson turned back to face the man and said, "That's all I asked for. We don't disturb Bob for things that aren't important."

"I'm Dennis Heath. These are my brothers, Barry, and James. We come from southern Montana. We were driven out by the Russians. We were told to come here by the angel Michael, and talk to the leader here. We need a place to stay, along with the others that have come with us."

"Well, Dennis. It is my understanding that the Russians were beaten back into Canada. So how could you be driven out by them?"

"Most of them were. Some of the survivors from the battle were cut off, and have banded together and are raiding farms and homes in the mountains."

Ferguson thought about how it sounded plausible, and carried on with his questioning.

"What was this about others with you?"

"We were living in a small town in the southern portion of Montana, in the mountains. When the Russians showed up they were demanding food, drink, and women. We managed to hide the women from them, for a day or two. Then on the second evening, Michael showed up to each of us and told us to get out of town. He said we were to head south and find Bob. After that, we do what he says."

"That's not exactly an answer to my question. What others?"

"We are fourteen men, and twenty seven women."

"I see three."

"We left the others about a half mile back up the road. We didn't want to take a risk with everyone."

Ferguson thought about it for a moment. "Why didn't you fight off the Russians? Or for that matter, why didn't you report them to the authorities?"

"There were too many to fight off. I'd guess about a company of them, with automatic weapons. And we couldn't exactly go to the authorities. We're Christians."

"Stay here." Ferguson ordered. He turned once again and started to walk away. He pointed at Bob and ordered, "You. Come with me."

They walked to the top of the hill, before either spoke.

"What do you think?" He asked Bob.

"I think we should keep them here until daylight, and then check out their story. It shouldn't be too hard to find almost forty people out here in the middle of nowhere. We'll try to check them, by having someone join them." He shook his head. "Twenty seven more women. I can hear Mrs. Molton now."

[day late]

Unbelievably, Director Ives was grateful. The master understood that some things were not under his control. He also understood that sometimes the hated Nazarene did things that nobody could do anything about. This was one such case. He hadn't been blamed for the loss of the Russian soldiers along the east coast. And after all, the master was happy that more of the Americans were dead. Over all, a country that had started out with over three hundred million and was now down to about one hundred and forty million was something even the master had to be pleased about.

Then again, the thing that bothered Ives the most was the fact that they were getting closer to that damned number that the Nazarene seemed to love so much. They were closing in on only ten per cent of the population. He didn't know why, but ever since the beginning, that Nazarene seemed to have some kind of thing about ten percent of the population. Every time he and his people moved against them, at least ten percent survived. It didn't matter where or when. Ten percent or more always got away. It was infuriating. That number had gotten out of Jerusalem in seventy A.D. when the Romans had leveled the city to the ground. Where ever they went after that, or even before, ten percent always got away.

Even in Germany in the nineteen-forties. So many had been killed. But some had escaped. Ten percent. There was something about that number.

Well, He would show that person. Ives decided that the best way to prove Him wrong was to beat that number of ten percent. If he could only knock out enough of the followers of the Nazarene, so that the number fell below ten percent, then the master would not only be pleased, but he would receive untold rewards.

He knew the first thing he had to do was to slow down the American advance. Since the tsunami had so badly damaged the reserves in the Russian rear, the Americans had been taking advantage of the situation by pushing back the invaders, who no longer had the support they were used to having. After the disaster in Montana, the Russians were also losing ground in the Dakotas. Not much, and not very fast, but with the losses, they were finding it harder and harder to hold on to what they had taken.

To make matters even worse, the fantastic advance they had made, first getting to, and then down, the Mississippi River, had to be halted. They now had an extended front with very little in the way of support. They hadn't taken that many casualties, but resupply was becoming a problem. The original plan called for them to break through the American lines in the mountains, and be resupplied by them. Now that was entirely out of the question. Most of those supplies had either been destroyed by the tsunami, or washed out to sea as the flood waters flowed back into the Atlantic. The Mississippi force might still be able to break through the lines, but there wasn't anything there for them. In fact, they might have to lend aid, rather than receiving it.

This was not a good day. As he continued to study the maps, his mood became more and more foul. To give credit where it was due, at least his new secretary knew better than to disturb him as he worked on the problem, unless he had important information.

At that moment, he knocked timidly at the Directors door.

"What?" Was all Ives could get out.

The door opened. "Sir, there is something I think you should see."

"For your sake, I hope it isn't more bad news."

"Actually Sir, I think this is something you might want to use in solving this problem. Or perhaps to, at least, amuse yourself."

Made curious by the statement Ives looked up from the maps for the first time. In the secretaries hand was a piece of paper. He recognized the paper as one that had come from the ones calling themselves 'space brothers', whom, Ives knew were in fact servants of his master in disguise. The secretary handed the Director a piece of paper.

As he read, his mind began to work overtime to keep up with the possibilities presented by what he read. There were endless possibilities here. It read;

From the Asended Masters, returned to Earth.

To the people of America.

It has come to our attention that because of the losses suffer by your people in this war, that the male population has been severely reduced.

It is not our desire to see the population of America reduced to levels from which they can never recover. It is our desire to see America become a strong and vibrant part of the global community, THEREFORE;

After much thought and consultation between ourselves, and those of our home planet, the female population is to be offered the opportunity to re-populate the American Nation by joining with us. We are willing to help any willing woman in this country conceive and bare any number of children that she may want to have.

Our medical sciences are just as advanced as the rest of our technology, and any woman who wishes it can be impregnated, and the amount of time normally needed for carrying a child, can be reduced by two thirds.

Additionally, the amount of time needed to raise the child to adulthood would be equally reduced.

We can, and are willing to do this for your people. All that is necessary is for willing human women to receive our genetic material. We will help with the rest.

All women who are interested in this offer should report to the nearest landing site of any of our craft. All of our people have been notified of this plan, and are in agreement with it. They will help you, no matter where they, or you, are currently living.

Ives was taken by surprise that the master decided to play this card so soon, by could see how it fit in the overall plan. It was just like in the time of that monkey, Noah, and his family. That had been a very pleasant time. There was a lot to be said for these human women. They could be very pleasurable, he knew. Of course back then, they could only use seduction. But this plan would have them asking to be impregnated. After that, it was simple. Corrupt the human genome, and then the master would defeat the plan of the Nazarenes' Father. In doing that, there was no chance that He could be in complete control. That meant that the master would at long last win his throne.

Ives actually smiled.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


It was decided that Lieutenant Busby and Alex would be the ones to find and make contact with the thirty-nine people that had been left behind.

"Let me come with you. I can make sure that everything goes smoothly." Dennis Heath said.

"No offense, Mr. Heath. But I think that we will handle this on our own. After all, so far all we have to go on is your word about how things really are. And we don't know you." The Major said. "If what you say is true, I'm certain you will understand. We are Christians, and we've met a lot of people that have claimed to be like us, but weren't. We need to make sure, before anything else happens."

"I understand, but tell whoever you send to be careful. We've had some tough times lately, and some of them are a little trigger-happy."

It was shortly after that, when Major Ferguson spoke with the two of them.

"Gentlemen, I think it wise to borrow a page out of Heaths' book. I want you both to leave your long arms here. Take only side arms with you. I don't need to tell you this isn't an aggressive action, but I want to stress caution. These people have been fighting the Russian forces for some time now. Busby, you know what that means, so make Alex understand."

"Yes Sir."

"Alright, get going. Try to make it before the sun comes up, but under all circumstances, be careful."

As Alex and Lieutenant Busby moved out, Alex questioned him.

"What was the Major talking about, with that fighting Russians comment?"

Busby sighed, and simply answered, "The Russians take prisoners only when ordered to do so."

"What if you surrender?"

"They take prisoners only when ordered to do so."

"You mean they'd shoot someone who gave up?"

"Yes, I do. Alex, come down off the crest of the ridge. You are providing a target to them."

"It's dark. I don't think they would see me, and it is easier walking up here."

"I'm sure it is an easier walk, but even in star light, you will show up like you wouldn't believe to someone with good eyes, not to mention night vision equipment. Come down here on the slope."

"Alright. So why did we have to leave the rifle and shotgun?"

"It's real hard to attack people out in the open with just handguns. Long arms can reach out and touch them. This proves that we aren't trying to attack them. O.K. Lets' quiet down. I think I see something ahead."

As quietly as possible, Alex and Busby moved into a position to look down on the encampment. Busby was trying to figure how many people were there, in order to verify what they had been told. It wasn't possible. Certainly some people were asleep in the wagons down below, and he couldn't be sure that there weren't any guards posted. He turned to Alex and said,

"Alright. It looks O.K. I think our best bet is to just make our way down there, and announce ourselves from a safe distance."

The sound of a shotgun wracking a round into the chamber came from behind them. A voice said,

"I think your presence is already known. DO NOT reach for your weapons."

Both Alex and Lieutenant Busby remained very still. Neither even considered reaching for their handguns. Then they heard;

"Get their weapons."

They were treated roughly as unseen men grabbed their pistols.

"Hey, look at this. They are both Makarovs'. Those are Russian pistols. Maybe we should just shoot them now."

"Jimmy, you have got to stop being so trigger happy. In case you haven't noticed, that AK-47 you are holding is Russian made too. Maybe I should shoot you."

"That's different. We know each other, but we don't have a clue about these two."

"And we won't if you go around shooting people before you ask any questions."

The lead man used the toe of his boot, to turn Busby over onto his back. Looking up, Busby was staring into the business end of a shotgun.

"Care to do some explaining?"

"A man named Dennis Heath said we'd find you here."

The man named Jimmy started to lose it.

"WHAT have you done with Dennis?" He demanded. Then turned to the other man who had spoken. "You see. These two have done something to the brothers. We have to find out what they've done."

"Jimmy! Calm down. We don't know that they've done anything. They've been gone less than an hour. They couldn't have gotten far. Did you hear any shots? None of the rest of us did." He looked again at Busby. "I think you need to do some talking Mister."

"You're right in more ways than one. They didn't get very far. You can't see it in the dark, but their wagon is only a little over a half a mile down the road. They got out, and walked right up on top of one of our patrols. They are unharmed, but we held they in order to check out their story."

"That sounds reasonable. I'd do the same, but how can we be sure you haven't harmed them? That's the question." He looked at Alex. "What do you have to say?"

"There isn't much to add, except they sure didn't want to shoot anybody. Well, one of them started to pull a weapon, but he was persuaded not to do it."

"Which one?"

"I think it was the one named James. But I can't be sure."

"That sounds like him. How did you persuade him?"

"With a shotgun, kind of like the way you persuaded us not to reach for a weapon."

The leader smiled at that. "Alright. I'll buy that for now, but we seem to have a stand-off. You say you came to check out their story. What did they tell you?"

Busby spoke up. "There are thirty nine of you here. Twenty seven of them women, and you were lead here to escape the Russians."

"O.K. Now I believe you have talked with them."

"How can you buy that? They could have forced them to talk."

"Jimmy, will you stop talking stupid. Do really believe anyone could get the Heath brothers to say anything they didn't want to say?"

"I guess not. But what are we going to do?"

"I have a suggestion." Busby said.

"And what would that be?"

"It will be light soon. I'll lead any number of you back to where they are, and you can see for yourselves."

"Almost. You're a kind of big fellow. I think you will stay here under guard, and your partner here will walk back with Jimmy and someone else."

"Why me?"

"Because you are the one who has the itchy trigger finger. If you are right, you'll get your chance. If you are wrong, which I think you are, you'll have a chance to see for yourself just how stupid you've been."

"Stop calling me stupid."

"Then stop acting that way. If it was up to you, the Heath brothers would have been shot as soon as those people heard us shoot these two. As it is, we have every reason to believe they are alive and well, no thanks to you. Use your head, Jimmy. We out number these two almost twenty to one, and they come here with pistols. Does that sound like they were planning an attack?"

"They could have been scouting us out. Come back later with more men."

"Jimmy, you give me a headache. If they were going to do that, then why were they talking about introducing themselves when we got the drop on them? Think boy, think. Don't just follow you first impulse. You'll live a lot longer that way."

It was almost an hour later, when Alex, Jimmy, and another man named Larry started down the road towards the wagon used by the Heath brothers. While the horizon was starting to show the first rays of light, it was still to dark to see very far. They hadn't gone far before Jimmy started again.

"They better be alright, for your sake."

"They are." Alex answered tiredly. He too was getting his fill of Jimmy's' mouth.

After a short distance further, Jimmy started to complain that he still didn't see the wagon, and occasionally would use his shotgun to hit Alex in the back, to make him either move faster, or to 'behave' himself. Finally, it was Larry that interrupted Jimmy's' tirade.

"You know Jimmy, maybe you should talk a little louder. Maybe they didn't hear you yet."

"You don't tell me what to do. You don't have the right to tell me anything. I'm tired of people telling what to do. And I'm not going to let this one start." He hit Alex yet again. "You hear that boy. You try telling me what to do and I'll hurt you."

That did it. Alex remembered something his father had told him while he was still in high school.

"Jimmy, do you know what the problem with talking big like you've been doing is? The problem is that sooner or later you're going to have to live up to those words."

"I can live up to them, and I'll show you."

Alex had been listening carefully for it. He heard Jimmy take a quick step forward to hit him again, and then he moved. Michelle had spent a lot of time teaching him a few things, before her pregnancy. As Jimmy came at him, Alex dropped low and spun around. He caught Jimmy perfectly with the leg sweep, as it was called, and sent him toppling backwards onto his back. The rifle that had been in his hands went flying up, as Jimmy tried to regain his balance, and Alex caught it. Without even thinking about it, he immediately tossed it to Larry, with one word.

"Catch."

Larry did so, but with a weapon in each hand, all he could do was watch. Alex moved to the fallen Jimmy, and checked him. The fight was all gone out of him. He had hit the ground hard, and had the breath knocked out of him. Alex paused, then looked at Larry.

"Sorry. I just couldn't put up with that anymore."

"Don't apologize. Do you have any idea how many times I've wanted to do something like that? You a karate expert or something?"

"No. That's something my wife taught me."

"Say what? When we meet, remind me not to make her mad. Is he going to be O.K.?"

"Yeah, he just had the wind knocked out of him, that's all."

A voice came from the hillside above them.

"Thanks for not hurting him to badly."

"Dennis? Is that you?"

"Alive and kicking. Or maybe I shouldn't say that. We're alright. They haven't hurt us. Matter of fact, we were on our way to meet you, when we heard Jimmy talking big again."

"Think he learned this time?"

"I hope so. Help him up."




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Director Ives was once again becoming upset. The master didn't blame him for the losses from the tsunami, but with the number of Russian forces on the east coast so badly reduced, the cursed Americans were starting to make serious gains against the remaining Russian forces. The east coast Russian army was falling back further by the day. In Georgia, for example, the Americans had retaken land almost to the new coastline. Things were better organized in the Mississippi River valley, due to the fact there were more men. But they were still losing ground.

To make things even worse for him, Ives had been hearing rumors that the Russian government was beginning to believe that their losses were just to heavy. They were thinking of pulling out entirely. About the only men they had left, in large numbers were guarding their boarder with China. And now in their weakened situation, it was believed that the Chinese might just take advantage of it, to expand their territory.

He also knew that if the Russians pulled out, the Chinese would find themselves in a bad situation. Without the forces in the east to tie them down, these battle-hardened men would be moved west, to battle the invaders there. The Chinese knew it as well.

Ives had to come up with a new plan. He noticed the paper that was still on his desk. A new idea began to form in his mind. If he couldn't kill them all, he would breed them out of existence.

He called for his secretary.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


The latest arrivals in the town were treated like all the others that had come. First they were sheltered in the community center, until they could be interviewed. It was here that Anna proved her worth to the community. Since she had the degree for this kind of thing, Bob asked her to help in getting things organized. She set to work with a will, glad to have found something that she could do to help out.

Mrs. Molton eyed her suspiciously, and every time Anna turned around, there she was. At first it bothered her a little, but she took Gerald's advice, and forgot about her. Besides she was too busy to even care what the woman thought.

For her part, Mrs. Molton was busy asking questions of the newest arrivals about what Anna was doing. She became more and more frustrated as she got nothing but glowing reports on how helpful and well organized Anna had been. Each night, she went back to her home, and berated Anna to her husband. The man was wise enough to not say anything to his wife which she might think was in any way supporting Anna's' position, and wondered as he often did, when this woman was going to talk herself into real trouble.

He wondered how anyone could be so slow to learn. She had bullied her way onto the advisory council, and that had lasted only until the first meeting. Once the people in her area had seen how she behaved once in power, they had gone to Bob and asked what to do about it.

"You put her there by voting her in, so it seems to me you can vote her out. There isn't any 'term in office' you know."

As it always happened, when she was replaced because of her behavior, she blamed others for her troubles. He almost believed that she thought that woman she didn't like, was sleeping with everyone in his wife's group, in order to get his wife removed from her position.

Tonight, she was having a gathering of the few friends she had left, and the women agreed that they didn't want 'that harlot' around, but each of them had differing ideas about what to do about her. After listening for about half an hour, he stood and walked to the door.

"Where do you think you are going?" His wife's voice came angrily from the other room.

"You ladies seem to have a lot to talk about. I thought I'd go for a walk."

"Good idea. You aren't any help here."

He stepped out of the door, and soon found himself at the home of Pastor Jim. He thought for a long time, then finally reached out and knocked on the door.

[day late]

The Chinese forces were much more fortunate than the Russians had been. They didn't rely on high technology as much as the Russian forces and government did. They preferred to have people on the ground, giving real time reports about any given situation. True, this required a much larger spy network than any other government had, but the type, and timeliness information they received was well worth the expense and trouble.

It was for that reason that when the 9.5 earthquake happened in the Kamchatka Peninsula they knew well in advance that their forces along the west coast of America were in deep trouble. The good news, and for them, the verification of their time and trouble, was that they had time to do something to save as many of their men as possible.

They knew they had at least ten hours before the tsunami would begin to roll ashore in the Pacific Northwest. They ordered a complete withdrawal of their forces along the entire west coast. To them it was better to lose America, than the forces they would need for later plans that they had. Anything that would possibly slow the evacuation of troops from the coast, was at first, off-loaded from the ships they had in ports all along the west coast. As time grew shorter, all un-necessary supplies and equipment were simply thrown over the side of the ship, in order to make room for more men.

The last of the Chinese ships left port two hours before the tsunami hit. They had saved over eighty percent of their men, and lost about ninety percent of their weapons and equipment. Still, they had more weapons and equipment back on the mainland. They could still field an army of two hundred million men, which would be more than enough to do what the Central Committee wanted to do.

For Director Ives, this wasn't good. But it wasn't a total loss. He knew that when the Chinese forces pulled out, the Russian forces, with their ever shrinking lines, would do the same. He knew as well, that both sides would claim victory because they had, between them, eliminated the United States as a world power. They had reduced the nation of over three hundred million to a third world country of slightly less than one hundred million. The infrastructure of the country was in total ruin, and it would take many decades before they could even begin to re-establish themselves as a self supporting country, let alone a world power. by then, the rest of the world would be in their control. That was good enough for people that made plans that took decades or more to come to fruition.

So now, what he had to do was to give his declaration to the American people, so the contamination of the human genome could begin. And by corrupting the human species, defeat the plans of the Nazarene and His Father.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


BY ORDER of THE DIRECTOR of The Western Region of the United States, Be it known;

Our friends, and the true creators of the human race, have offered to help in the re-population of this nation. To date, only a small fraction of women, that are of child baring age, have come forward to accept this help. Due to the extreme nature of this emergency, I am assuming the authority, given to me by the United Nations, to use whatever means are needed to guarantee the re-population of this land. Starting on this date, all single women of the American Nation, that are above fifteen years of age, will begin to report to the landing ships of our creators, in order to do their honorable part in solving this problem.

No woman that is already married is required to take part in this action, unless they choose to do so after consulting with their husbands and family members. No woman above child baring age, or girl to young to safely bare children is required to take part.

However as girls become of age, they will report to the landing ships to take their place in this noble venture of the re-population of America. Women chosen to bare this next generation, this generation of Star Children, will be cared for by our creators and their every need provided for. And I assure you that the rewards for your sacrifice, and the rewards to your families will be generous.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


The snow had been falling gently for a couple of days. There weren't any real drifts yet, but the weather didn't show any sign of breaking any time soon

Linda had seen the release from the Regional Director. She didn't like it. She hadn't seen fit to allow any man to touch her up to this point in her sixteen years, so why should she allow some....thing from another planet to do so?

She was glad she had spent so much time learning how to take care of herself in the wilderness. She was skilled with both skis' and snowshoes. She knew how to ice fish, and make a shelter when needed. She knew the art of the bow and arrow, as well as how to make them, if she had to do so. The art of snare making was no mystery to her. She was not afraid to do what was needed to kill, clean, butcher, and cook an animal. She knew that her parents and friends thought her more than a little strange for pursuing such things, but when the food shortages started, her parents were glad to have the extra meat she provided.

When she first heard of the directive, she started to make her plans. Hidden a short way from the house were both skis and snowshoes. She had also, bit by bit, taken small amounts of food, taken from their allotment, and stashed them away as well.

Now here she was, in her bedroom for what she knew was the last time. She knew that she wouldn't be sleeping in her bed this night, or ever again. But she still didn't know where she was going to go. She would have to trust in the God she had been reading about.

If her parents knew that she had been reading a Bible that she had found, they would have gone crazy. So she kept it a secret. All she knew for certain was that the more she read, the more of what she read made sense to her.

"Linda." Her mothers voice came from outside the room. "What are you doing?"

"Hi Mom. I'm getting ready to leave."

"May I come in?"

"Sure Mom. Come on in."

Her mother entered. She smiled at her daughter.

"I'm glad to see you accepting all of this so easily. I know there are some people that are resisting this opportunity."

"Opportunity? It sounded to me more like an order."

"Oh sweety, that is just the way people in government talk. Just think of it. You have not only the chance to help repopulate this country, but also you can be one of the first women to have a 'star child'. Isn't that exciting?"

"I suppose so, but I'm not so sure. I mean, you and Dad always told me that I should save myself for my husband. So what happened? Why should I do this now?"

Her mother came close to her, and put her arms around Linda, lovingly.

"Darling. That was before all of this happened. Things are different now."

"Different how?"

"Honey, I wish I knew how to tell you. You'll understand when you get older."

"What do you mean? I'm old enough to have one of these 'star children' but not old enough to understand why? What kind of nonsense is that?"

"Trust me Honey. You'll understand."

"I guess you're right. I'll find out. It isn't like I have much choice."

Linda's' mother smiled at what she believed was her daughters' acceptance of what was to come. She was also happy about the expected rewards to come from her daughters' sacrifice.

"Trust me, Baby girl. It is for the best."

With that, she left Linda to her packing.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Pastor Jim had listened to the concerns of Mr. Molton. He had even gone so far as to make the subject of forgiveness the subject of the next three sermons. He had gone to great effort to point out how Jesus had spent so much time with harlots and other people that were so looked down upon in His time on earth. He noticed how Mrs. Molton sat and listened to every word he spoke. And he heard how not one single word seemed to sink into her mind. She continued to look for reasons to slam the woman named Anna. Even going so far as to make up things from her own imaginings, without one shred of proof. When asked for proof, she would only talk about things that 'everyone knows'.

The thing was, that it seemed that only Mrs. Molton knew, along with her very few friends. Pastor Jim was at a loss for what else to say.

One evening after church, Mrs. Molton and her friends were once again gathered in her living room. Tonight, the subject wasn't Anna, but rather the Pastor Jim.

"Can you believe the way he has been trying to justify her being here these past couple of weeks?"

"I know what you mean. It's like that witch has put him under some kind of spell."

"I hardly think so. After all, she would have had to put so many other people under a spell too."

"You don't think that is possible?"

"I'm not saying that. But I think it is more likely that she has just deceived them all. I don't know, of course, but I think that fooling a lot of people has got to be easier than putting them all under some sort of demonic spell. That's all."

"Well, maybe you're right, but what are we going to do about it? It seems like we are the only ones that realize what a danger she is to our community. How do we make others understand that?"


--------------------------------------------------------------------------


As the snow continued to fall, Linda waved good-bye to her parents, and walked into the night. While they believed she was headed off to be the mother of one of the first star children, she had other ideas.

After about ten days, Linda was happy she had left when she did. She had been able to pick up pieces of information, here and there. She had found a newspaper one time. Another, she had to hide from some armed men that had set up a road block right over her head as she had been sleeping under a bridge. She had listened intently to both their radio and their conversation.

From what she had learned, things were not going well for the women that had failed to make it to the various landing ships on time. Director Ives had actually sent out trucks with armed men on them or following behind them. Any woman or girl that couldn't prove that they were either married already, to old, or to young were loaded onto the trucks, and taken away. Any men foolish enough to try to stop the wide spread kidnappings were executed on the spot. It didn't take long before all resistance stopped, and the suicides began.

Many women wouldn't be forced into some kind of relationship with a creature from another planet. No matter how much they looked like regular men. But Director Ives had been ready for that one as well. A new directive had been issued. One that stated the family of any woman or girl, so unpatriotic as to kill themselves, would also be killed. Unless the husbands, brothers, or fathers had needed skills for rebuilding the country. It that case they would be used as slave labor for the rest of their lives. However long that might be, under the circumstances.

Linda wondered about her parents, and younger brother. Her father had been wounded in the war, and couldn't really do anything anymore. Her brother was too young to be of much use either. She was fearful for her mother. She might be in her forties, but she was still able to have a child. If they killed her father because of Linda's disappearance, who knew what would happen to her? Then again, her mother had been all in favor of baring 'star children' from the start. So she might even volunteer to take Linda's' place.

She could make a good guess about how her father would react to that. He had been married, with children, when the fighting had first broken out. Like his wife, he was in his forties as well. He didn't have to go to war. But he was the sort of man who would do whatever he had to do, to protect his loved ones. It was protecting the men he was serving with that had gotten him first, wounded, and then out of the war. He wouldn't stand for his wife to do something like that, for any reason.

The more she thought about it, the more she became convinced that her father was most likely dead. Her mother was by now being a host mother, and it didn't matter if it was by choice, or by force, she was by now pregnant. And her brother? He was all of twelve years old. She didn't know about him. Would they force him into some kind of labor camp, or did they just kill him? She couldn't guess. Things had changed so much in such a short period of time, even for her.

She remembered things that used to be so common, that now were rationed, or nonexistent. She had loved going to the mall with her friends. She loved having friends for that matter. Now, everyone was out for themselves. Nobody trusted anyone anymore. People turned on each other merely for a few scrapes of food. She missed the grocery stores with shelves lined with so much food and other stuff, that you had to spend an hour in there deciding what to buy. Very few stores were open anymore. The ones the government kept, at least, partially supplied were guarded by armed men, who had cold eyes.

It was because of men like those that she had decided to not go into any town. Twice in the first day she had to move quickly to avoid men like those. Once she had been just at the edge of town, and had just put on her snowshoes when a couple of men came by in a car. She'd run into the nearby woods as they came closer. She'd heard the car stop, and listened for a moment to see if they were going to follow her. She heard one of them speak.

"Oh hell no. I'm not getting out in this to go chasing someone off into the woods. You do it."

She didn't hear the other man, but the car started up again and pulled away. She breathed a sigh of relief, and then thought to say a small prayer of thanks to the God she had been reading about.

Now she was sitting in a shed used by farmers as an emergency shelter, that is before the farmers had lost most of the animals to the war effort. She felt safe here for the time being. The snow had kept coming and going for the past week, her tracks were not to be found. And this far out in the country, it was unlikely that anyone else would be out this far, in this weather.

She adjusted the wick on the old fashioned oil lamp she'd found, and settled back to read some more of the Bible. Some of the things she read, at first glance, didn't seem to apply to her. This book had promises of help and protection when you needed them. If that was true, why was she here in this shed in the middle of nowhere.

Then she thought about the men in the car, and realized protection could come in many forms. As she thought about it, the wind started picking up. She looked out the window, and could tell the snow was getting heavier. She thought about how lucky she had been to find this shed before the storm had started to get worse. Suddenly she remembered how she had just had a feeling that she needed to go uphill just before she found this place. Perhaps it had something to do with the promised help. She had to know. She turned down the lamp, crawled into her sleeping bag, and began to pray.

"Oh God, I mean Jesus, Oh I don't know what I mean. God, if you are really there, and if you really care about me, I need to know it. I mean I've been pretty lucky so far. But was it luck? It seems like it. Did you do it? Why didn't I go down into the valley before this storm? I'm sure there are places I could have made or found shelter. So why did I come up here to this shed? I know that the wind is worse on the hill top. Unless you find a place like this. So which is it? Are You there? Do you care about me? Please God, Jesus, show me the truth. Thank you. Oh, I mean Amen."


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Director Ives never failed to be amazed at not only how stupid these people could be, but how gullible. He still couldn't believe how the people, especially the women, could get so caught up in trying to be better than the person next to them. After some, expected, resistance to the order to report for impregnation, some of the first women that had volunteered gave glowing reports of their treatment. Their families were also quick to report on the generosity of the space brothers. Large amounts of food were delivered to their homes, along with promises of good medical care for the entire family.

The women themselves were questioned, discreetly, about their 'encounters' with the space brothers they'd had 'relations' with. They reported the encounters were much like those they had with normal men. It was just that things with the 'brothers' were better. When asked how it was better, they would usually answer with something like 'you had to be there' and a very satisfied smile.

After that, women from every country in the world became jealous. They began demanding their own chance to become the parents of 'star children'. It was unfair that only the American women got this chance.

The 'space brothers' waited a whole week before the announcement came.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


To Our Children of Planet Earth

After due consideration, and consultation with our home planet, it has been decided that the opportunity to bare the offspring of mating with our kind, will be given to all the women of Earth.

We ask that the women of Earth have some patience. We had not expected this kind of a reaction from our children. We had hoped that everyone would have been more understanding. However, we are willing to provide the same service for all the women of Earth. We will need some small amount of time to prepare everything to help you.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Director Ives even smiled as he saw how it was becoming something of a badge of honor to be a host mother. Those who refused, or fought against the idea, were looked down on. It was amusing to watch the masters' plan take shape. Not only were these women standing in line for impregnation, some of them were even fighting over who got in line first.

One generation, perhaps two, and the human genome would be totally corrupted. There wouldn't be a chance of stopping the masters plan. Especially since the Nazarenes Father had promised to never flood out the planet ever again. This time it would work. He knew it would work.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The snow was getting deeper, and the wind wasn't letting up at all, when Linda woke in the morning. She didn't know how long she could last in the shed. She didn't have much left in the way of food, and no way to heat the shed, except by the oil lamp. But she wasn't worried. She still wasn't sure about the dream she'd had.

It was the most wonderful dream she could remember. She was in a field of tall green grass. It was warm, and nothing in the world troubled her. Then she met Him. He was a beautiful man. Unlike any she had ever known. Together they walked through the field, and talked. She never did ask His name, it didn't seem important. He seemed to think that she knew who he was, and didn't talk about it. As the dream was ending, He assured her that all would be well with her. If she only believed in Him and what He said.

When she awoke, she couldn't shake the dream, nor did she want to. She wanted to hold on to every last word, sight, and smell. She wanted to believe in Him. Later she came to believe that is why she wasn't frightened when the door handle rattled, and then turned.

[day late]

The wind was still blowing as the door knob started to turn, and Linda figured that was why she hadn't heard anything. While she wasn't afraid, she figured not to take risks that she didn't have to take. The shed was large enough to hold eight or ten animals, and had been divided into different stalls. She had been near the back of the shed, and quickly moved to the one farthest from the door. Ducking down, she looked between the slats of the stalls to see what would happen next.

Two people dressed in heavy winter clothing stepped through the door and quickly closed it behind them. Standing with their backs to her, they shook off the snow, and took off their coats and hats. It was at that point she realized they were girls, about her own age. They still had their backs to her, as they began to speak.

"Are you sure we're doing the right thing?" The shorter of the two asked.

"Your old enough to know what sex is all about. Do you want to have one of those things on top of you? Do you want to have its' baby? I don't."

"I know, but what about Mom and Dad? What about Craig and Lee? They might get killed."

The taller girl sighed heavily.

"I know, but what else could we do? Mom and Dad were both talking about our patriotic duty. They weren't listening to us. Craig and Lee were more upset about no being able to have girlfriends. They didn't care about us. They thought that we were like everybody else, and wouldn't want real boy friends of our own kind. We are on our own. There isn't anyone that is going to help us. We have to take care of ourselves."

"Are you sure nobody is going to find us here, and what is this place anyway?"

"As sure as I can be. This shed used to be used when there were still cattle around here. The ranch hands would use it to keep their horses, and themselves, out of bad weather. I found it while camping a couple of years ago. The snow has covered our tracks. I don't think anyone knows we're here."

"That's not quite true." Linda said.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


As expected, after the Chinese had evacuated, the Russians knew they wouldn't be able to hold their gains, without a much higher price to be paid. It was true that the American population had taken unbelievable losses, but they now had countless Chinese weapons that had been left behind. Two things they knew for certain, the surviving Americans were not like the people they had first encountered. These people were willing to stand and fight. Secondly, with trouble in the government back home was having keeping the former Soviet Republics in line, there would be no more men and material coming to their aid. Time to cut their losses and leave.

They fought a organized withdrawal, rather than letting it turn into a route. They withdrew back up the Mississippi River valley almost along the path they had taken to get as far as they had. Unlike the Chinese, they had a different plan. One that had been used by them before. The 'Scorched Earth' withdrawal left nothing behind that the victorious Americans could use. Anything that could be of use to the retreating Russians was 'liberated' and the rest destroyed. Rail road trains were blown up, and the tracks they ran on were torn up or the ties burned. Any and all food stuffs were taken. Nothing was left behind but ash and ruin.

Director Ives was surprised by the aftermath of the war. He had expected to have to run, not only from the Americans, but from the master as well. As it turned out, most of the Americans credited him with not only holding the enemy advances, but also with their survival as a people through the intervention of the creators from space. And as for the master, he had plans for Ives. Plans that meant he was needed here on Earth for a while longer. The fallen ones, or 'space brothers' as men knew them, needed his help in getting all the women to them. They didn't need problems that would come from abductions. And so far, he had done a good job of it. True there was some resistance at first, but when they followed his advice, and treated the human women gently, they were rewarded with more volunteers than they ever expected.

Yes, things were certainly turning around for Ives. But the most shocking thing of all, was when the Americans overwhelmingly called for him to become their new leader, to replace the late president. Using all of the false modesty at his command, he stood before the cameras and at first declined the offer. Then at the end he, supposedly, humbly said that if the majority of the American people still felt that his services were needed, he would accept the job. But only on a temporary basis.

The people ate it up. They claimed this proved he was the right man for the job, because he didn't want it.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


"Where did you come from?" The girls demanded.

"I was here when you came in." Linda answered.

"Obviously." Said the older girl. "But why are you here."

"I could say I'm taking shelter from the weather, but from what I've heard, I'm here for the same reason you are. I don't want one of those things touching me either."

The sisters could be seen to relax slightly. Then the older one spoke again.

"Did you leave family behind too?"

Linda shook her head. "My parents, and a younger brother."

"Aren't you worried about them?" Asked the younger girl.

"Yeah, I am. But it's kind of weird. I mean my folks always told me to 'save myself for marriage' and that kind of thing. Then Dad got hurt in the war, just before those things showed up. After that, I don't know. Everything kind of changed. When the aliens started talking about 're-population' Mom got all excited and it seemed for a while she was ready to go. Then when they said they only wanted unmarried women, she couldn't wait for me to leave. Dad didn't like it, but said it was my 'duty' so I left. I just didn't tell them where I was going. I hope they are alright. What about you two?"

"Sounds like we could be sisters. Except since our Dad was a farmer, he didn't go to war. They said he had a more important job to do. But yeah, our Mom was kind of the same way." She paused for a moment. "I'm Jesse, by the way. This is my sister, Amie."

"I'm Linda. Nice to meet you."

As she moved forward to shake hands with the sisters, Lindas' Bible slipped from her bag and fell to the floor. Seeing it, Jesse remarked.

"Oh, so you're a Christian. That explains a little more why you are hiding out here."

"I can't say if I am or I'm not. I just found this a short time ago, and just started reading it. A lot of interesting things in here. I don't see why anyone who believes in it should be blamed for what is happening. I just wish there was someone who could help me understand it a little better."

Jesse and Aime looked at each other for a moment. It was like some unspoken conversation was going on. Aime shrugged her shoulders and nodded at Linda. Then Jesse said.

"Sit down. Show me what you don't understand. We'll see if we can help you."




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Several people were sitting around the general store, since it had become the new gathering place. With church on Sunday, and a sort of welcoming center now taking over the community center, the store seemed the natural choice. Some of the younger folks liked the idea, since it had the only pool table in town. With no T.V. or commercial radio, the only other diversions were either cards or whatever board games were available.

Bob was putting a couple of pieces of wood into the old fashioned wood burning, 'pot-belly' stove, when the Major came in, looking for him.

"Bob. Glad I found you. Think we could have a minute?"

He had said it a little loudly, so others would hear him. As a result, three men sitting nearby got up and moved to another table, saying; "Here take this spot." leaving a private space for the two of them. Bob chuckled to himself at how these men knew when what had to be said, was for him alone.

"Well, Major. It seems we have a seat. What's on your mind?"

As they sat down, Ferguson leaned a little closer to Bob and lowered his voice before speaking.

"Bob, what are we going to do, now that the war is all but over?"

"I've been thinking about that." He reached around and started to scratch his shoulder. "I'm not to certain we should do anything just yet. Maybe not until spring. But I have been praying about it."

Ferguson smiled. "I can see that. I think you are about to wear a hole in that shirt. But have you given thought to exactly what we are facing?"

"I have, but lets' hear your thoughts."

Ferguson held up his hand and began ticking things off on his fingers.

"First off, I think just about everyone in the country is armed now. Unfortunately, most of them don't like Christians. Secondly, now that the Chinese are gone, and the Russians are pulling out, they are going to have a lot of time on their hands to find someone to blame for everything. Third, we already know that Christians have been blamed for most of the problems, and now with the aliens claiming to be our real creators, those people are even more likely to come after us. Fourth, they see us as cowards, because we didn't take part in much of the fighting. Never mind the fact that we were kicked out of the service, and being hunted at the same time. In short, sooner or later someone is going to come looking for us, and I think we need to be ready for it. Did I miss anything?"

"Not much. We do have two advantages though. First, we have The Lord, they don't. Second we have a little time. I don't think that anyone is going to be looking for us until spring. We have that long to seek out The Lord, and find out what He wants us to do."
--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Ives knew that he had played his cards just right. By pretending he didn't really want the job of running what was left of the United States, the people who had survived had placed him in a new office, with the title of Supreme Director of Reconstruction, by overwhelming acclimation. He now had the power to do whatever he wanted. He only had to make it sound good, and he was an expert at doing that.

He could see that while the offer of the space brothers was going over well with the female portion of the population, the men were very unhappy. The fact that many of them were now without any chance of getting a wife, at least until after their first child was born from their mating with the fallen ones, was something that had to be dealt with right away. The answer came to him quickly. He could solve two problems at one time. A new directive was put out almost at once.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------




From: Supreme Director Ives

To: The People of The United States

Subject: Reconstruction

As we are all aware, the combination of war and natural disasters has taken a terrible toll on this nation. Both the east and west coasts have been devastated by tsunamis, while the center portion of the country was badly damaged by first the Great New Madrid earthquake, and then damaged even further by the retreating Russian forces.

Much of the available farm land has been burned so badly that it will take a massive effort by all of the people that can reach these areas just to prepare it for spring planting. We also have the additional problem of unexploded munitions that litter the entire area.

Both coasts have a similar problem of debris from the war, and I'm sorry to say, unburied bodies from the war and the tsunamis.To call the situation dire would be an appalling understatement. But our situation is not hopeless.

I have been informed by scouting parties that have already entered the coastal regions that they have been finding large food stores that were left behind by the enemy. It is believed that the Russian forces didn't have the chance to reach these stores during their attack into the center of the country.

In the case of the Chinese forces, we believe that there simply wasn't room on board their ships for these stores. While there are large amounts of food, transporting them to the areas where they are needed most will not be an easy one. There are still small numbers of enemy forces that were abandoned by their nations, on both east and west coasts. These forces will not give want to allow us to take these food stuffs. I will not deceive you. It will be dangerous. But I'm calling on able bodied men to report for duty for the following areas.

First, we will need men who have spent time on the front during the war. It will be their job to protect our men who will be doing the other necessary work.

Secondly, we will need men to search out and find all remaining food stores, and any equipment that can be used to rebuild this country.

Finally, we will need men that are skilled in the use of horse or mule drawn wagons, to bring these needed supplies back to where they will do the most good for the people of America.

We will send medical personnel with these teams, to handle any medical problems that arise. No matter if it is injuries, or infections. The necessary medical personnel will be on hand.

I am asking for volunteers to start with, but should the need arise, a limited draft will be imposed.

I know you have all sacrificed much this far. However I must ask you to step forward one more time, for the betterment of the country. I believe that you the brave men of this land will come forward at this time of need, unlike the cowardly Christians who wouldn't even fight in the war.

Please report to your local post office for screening decide which task you will be assigned to do.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


The three girls continued to talk for the rest of the day. Linda asking and either Jessie or Amie answering. After a while, Linda called for a pause.

"Lets' hold up on the Bible study for a bit. I need to kind of think about it. If you don't mind, I would like to ask a question. But it's kind of personal."

"Go ahead." Jessie said. "If it's to personal, we won't answer."

"O.K. That sounds fair. It is obvious you two are Christians, so what about your family?"

Jesse sighed "It's kind of weird. I mean, Mom and Dad always took us to church, and Sunday school, and we learned a lot. At least until the aliens showed up. We gave ourselves to Jesus a few years ago, and we tried to talk with them about it, but it was like they knew even less than we did."

"Yeah." Aime joined in. "It was like they thought church was some kind of social club. They never studied The Bible, They just went to church to meet people and kind of hang out."

"You mean they didn't even ask questions about what is in The Bible. That doesn't sound like they really believed in anything."

"I hate to say it, but I think you're right. They just wanted to see and be seen, as they say."

"But How could that happen? I mean you must have been going to church for years to learn everything you two know. Didn't they ever accept what The Bible teaches?"

"I guess not." Aime answered. "They never lived like Christians at home. Dad sometimes drank too much, and Mom was always worrying about if her clothes and stuff were better than what someone else had. They both would curse like you wouldn't believe when the got upset or had an argument. I don't understand it either. But in public, they were the just as perfect as could be."

"Yeah, Aime is right. I don't understand it either. They just did their thing and that was it. And when the aliens came, they were among the first to say they never really believed, and they always thought there had to be something else going on."

"From what I've learned so far, I don't see how that would be possible." Linda shook her head. "I mean there is so much in this book, how could anyone not believe?"




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Bob was near the ridge where it had all started. He was looking over the town, and watched as Maria walked up to him. He thought how radiant she looked, even though she wasn't showing her pregnancy yet.

"What are you looking at?" she asked as she drew close.

"I was just thinking. How much things have changed since we first got here."

"That's true. We never see the wild dogs any more. Almost every house in town has someone living in it. According to Kathy at least five women in town are expecting. There certainly a lot of things different."

Bob put his arm around his wife. "That's all true, but it isn't what I'm talking about. Have you ever noticed we seem to have a situation like the Tower of Babel, in reverse. Everyone here is a believer, but instead of one people before God changed everyone, we have just about every race on the planet here. It is amazing to me."

"I see what you mean. I just wish certain ones of those people were a little stronger in their faith."

"Let me guess. Mrs. Molton and her group again?"

"You got it. Now that Major Ferguson and Anna have become something of an item, she's spreading stories that Anna is trying get to us by having him influence you."

"One of these days, that woman is going to go too far. I really think you couldn't change her mind about anything with a baseball bat."

"Isn't there anything that can be done about her?"

"Not without her actually doing something bad enough for us to act. Running her mouth, and making false accusations doesn't do it."

Maria sighed and laid her head against Bobs' sholder.

"Well I guess we'll just have to make the best of it." She paused for a moment. "You know, I can't help the feeling that The Lord wouldn't lead us all to this place, and leave a burr under your saddle like her. I think something is going to happen to change all of that."

"A feeling, or something else?"

"Just a feeling. Nothing like a vision, visitation, or dream."

"I guess we'll have to wait and see. Now young lady. You may not be showing yet, but you are still expecting. Time to get you in out of the snow."

"Yes Daddy."




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


On the morning of second day in the shed, Linda, Jesse, and Aime all woke at the same time. That was strange enough, but they looked at each other and almost at the same time asked each other.

"Did you see him?"

There was confusion for a moment until Jesse took control of the situation.

"Hold on, hold on. Lets' take this one at a time. Aime, what happened with you?"

"I had a dream, I guess. But I've never had such a real dream in my life. I saw a man. A big man, all dressed in white robes. He said that we need to leave here, and he would show us where to go."

"Same thing here." Said Jesse. "What about you Linda."

"I remember he said his name was Michael. And he said that in the morning we would all know it was real." She paused momentarily and said, "Isn't there something about two or three witnesses in The Bible?"

"In the mouth of two or three witnesses, let every word be established." Said Aime. "I guess that's what Michael was talking about. We all saw the same thing. So what do we do now?"

"Pack up and get ready for traveling." Answered Linda.

[day late]

Once the three girls had packed up everything they had, they found they had a problem. While the snow and wind hadn't been very heavy, it had been constant. Snow had drifted against the door. First Jesse tried to open it, and then she and Linda worked together with the same lack of progress.

"Now what do we do?" Amie asked .

"Maybe we can...Shh. Listen." Jesse said.

The faint sound of an engine could be heard. As they listened, it got closer to them.

"Oh no. The army is the only ones with anything that runs anymore. What are we going to do if they come up here?" Linda asked in a frightened voice.

"That doesn't sound like any army truck I've ever heard. It's more like a snowmobile. Do they have those?" Amie said.

None of them knew for certain. They did know they were trapped in the shed, with no way out. Shortly it was clear that the noise was coming closer. They waited for certain capture, and the forced mating that would follow. Suddenly the sound of the engine changed. It was clearly having trouble getting up the slope to the shed. Then it stopped. They listened hardly daring to breathe. Two men began to talk.

"I didn't think we'd get up this hill. The tread on this thing is about shot. We can't get enough traction to get up there."

"Maybe we should walk up there."

"Walk? Are you crazy? I'm not going to climb up there. Besides, look at it. Snow has drifted up against the door, and there aren't any footprints leading up to it."

"Someone could have gotten in there before the snow started. And you never know. There might be some food or something up there."

"Up there? Listen dummy, that thing is too small to hold much of anything. You want to fight your way up that hill, through all that snow, you go right ahead. I'll stay here and finish the coffee before it gets cold."

O.K., o.k. I guess you're right. How much coffee is left?"

"I'd say about a half a cup each."

"Well share it out. Then we'll head back."

"Sounds like a plan."

They listened to the men chat for a couple of minutes, and then heard the machine start up, slowly turn around, and begin to make its' way back down the hill.

Linda sighed in relief and said, "Boy, we got lucky."

Jesse looked at her. "Luck had nothing to do with it. That was The Lord."

"How can you be sure of that?"

"If we had left when we first tried to, our prints would have been clear enough for them to see. It would have only been a short time before they caught up with us."

"But we couldn't leave. The snow has us trapped in here."

"Does it? Help me try the door again."

Doubtful of the outcome, Linda moved to the door. Together Linda and Jesse pushed the door again. While the snow resisted, the door slowly opened, until there was more than enough room for the girls to leave. Linda stared at the open door, and said,

"Thank you God."

"Amen." The sisters said.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Director Ives once again began to think of the little town that had stood against him during the war. Now there wasn't anything to stop his men from going into that town, and cleaning it out once and for all, except for the snow. That problem would be solved as soon as the next rise in the temperature. Until then, all he had to do was get his men into position, and wait.

Once again, he looked over his maps from the war. He would pull some men in off the plains, and get them closer to the foothills. He carefully planned how he would bring men up from Carson City. Also more men, veterans from the vicious fighting in Montana would be moved down from the north. Men from Cheyenne would cover the eastern flank. By moving slowly, just a few miles a day, they would certainly pick up the Christians trail, sooner or later. He called the secretary to give the orders.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Captain Rutherford read the orders for the third time. It still didn't make much sense to him. He and his one hundred and fifty men knew where every town and village was between Cheyenne and the Rockies. Why were they being ordered to spread out so far apart? It would make so much more sense to stick together and go from town to town. Especially if they ran into any remaining Russians. It just didn't make sense.

"Hell, Captain. It isn't like we have to leave today." Sergeant Rutherford, the Captains son, said. "It's going to take a week or more for the snow to melt enough for us to get started. I mean if we still had snow plows, that would be one thing, but this can't be done on foot in snow like this. Why don't you try to confirm those orders, or try to have them change them?"

"I think your right Son. I don't like spreading out so far in good weather. In all of this, if any one group runs into trouble, nobody would be able to get to them fast enough to do anything, except bury the bodies."




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


As Director Ives soon found out, Captain Rutherford wasn't the only one who didn't like the orders. The idea of skirmish lines spreading out for miles on end, just wasn't going to happen. These men were too battle smart to do what he had hoped they would. As much as he wanted the men spread out, in order to cause them to take maximum casualties, they weren't going to do it. Some of them had even sent messages saying as much. It very colorful language.

It took a little time for him to come up with a good excuse, but eventually he sent out new orders requiring each unit to scour every place they came to, for anything that could be used for reconstruction. He also warned them to not only watch out for surviving enemy soldiers, but for those cowardly Christians as well. They would be expected to begin moving out within a week, as a warm front passed through the area.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Major Ferguson didn't politely knock at Bobs' door as he usually did. This morning he pounded impatiently. Bob came to the door, wide awake and already dressed.

"Good morning, Major. I take it you had a visit last night as well."

"If you are talking about Michael, the answer is yes. Bob how are we going to do this?"

"First thing is we have to do is have Jim make an announcement tomorrow at church. Find out if we are the only ones that had this dream."

At that point Alex came jogging up to his father and the Major.

"Wait until you hear about the dream I had." he said.

"The one with Michael?" Ferguson asked.

"You to?"

"And your Dad. I wonder how many people had the same dream?"

Bob looked up and down the street. People were coming from both directions.

"I think we aren't going to have to ask Jim to help with this. Take a look."




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


It wasn't long before everyone who had the dream was gathered in the general store. Bob stood at the front of the group and addressed them.

"O.K. folks. It seems that we all had the same dream. Let me briefly recap, and see if we all got the same message. In short, the Arch Angel Michael has told us that we have ten days to get ready to leave this town. We will have to take food and water for the journey, and everything we can carry in the way of weapons, and building materials. No lumber, or anything like that, just hammers, nails, screwdrivers, and screws, of course. In short, just hand tools. Does anyone have anything else to add?"

"Not everyone got the dream. What about they? I mean, what if they don't want to leave?"

"We'll just have to do our best to convince them."

"What if we can't?"

"We'll just have to cross that bridge when we come to it, I guess."

"How are we going to move all the stuff we have to take?"

"I know we have a pickup, an S.U.V. and the three trucks that the Major and his men brought with them when they came. I know it isn't much room to work with, so everyone think carefully about what you'll want to bring with us. For example, I don't believe that everyone is going to have to bring a hammer. Things like that."

"Bob, may I make a suggestion?"

Certainly Anna."

Why don't we organize this thing from here. As people finalize their lists of what to bring, they bring the list by here and compare it with others."

"Sounds like a good idea, Anna. Would you do the honors of coordinating that?"

"If you want me to, sure."

"I can't think of anyone better qualified. Anyone else have ideas?"

Nobody else could think of anything, so the meeting broke up, and everyone went on their way to begin their preparations.

Needless to say, Mrs. Molton didn't like it one bit. She knew that they had been led here for a reason. The idea that they would have to leave didn't improve her mood. She certainly didn't see any good reason to leave while it was so cold. It would be almost impossible to move through all this snow, and without transportation, why should she have to walk to who knew where.

And she just knew that since that harlot was in charge of coordinating things, she would use that position to make things miserable for her and her friends. Probably put them in the back of the group, so they would have to walk through the mud and filth after everyone else had already walked through the snow and melted it.

No. There was no way she was going to put up with this, and in the morning, she would make her husband go with her down to the store, when the meeting was going on, and talk some sense into these people.
================================================== ========

As with all things, Anna threw herself into her task with a will. Instead of waiting for people to bring her a list, she made a list of her own. Her list was not only filled with things they would need, but also said how many of these things would be needed. As men came in, they would pledge to bring in certain items on a given day. These items were then assigned a packing number. These things were then to be placed on one of the three trucks that had come in with Major Ferguson. It wasn't long before she was asking if Bob minded if the tool box was taken out of the back of his pick up.

"No. Thanks for asking though. Do you mind if I look over your lists?"

"Help yourself." Were Anna's only words.

Bob started going over the lists. He had been around the military trucks enough to know their cargo capabilities. In his mind, he mentally loaded each truck with the things on the list. He saw how each and every item would be of importance once they arrived wherever Michael led them. He found only two things to question.

"Anna? why haven't you figured more of a load for the S.U.V.? I know it can haul more than that."

Not even looking up from her work, Anna answered him.

"That room is spoken for. There is enough room to seat five people. That happens to be the exact number of expectant mothers we have around here. I assume you didn't want them walking."

It hit Bob that he had made a good choice to run things. He hadn't even gotten that far in his thinking.

"I see that things are in good hands. I'll leave you to your work. Meeting in about half an hour, you know."

"I remember. I'll be there."

As Bob walked away, he was happy in one way, that nobody else was aware of. If trouble started, he had to be in front. Maria would demand to be at his side. But now she would be off the front lines, so to speak. She would be kept with the other expectant mothers towards the middle of the group.

On the other hand, when Maria found out about it, she accepted it gracefully, and then asked Anna if there was room on the S.U.V. for more weapons and ammo.

Somehow, they found room.

Now, he was off to the meeting. Everyone who had gotten the same dream met almost every morning now for five days. They discussed and planned on how to make every thing happen. They all worked together, first telling the rest of the community about their dream. Then, by helping to mobilize them to action. It got to be the usual 9:30 in the morning, when Bob called them all together to talk about things.

Bob moved to the front, and opened the meeting in his normal, very unofficial, manner.

"Well folks, where do we stand?"

Before anyone else could say anything, a challenge filled voice called from the back.

"I'LL tell you where we stand, if you'll hear me."

"Mrs. Molton? Is that you? This is a public meeting. If you have something to add, please go ahead?"

Mrs. Molton and a small group of women, accompanied by a man that looked as if he wanted to be anyplace else, stepped to the front of the room.

"You asked where we stand. We're about to make the biggest mistake of our lives. That's where we stand. Have you looked out there? The snow has stopped, and warmer weather is coming. If it suddenly turns cold again, you're going to be stuck out in the open. You'll freeze to death."

"Then where will the rest of us be? Not only that, can you imagine what those roads will be like? We're going to have people getting stuck in the mud. Does all of that sound like something God would do to us, after leading us all here?"

She paused for a breathe, and continued her tirade.

"And now, when we are safe and warm, and dry, you say God wants us to leave it all and go off into the mountains? I say it is a mass hallucination. And now you've got everyone stirred up like ants. You should all be ashamed of ourselves,"

"Mass hallucination? If this had happened when we were all together, you might have a point. But each of these people had the same dream at the same time. Completely unrelated to each other, but the same dream. Doesn't that mean anything to you?"

"It means you all are being influenced somehow." Her eyes were fixed on Anna. "Maybe you are all mistaken. What was said was ten weeks, not days. The point is I'm sure God couldn't have ordered this. We have it good here. Why should we have to move? Besides, why haven't the rest seen anything?"

As she finished up the women around her gave nodding approval to what she had said.

"Mrs. Molton, God is telling you, through us. Only God could do something like this. And in case you didn't hear, each of us tried the spirit in our dream. It was from God. Now if you choose not to believe us, I'd suggest you start thinking about how a handful of you are going to make it through the winter. But whatever you are going to do, be it leave, or stay, you need to get ready for it. Just remember what is written.

Eze 33:8 When I say unto the wicked, O wicked [man], thou shalt surely die; if thou dost not speak to warn the wicked from his way, that wicked [man] shall die in his iniquity; but his blood will I require at thine hand.

And then further down;

Eze 33:9 Nevertheless, if thou warn the wicked of his way to turn from it; if he do not turn from his way, he shall die in his iniquity; but thou hast delivered thy soul.

You've been warned Mrs. Molton. Warned by multiple witness' to the same thing. If you choose not to believe, then it's on your head. As for me? I've tried to be helpful, Mrs Molton. I know others here have tried to speak with you. Nothing helped.

Well, right now we have a situation. So either lead, follow, or get out of the way. I do not have time for these outbreaks of yours. You make your own choice. So go somewhere and do something, but either help, or stay out of our way." With that Bob turned back to the group.

"Now where were we? Has anyone found trailers we can use with those big trucks? It would mean that much more to work with when we get were ever we are going."

As soon as she tried to say anything further, Mrs. Molton found herself either shouted down, or completely ignored. She soon became fed up with such treatment and ordered a retreat for them all. As she moved away, she heard a voice behind her.

"No Janie. I'm staying."

"Harold! What are you doing? Come with me." Mrs. Molton shouted.

He shook his head. "No Janie. I'm staying. I've always let you have your way. But not this time. Can't you see what is happening? These people have heard from God, and you are turning your back on them. I can't do that. I won't do that. I'm staying."

"Have it your own way. Just don't come crawling back to me. Not tonight, or even if you do make it back."

With that she turned on her heel and stormed out. Harold watched his wife leave, heaved a sigh, turned on his own heel, and walked to Major Ferguson.

"What would you like me to do, Sir?"




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


The girls had headed west north west for four days. Every night they would come across a place to take shelter. They always seemed to have food in them, when it was needed. The weather had been beautiful for them, and they made good time. On the evening of the forth day, they found another shed, very little like the one they had met in. They still had no real idea of where they were going, but once a day, Michael would appear and give instructions to one of them.

While looking around the shed, Jesse asked her sister.

"Are you sure this is where we are supposed to stay? There's holes in the walls, not much of a roof, and nothing around here to eat."

"I know. This is the place, I'm sure of it. He said we were to wait here."

"Did he say what for, or for how long?" Asked Linda.

"The only other thing he said was there is a need to move faster. We need to wait for the answer to that problem."

"Well, he hasn't been wrong before. I just hope it is a short stay." Jesse said.

"We don't know how long it might take. Best to be ready to bed down for the night." Linda said.

The sisters saw the sense of her words and began the chore of finding a good place to sleep. They soon found a place along one of the walls that had decent roofing still above it, and seemed to be sturdy enough to offer some protection from the wind. They had just finished setting up their sleeping arrangement, when they heard it. Am animal pulling a wagon, and it was close by.

Looking between the cracks in the walls, they were able to see a single man, driving a team of horses, who were pulling a semi covered wagon. It had a curved canvas roof, but the sides had been rolled up. The wagon came to a stop a short distance from the shed. The driver looked at it.

Inside the girls had done what they had done before. Grabbed everything they could carry, and prepare to run, and leave the rest. They now waited by a back door, and trembled. They heard the man get off the wagon, and walk to the front door. Not even sure of what to expect, the three of them jumped when there came a knock at the door.

"Jesse, Aime, Linda. I'm here to pick you up."

The girls looked at each other, but said nothing.

"Ah, come on girls. Michael sent me, and it's cold out here."

Jesse and Amie looked at each other, and again had their silent conversation, then Aime moved to the door. She picked up a piece of the wood, that she thought might make a good club, if she had to do something. She cracked the door open, just a tiny fraction.

She saw a young man, who was, to be honest, white as a sheet. He seemed scared to death by something.

"How do you know my name?" She asked.

The young man looked at her, through the crack.

"Aime! Oh thank goodness I've found you. Are Jesse and Linda with you?"

"How do you know me? I've never seen you before."

"I told you. Michael sent me to pick you three up. He showed me each and every one of you. I know who you are."

"Wait a minute."

Amie closed the door, and looked at her sister. She shrugged her shoulders.

"He knows we're all here, and our names. And there isn't anything to connect me with you two. Someone had to tell him, and tell him where to find us."

"Open the door, Amie." Jesse said.

[day late]

They continued to bounce down back roads for the next several days. How many was it now? Four? Or was it five? Linda didn't know. it was next to impossible to sleep in the wagon as it rolled along. Every time she would close her eyes, there would be a sudden jolt as the wagon wheels found potholes under the thin covering of snow. Her mind drifted back over the last few days. Rusty had come into the shed, looking like he'd just seen a ghost.

"Look girls. I don't care what a person believes or not, just as long as they leave me and mine alone. But this fella, Michael, he don't play fair. One look at him and you know he is for real. And you DON'T tell him no. So I came here looking for you. Michael said you'd be here. So let's get going."

"Wait a minute." Said Linda. "Who said we know anyone named Michael? What does he look like?"

"Oh, you know. Big fella, long white robes, and with an eye that seems to look right through you."

"We need to pack up. Give us five minutes." Jesse had said.

Rusty couldn't wait to get moving. As long as they were stationary, he got antsy. Once they were on the move again, he would loosen up. They had spent a couple of hours on the road, when Aime finally grabbed Rusty's' arm and said,

"Rusty, PLEASE pull this thing over for a few minutes. You may be used to it, but my kidneys aren't. I need you to stop right now!"

Once the stop was over, Rusty urged the girls back on the wagon and got moving again. During the ride, different ones of the girls would sit up front next to him, and talk.

"So, did this big guy Michael tell you where we are going?"

"Just west. That's all I can really tell you. He just told me which roads to take, and that once we get to a certain point, we'll be told what to do."

"I don't get it. You've said you're not a Christian. So why are you doing this? It could get you in a lot of trouble you know."

"I know. But Michael said it would be alright. I get the feeling he knows a lot more than what he is saying." Rusty paused briefly, and continued. "I've seen a lot of things in my life. I've never seen anything that convinced me there was anything beyond this life. Until Michael showed up. Now I don't know if he is one of those 'space brothers' or an angel, or what. I just know I had to do what he said if I knew what was good for me."

"He is an angel Rusty. A servant to the God we worship. And God has sent his servant to watch over us. I'd be happy to tell you more."

"Let me think about that one."

So it went for four or five days. Linda was so tired, but she knew, that Rusty was not about to stop, until he had done what was asked of him. He seemed to have boundless energy. They would go as far as they could, each day. Once they had set up a camp, they would eat and turn in for some sleep. It felt like they had just closed their eyes, when all of a sudden, there was Rusty. Starting a fire and getting ready to hit the road again. All the girls had spoken with him about God, and what His Son had done for us. But none pushed him into believing.

His questions started simply enough, but they grew more and more complicated as the days went by. They knew he was seriously thinking about what he'd heard from them, and what he had certainly heard from the government. They knew he was close to a choice.

Rusty pulled the reigns, and gently called "Whoa.", as the wagon came to a halt. Rusty pointed to a valley off to his left.

"Ladies, Michael says that you are to head down that valley. You will meet up with some other people like yourselves, in a day or two. But here is where we part company."

The girls quickly gathered their belongings, and climbed off the wagon. It was Amie who spoke first.

"Rusty, I want to thank you for getting us here. What will you do with what you've learned?"

"Miss Amie, I don't really know. I mean it's against everything the government stands for, but for the life of me, I can't find anything wrong with it."

"Take this." Amie handed him her Bible. "But only if you promise me you'll read it."

"You're Bible? Now I couldn't do that. What would you read from?"

"We all have one. I can study with my sister, we've done it before. Just take it and read it. Promise?"

Rusty took the book, stuck it in a pocket, and said;

"I promise. Hey, I've got a five day ride ahead of me to find some answers. Now I have a chance of finding them."

With that, he gently slapped the reigns, turned the wagon around, and pulled away from the trio.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


It was inconceivable to Mrs. Molton that so many people could be so deceived. Within twenty four hours, nearly everyone in town stopped speaking with her. Everyone said they were too busy, getting ready to leave, you understand. Only a very few of the people she knew would take the time to talk with her. They all said the same thing. Only they few, who knew the truth, would have to stand against the rest of the town. There were less than fifteen of them all together. Mrs. Molton was embarrassed that her husband had left her for this madness, but her friends who had similar events happen to them as well, gave her their full sympathy.

She admitted, at least to herself, that she had underestimated her husband. She had fully expected him realize what he was losing, and come home, sometime in the night. He hadn't shown up. When he hadn't come home the second night, she knew he had turned against her as well.

Well, they would see. They would all see. When they came crawling back here, after who knows what happens to them out there. When they got back, she would be someone who people listened to, and respected. She could wait for that.

One thing that vile man Bob had said that she had to agree with was the need to get ready to survive the coming winter. Soon she was collecting food supplies and firewood at her home. She knew there wouldn't be anyone to care for her, for some weeks possibly, ahead. She made certain her needs were taken care of, but found she had little time to talk to her friends.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


By the morning of the ninth day, instead of everyone running around in panic, most people were already set to go. For most of the group, it was simply a matter of topping of their preparations as best they could. Bob couldn't help noticing that while nobody was rude to Mrs. Molton, and her friends, nobody had the time to talk with them either. Of all of them, Bob noted, only Mrs, Molton was making any sort of headway towards taking care of herself.

Right up to the end, whenever Bob actually did speak to her, he had urged her in the strongest possible terms to leave with the rest. She had refused. At least she knew enough to get what she could, while she could. These others will end up fighting over whatever is left. It wouldn't be pretty when she had food, and her friends didn't.

The pick up lead the convoy out of town. It was followed by the S.U.V. and then the three military trucks, each pulling a trailer. House drawn wagons brought up the rear. Somehow they had managed to arrange for everyone to ride, but it was quite crowded.

Mrs. Molton and the other five women watched the convoy leave. Nobody said a thing. Those who were staying simply knew the others would be back shortly after the fist snowfall. They would have their say when the others returned.

The people leaving had, for the most part, tried to get through to the women, with no success. There simply wasn't anything left to say. Except Goodbye.

It was early on the tenth morning the convoy left. Within half an hour the remaining women were deep in conversation about how long it would take for the others to return. As they talked, they realized that the usual coffee was missing.

"I thought you still had some, Janie. Or was I mistaken?"

"No you aren't mistaken, but I'm saving it for when the weather turns colder."

The incident was small, but it finally got the rest of the women thinking about trying to stay alive. They also started eying Mrs. Moltons' kitchen, and pantry. It was later that same day, that some of the women began to feel cheated by their own meager supplies. They somehow felt it was her fault.

They didn't really get to upset with her the first three days after the convoy left. They all had enough food to last for at least a week. Then they would have to start going through to other homes in town, to see what might be left.

On the other hand, they didn't have far to look for firewood. There was an ample supply outside almost each house in town. Each woman could keep herself as warm as she wished.

When the convoy had left town, it was headed to the east, northeast. So they were surprised to see one approaching from the east, southeast four days later.

By the time the women realized that this convoy was not the same as the one that had left, it was too late. There was no place for them to run, and no place to hide.

"Captain Rutherford. I think we got them all. We've found only six of them. And get this, it looks like one of those towns we were told to watch out for."

"What gives you that idea?"

"There's all kinds of Christian junk all over the place."

"Well now. That kind of puts a new light on things, doesn't it?"

"What do you mean?"

"Most of the men are un-married. With the 'brothers' taking our women, they are without female companionship. Now these women, they're Christians. That means they have no rights. Now they could be taken in for impregnation, or they could be spared that if they were already pregnant. It's not like they could refuse."

"I think the men would appreciate the chance."

"I think they've earned it."

The women had been gathered in the community center for 'safe keeping'. It didn't take long before they found out how safe they really were. Somewhere during the night most of the women renounced God, their husbands, families, everything, and everyone they could think of, it this would just stop. Before dawn, all but one of them were dead.

The last remaining woman was brought into the general store, where Captain Rutherford had set up his headquarters. The guards set her in a chair, near the door, and left. They weren't worried about her running away. They didn't think she could even stand and walk.

Rutherford was looking over maps on a table with his back to her. It had rained, briefly, but hard last night. All signs of where the rest of the people had gone was washed away. He planned on getting as much information from this woman as he could. The threat of giving her back to his men should be enough to make her sing like a bird. Then he heard the shot.

Spinning on his heel, he saw the woman fall. The handgun that fell from her hand had come from his belt, left hanging on a peg near the door. He sighed. Now they would have to find the rest of these Christians the hard way.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

The girls continued to head west, northwest, after leaving Rusty. They had avoided any contact with people, and had managed to either hunt, or live off of things they found at night around a still functioning farmyard. They weren't happy with the diet, but it was better than nothing. They had been together for around three weeks now, and as they walked, they also continued to read and talk about The Bible. Soon, even Linda understood when certain expressions were used. Like baring her cross. She noticed that no matter how uncomfortable or tiring they became, neither of them complained. Linda asked about it.

Jesse answered. "The Apostle Paul said that he learned to be satisfied, no matter his condition. Now this comes from a man that had been beaten countless times, stoned three times I think, shipwrecked more than once. He ended up in Rome, only to be executed by Nero. And he learned to be satisfied. Sounds like we still have quite a way to go, if we start complaining now." She smiled then continued. "Besides, if we did, who would listen, and what would it change?"

"I never thought of it that way." She fell silent for a moment. "Kind of gives the old story about 'suffering in silence' a whole new meaning."

"Hey." Amie Called out. "Do you think Rusty is O.K.? I've been watching the weather behind us. It looks real bad. It just isn't getting any closer to us. Think he might of got caught in that?"

"I think it is safe to say that as long as he keeps his promise, he won't go wrong." Jesse Said.

"I think God will keep an eye on him until he makes his choice to follow The Lord, or not." Linda said. "I got a feeling it could be a hurricane out there, and the weather would be calm where ever he is."

"I hope so. He was nice."




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Director Ives was amazed at the messenger that was waiting for him when he got to work. The news he brought was even more amazing. Ives was to begin the implementation of the mark. It wasn't to be called that, of course, but it was now time to begin, so that later the job would be much easier with a large part of it done.

He assured the messenger that it would be done.

He sat in his office figuring just how far he could push this, without letting the masters plan out in the open. He knew how he could accomplish most of it. To start with, he could make sure that every woman that was honestly entitled to receive benefits for their mating with the 'space brothers' would receive a computer chip in their right hand, or forehead. That way nobody that wasn't entitled could steal the benefits from those who were.

The next part would be for identification of those who would have a right to food stores, as they became available.

He thought carefully about it, and over the course of the next two weeks, he released two statements.


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

To: The People of the North American Directorate

It has been brought to the attention of the directorate that certain persons have been trying to claim benefits, to which they have no right. Every effort is being made to keep these un-authorized persons from claiming that which is not theirs. However, to date some persons have managed to slip through our reward system.

Not after today. I am asking every woman that has or is going to come forward to accept the offer of impregnation, now accept this computer chip implanted in their hand. This chip will ensure that no one but those who are actually entitled to benefits, will receive them. It will also ensure that if someone is not entitled, they will not receive any benefits. In this way, we may be truly fair in the delivery of earned benefits, and be able to stop the fraud that is being forced upon us.

Furthermore, I am requesting that the family members that are also entitled to such benefits also allow the implantation of these identifiers. In this way, no deserving person will be denied their rightful benefits.

Now we come to the matter of equal distribution of such food stuffs, and other needful items that our people will doubtlessly liberate from the formerly occupied zones.

My friends. I don't think that any will disagree that those who bore the burden of combat, should be the first to receive the benefits from the liberated items. But this war has been so devastating to us all, it is hard to know just who has served, and in what capacity. I am asking that all veterans bring whatever proof they have of service to the nation. Once the proof of service is verified, then you as well will be eligible to receive an identifier, no benefits can ever again be denied you.

There will undoubtedly be those who have concerns about the safety of such measures. There will be some who may feel that implanting a identifier under the skin is an extreme thing to do. Let me put these fears to rest.

I will admit, the need for these identifiers is extreme. We live in extreme times, I'm sure you will all agree. I'm sorry to say that even at times like these, when we need each other the most, there are still those people who are only concerned with their own benefit. Their own profit. Identification cards can be stolen, lost, or destroyed. The implanted identifier can not stolen. It can not be lost. It can not be destroyed.

Let me also remind you all. These identifiers were invented by the creators of humankind. Who would better know how to make such a device and make certain that it won't be harmful to us?

Starting at the first of next month, all persons known to the Directorate to be actual combat veterans, will start to receive notices in the mail. These notices will give a day, time, and date to report to the facility listed in the notice. While these identifiers are highly recommended by the Directorate, they are not required. Each person must choose to accept this, or not.

It is only right that you should be reminded, and think about the fact that those who choose to side with us, will be the first in line for the benefits. Be sure to consider this when making your decision.


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bob turned off the radio.The only thing in his mind was a scripture.

Rev 13:16 And he causeth all, both small and great, rich and poor, free and bond, to receive a mark in their right hand, or in their foreheads:

Rev 13:17 And that no man might buy or sell, save he that had the mark, or the name of the beast, or the number of his name.

Rev 13:18 Here is wisdom. Let him that hath understanding count the number of the beast: for it is the number of a man; and his number [is] Six hundred threescore [and] six.

Well, they were certainly making it difficult to refuse. Not required, but if you wanted to eat, you got the chip. You want to work, you got the chip. He shook his head. He knew that even at this late date, there were still those who held out hope for a rapture of some sort. What was it going to take for the scales to be taken off the eyes of some people? The beginning of the implementing of The Mark was beginning right in front of them, and they still believe that we are going to be out of here at any time.

He looked again at the map before him, trying to guess where they were being led. Yellowstone? Certainly in that direction. Finally he had to admit that his knowledge of the area was just too limited. he would have to trust The Lord.

Considering the weather, he had lots of reasons to do that. No matter which way they went, the weather was perfect for traveling. Behind them, the weather was terrible. All sign of their passing was completely wiped out. Game turned out to be far more abundant than they had any right to expect. So, food wasn't a problem. During earlier months the townsfolk had dried and put back as much as they could, in the way of nuts, berries, and different vegetables. Now a pattern had developed. They would travel for two days, and stop for one. At the times they were at a temporary camp, everyone would prepare meals for the next several days. So as they moved, they could get by with cold meals if they had to do so. And there had been a few times they did have to.

But now, he was getting that feeling again. The feeling that they had to remain here, no matter how much he wanted to be on the move. He had told Maria that he was going for a walk, and scratched his shoulder.

Maria nodded knowingly. "Don't let the food get cold."

"Now, Sweetheart. Have you ever known me to be late for a meal?"

"That depends. If you're not helping someone, or going off on one of your prayer walks, you'll be back on time. Otherwise, I'll re-heat it when you get here."

Bob had walked over a small hill, sat down and began to pray. He simply didn't understand why they had been held up here for days now. He sat there on a fallen tree, looking at the wilderness before him. He watched as three deer walked into the open and grazed briefly. After they had left, a mixture of different animals and birds passed before him. Then he heard it. A voice. Gently, he eased himself behind the log, and drawing his pistol assumed a firing position.

In the bushes a little off to his right something was moving through. He waited. If these were renegade Russians, or even anti-Christian Americans, he was in a bad spot. Nobody knew where he was. They would have to follow the sound of shooting. That might take too long. But he couldn't leave without exposing himself. he had to wait. The brush began to part.

"Amie. Are you sure we are supposed to come here? I mean there isn't much going on around here." Jesse said, as she emerged from the brush.

"It sure doesn't seem like it." Linda agreed as she followed Jesse.

The three of them jumped when Bob said, "There's more going on than you might think."

[day late]

Just before he had spoken, Bob had holstered his pistol, and was glad he did. When he did speak it took all of the girls by surprise. Linda recovered first and said,

"Where did you come from?"

"Oh, I've been here a while. I'm a member of a group that has been led to this place. We've been on the move for a while now. We were west of here in the mountains, but we've had to move out of where we were."

"We? Who is we? I only see you." Jesse wanted to know.

"Oh there are quite a few of us, just over the hill. We've been waiting here for a couple of days. I think I know why now."

"What reason would that be?" Linda spoke again.

"You, I believe. Tell me something girls. Here we are out in the middle of nowhere, and all of a sudden, you show up. I heard you speaking as you came up the hill. Did Michael lead you here?"

"How do you know about that?" Amie asked.

"For now, I'd say that it is enough to say that you aren't the only ones that Michael has been speaking with."

"That sounds good. How can we be sure?" Linda again spoke.

"I'll tell you what. I know you have most likely been running for your lives lately. You have no reason to trust me. That being the case, I'm going to turn around and walk back up to the top of the hill. You ladies stay as far back from me as you like. When we get to the top, you can see for yourselves that I'm not alone, and that maybe you can trust me. Come on."

With that, Bob turned and began slowly walking. He listened carefully for a moment, and then heard the sounds of footsteps behind him. He smiled to himself. These girls were being cautious. Good for them.

At just about the time that Bob reached the hilltop, he heard his name called. Looking down the other side of the hill, a noticeably pregnant Michelle came walking towards him. He called to her as the girls came up behind him, still keeping their distance.

"Michelle. What are you doing out here girl? Are you trying to make yourself sick?"

"There you are. Alex is busy helping Mom get things ready for another night here." She stopped speaking for a moment, noticing the girls for the first time. "Oh, hi there. Are you girls out here by yourselves?"

"Not any more it seems." Jesse answered. She looked at her sister and Linda. They both nodded their heads, slightly. The sight of a pregnant woman was the last thing they expected to see coming towards them. And the fact that she not only knew this man, but seemed to be comfortable with him, helped to put them all at ease.

"Well, are you guys hungry? I'm sure we have enough to have some company for supper."

"Starving." Answered Jesse.

"Then come on. Supper is still hot." Michelle looked at Bob. "I think you need to speak with Kathy. There are some things she wanted to talk to you about."

"Later. Right now, supper seems like the most important thing. Ladies, will you join us?"




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


When he first heard of the capture of that town, Director Ives was quite happy. Then he was told that only six people had been taken prisoner. After that he was told that none of them had lived through the night. That was when he became angry. The people in the outer office started looking for reasons to be anyplace else. They heard how angry he became, and they heard how he took out his anger on his secretary. They heard his screams, and trembled. After a short time, Ives came out of his office and looked at the nearest functionary.

"YOU are my new secretary. Clean up the mess in my office. Then I want to know how far the forces moving into the areas that have to be cleared have gotten."

"Yes Sir." The man said, "I'll have that information for you shortly."

"Make sure it is shortly."

Ives left the building. As he walked down the street he realized just how much had already been accomplished. In the short time he had been on earth, he, and the other directors had managed to reduce the American population by at least two thirds or more. America was certainly a third world country now. That was evidenced by the fact that the most common form of transportation and the most frequently stolen was the horse. In some of the outer regions the Americans had reverted to the wild west sort of law enforcement. Horse thieves were hung when ever they were found.

Food production was at an all time low, not only because of the lack of not only fertilizers, but farmers as well. Not only that but much of the food that had been grown this past season had rotted in the field because of the lack of transportation.

Christians were becoming very hard to find, but it was odd to say the least that just when he thought that all of them had been eliminated in an area, suddenly more of them would be found. It was frustrating to him that in many cases it seemed that the Nazarene was doing things to make people that had never even considered that religion or any religion for that matter to start believing overnight. Not only that but these new believers were absolute fanatics. He had personally overseen the torture of a number of them. It didn't matter how badly he hurt them. They would not give up their faith, and often died with the Nazarenes name on their lips. He hated it when they did that.

And now, just when he thought that he had finally gotten rid of the ones that had been so protected by the Nazarene, he finds out that the town was virtually empty and because of the weather all traces of their trail had been wiped out, leaving them free to roam the countryside without concern for their lives. It was maddening.

On the other hand, the plan for introducing the Mark was going along quite well. Even Ives had been amazed at how many of these monkeys were ever so happy to stand in line for however long it took to get their chip. He smiled when he thought about how many of them actually had a party to celebrate the acceptance of the Mark. According to figures that he had seen of the remaining ninety million, more or less, Americans fully one quarter of them already had the Mark, and the majority of the rest were already on the waiting list to get their chip.

Yes, that part of the plan was going well now that the Christians weren't there to speak out against it. Once the master managed to defeat the plan of the Nazarenes Father, then any of those people left would become easy prey for those who followed his master. It was just a matter of time.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Bob found the tent being used by Kathy, Tim and their family. He knocked on the tent pole and called out to them.

"Anyone home?"

"Sure Bob. Come on in."

He ducked his head as he entered the tent, and found the parents were alone inside.

"Evening. I was told that you wanted to speak to me Kathy."

"Yes, I do. Bob, I don't know for sure just how far this has gone but I've been hearing a lot of remarks about this little trip of ours. People are complaining that we are just wandering aimlessly, and you don't have a clue as to where or when we are going to stop and settle down again."

"Well, they are partially right. I don't know where, when, or even if we are going to settle down. I just know that it is like it has been from the beginning. Without our guide, I don't try to go anywhere. What are they saying about the fact that so many people had the same dream on the same night which told us to hit the road?"

"Honestly, I think that is the only reason that nobody has stepped up to the plate to try to take your job. You should hear some of those conversations. Unbelievable. Several people will get together, start criticizing you and blaming you for what is happening and then one of the dreamers will show up and announce that they know you are doing what you are led to do by The Lord. They will point out that they know because of their dream, and they have full confidence in you. After that the talk just kind of dies out until next time."

"I guess I should have expected this. Makes me wonder how Moses put up with it. At least there are two good things. I don't have to deal with as many people as he did. Secondly, nobody is just sitting around waiting for the rapture anymore."

Tim spoke up. "You mean that you don't know?"

"Know what?"

"About the pool. Some of the people have started a pool of sorts on just how many days are left until we are taken out of here."

"What! Aside from the fact that the rapture isn't going to happen until the second coming, according to what Jesus Himself said in Matt. 24:29 - 31, what do they have that they could use to bet with?"

Kathy smiled. "They are betting on who will have to pour the wine for each other at the wedding supper."

Bob shook his head. As he started to speak again, something changed. Bob suddenly looked upward and said,

"I'm here."

After a moment of silence, he spoke again.

"I understand. I will do as He wants."

Bob then slumped into a chair. Kathy rushed to his side, asking,

"BOB! Are you alright?"

"What? Oh, Kathy. Yes I'm fine. Michael had something to tell me. It's kind of overwhealming when it happens. You guys need to get ready to move. We need to leave, tonight!"

"What? Bob, we don't have enough daylight left to get everthing packed."

"I'm sorry Kathy. We don't have a choice."

There was a commotion outside the tent. Loud voices were heard. Major Ferguson suddenly burst into the tent.

"BOB! Did you hear?"

"Yes major. Michael was just here."
--------------------------------------------------------------------------

"Michael? Bob, what are you talking about? There's a large group of men headed this way. I left Busby and a couple of others to keep an eye on them, but they will be here by morning." Ferguson said.

"I would say that is exactly what Michael was talking about. We've been instructed to move out within two hours."

"I hadn't heard about that, but I'm not surprised by it. There have to be close to two hundred heavily armed men out there. They are on foot, but they are moving steadily in this direction. Looks like a recon in force, I'd say. If we are bugging out, I need to get Busby and the others back here."

"Go ahead and pull them in. We need to get a move on."

The word to pack up and be ready to move passed quickly through the camp by word of mouth. A number of people had taken advantage of the extended stay at this camp to unpack, and use numerous items. Now that the word came to leave in a hurry, somethings couldn't be repacked in a short such a short time. What couldn't be quickly packed up, was abandoned. It took less than the two hours that they had been given for everyone to be ready to go. As the last of the people finished their preparations, Lieutenant Busby and three others came trotting into what was left of the camp. None of them even asked what had happened, they simply swarmed onto the wagons and trailers as everything started to move.

While most items had been loaded onto the trucks, wagons, trailers and even horses, there was still obvious signs of recent occupation. However with such a short time to get ready, it couldn't be helped. They knew that if the men that were coming happened on to the spot there was no doubt they would realize what was going on and give chase.

"Major? I think we are ready. Can you think of anything we can do to cover our tracks on such short notice?" Bob asked.

"There is one thing. We should cut branches from these trees, and tie them to the back of each vehicle or trailer, so that they help wipe out our tracks. We can also try weighing them down a little so that they do a better job of it. The American Indians used tricks like that to elude the Army in their day."

"See to it." Bob said as he scratched his back.

"Yes Sir."

Looking at his watch, Bob spoke to Ferguson one more time.

"Major. I want you to bring up our rear. Should anything happen that might cause problems like a vehicle break down, do whatever you feel is needed to keep things moving. I don't care if you have to hog tie someone and throw them over the back of a saddle, keep them moving."

"Will do. Look don't get me wrong, but why me on rear guard?"

"It is a matter of authority. People might feel like they could argue with Lieutenant Busby or one of the others. They won't argue with you."

"Roger that."

Bob went to the S.U.V. to find his wife.

"Honey. I need you to drive for me. I assume you can handle a stick shift."

Maria smiled at him.

"Bob, I lived in those mountains for a long time. I was married to a trucker for over twenty years. I can handle it. What are you going to be doing?"

"Intense prayer, what else?"

With almost fifteen minutes left to their time limit the people gathered in the central portion of the former camp and waited for the word to move. Bob joined them with Pastor Jim at his side.

"Folks, I know this was unexpected, but there is no need to panic. The forces headed this way are on foot, and even now at least two to three hours behind us. Not only that we can move faster than they can with our vehicles and horses. We should be able to stay well ahead of them. Just the same, I've asked Jim to say a prayer for us before we leave. Pastor."

What followed was a short but highly sincere and heartfelt prayer for guidance and protection. Once everyone had said amen Bob raised his head and said,

"Alright. Lets' do it."

Lieutenant Busby led a mixed squad of Special Forces men and civilians that had been trained while in the town, including some of the women that the Major had been training to fight, took the point position and immediately moved out. Their job was to stay about a quarter of a mile ahead of the main group and through maintaining radio contact, scouted in whatever direction they were instructed to go.

Next, men and women were placed on each flank a hundred yards out to make certain there weren't any forces that would spring an ambush.

As the column moved out Major Ferguson and the people with him did what they could to erase all sign that the group had passed this way. He knew that if the men coming towards them were any good they would know within half an hour of finding this place they would have a good idea of just how many people they would be following. He stopped for a moment just before ordering his people to move out. Looking skyward he said,

"Father, we've done all we can. Please blind their eyes so they don't see this place. Thank You. Amen.

Then he and his people followed the rest.




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Captain Rutherford's' men found the camp a little under three hours after Ferguson had pulled out. With the lateness of the day, he decided to set up camp for the night. Whoever had been here, they wouldn't get very far before it was to dark to travel. He knew that he and his men could probably catch up with them in the next day or so. Once they did, they would know what was what. There was no telling who had been here. He did know it wasn't a military camp. Tents had been pitched here and there, instead of in neat rows. So this had to be a group of civilians.

The question was why so many would be sneaking through the back country like this? If they were running from renegade Russian or Chinese troops, where were their pursuers? If not then why were they here? It was all explained to him when one of his men came to him later in the evening.

"Sir. Look what I just found." The man held out a small book for his inspection. It was a New Testament. Obviously dropped by one of the people that had just left this place.

"Sargent. Pass the word. Christians ahead. It is going to be a short night and an early start in the morning. Everyone has to be ready for action at any time. Once we get to them, the loot will be shared equally, and any women found are for our pleasure. We don't have to worry about prisoners."

The Sargent smiled coldly.

"I think they'd like that Sir."

"I'm sure they will. You have your orders."




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


The Christians went as far as they could that evening. When they finally stopped for the night, they were in a small valley that had a stream running through it. Unusual for this time of year. Normally it would have been frozen nearly solid. The Christians individually thanked God as they filled water jugs and barrels.

However the people that had questioned Bobs' leadership now had fresh ammunition to us against him. In their minds clearly Bob wasn't doing his job right. If he had been, they wouldn't be running for their lives now. Another thing they didn't like was the place they had been told to stop for the night. They had just come down a narrow dirt road that wound back and forth in switchback fashion into a kind of valley, that was almost bowl shaped. Around them on three sides the ground was higher than the position they were in. They knew enough to realize that it could well be a death trap.

Maria for her part, had followed Bobs' instructions to the letter. As they traveled she listened to the instructions given by her husband to the teams on each flank, and the one on point. She didn't know why this place was chosen, but if this is where The Lord wanted them she wouldn't question it. She knew he was doing the right thing. When he wasn't talking on the radio he had been deep in prayer, and she didn't say a word for fear of disturbing him.

Things started to worse later that evening when Lieutenant Busbys' team came in. In no time at all word spread around the camp that there was another, and larger group of men directly in their path. They were trapped between to forces and totally outnumbered.

During the night Maria would wake from time to time. She looked over to where Bob had been the last time, and he was still there, praying. It was about four A.M. when she woke again, but this time Bob was sitting next to her.

"Hi. Been sitting there long?"

"About fifteen minutes."

"Any answers yet?"

"Maria, listen very carefully to me. I need to tell you something."

At this, she sat upright, wide awake.

"Sweetheart, you have to promise me something."

"Anything Dear. You know that."

"This is different. I don't know what is going to happen. What I have been told is that our enemies will catch up with us some time tomorrow morning. When they do we must not provoke them in any way."

"Bob, are you alright? Those people want to kill us all, and you say not to do anything?"

"If I thought it would help, I'd be laying mines and booby traps this instant. But they won't help this time. We must trust The Lord."

Maria could see the earnestness in his eyes. She answered. "Alright. I won't even give them a harsh look. But I can't say I like it." The she smiled at him and pulled off her night clothes. "Come to bed. We still have time before the sun comes up."

"Are you sure?"

"What's the matter? Afraid you're going to get me pregnant?"

"I guess it is a little late to worry about that."

"So, come to bed."




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


It was a little after six A.M. when Bob woke Major Ferguson.

"What's wrong?" He asked.

"Major, I've gotten instructions about tomorrow. I know this sounds crazy, but you must follow these orders exactly."

"Yes Sir. What are my orders."

"I've written a statement, that I want you to read to the camp at about eight o'clock. Then I want you to round up ever firearm in camp and place them under guard. Use any force you feel is necessary. Understand?"

"The order, yes. The reason, no."

"Read the statement, and all will be made clear. Now if you'll excuse me, I must get ready myself."

Ferguson lit a small lamp and began to read.

'My friends, we all know the situation. The enemy is both before and behind us. The Lord knows the spot we are in, and wants us to trust in Him. He wants me to remind you of what Moses said to the Children of Israel when they were at the Red Sea.

Fear ye not, stand still, and see the salvation of the LORD,

My friends, we must all stand still and watch. For that reason, I've ordered Major Ferguson to collect every weapon in camp until this days events are past. I have gone to pray and make ready for what I must do, but I will be with you before the enemy comes. Give the Major your weapons, then stand still and watch.'




--------------------------------------------------------------------------------


It was shortly before eleven A.M. when Captain Rutherford's men reached a ridge line just above the camp. All of the Christians stood in a group in the open. All but one. A man stood out in front of them. He called out to them.

"HALT! In the name of the Most High God, I command you to drop your weapons and leave here now. Fail to do so, and you will never leave here. So says The Lord."

"You see men." Rutherford shouted. "They are Christians. Kill that one first."

Most of the weapons along the line fired at Bob at nearly the same instant. At only fifty yards, they didn't miss. Bob was hit by so many bullets, his shirt was shredded into rags. The impact of them lifted him off the ground and threw him backwards. He hit the ground, and remained motionless.

"Now men, lets' get them all. Charge!"